Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

being of like age with

  • 1 σύμμετρος

    A commensurate with, of like measure or size with, σύμμετρος σῷ ποδί (sc. ἡ βάσις) E.El. 533;

    χαμεύνῃ Id.Fr. 676

    ; βόστρυχον.. σύμμετρον τῷ σῷ κάρᾳ exactly like it, A.Ch. 230: esp. of Time, commensurate with, keeping even with, δαλὸν ἥλικα ξύμμετρόν τε διαὶ βίου ib. 610 (lyr.); τῷδε τἀνδρὶ ς. being of like age with him, S. OT 1113; ποίᾳ ξύμμετρος προὔβην τύχῃ; coincident with what chance have I come? i.e. in the very nick of time, Id.Ant. 387, cf. E.Alc.26 (infr. 111).
    2 in Mathematics, having a common measure, σύμμετροι αἱ τῷ αὐτῷ μέτρῳ μετρούμεναι (sc. γραμμαί) Arist.LI 968b6; freq. denied of the relation between the diagonal of a square and its side, Id.APo. 71b27, APr. 41a26, Ph. 221b25, Rh. 1392a18; [τὸ νόμισμα] πάντα ποιεῖ σύμμετρα commensurable, Id.EN 1133b22; μήκει οὐ σύμμετροι τῇ ποδιαίᾳ not lineally commensurate with the one-foot side, Pl.Tht. 147d, cf. 148b: [comp] Comp., of musical intervals,

    ταῖς αἰσθήσεσιν εὐληπτότερα τὰ -ότερα Ptol.Harm.1.10

    .
    II in measure with, proportionable, exactly suitable, λόγοι ἀνδράσι ς. Isoc.4.83, cf. 5.110, 12.135; γῆ θηρίοις μᾶλλον ἢ ἀνθρώποις ς. Str.15.1.26;

    σ. πρός τι Pl.Lg. 625d

    , Metrod.Fr.1, etc.; c. dat., Pl.Men. 76d, Ti. 67c, Epicur.Fr.81 ([comp] Comp.).
    2 abs., in right measure, in due proportion, symmetrical, opp. ὑπερβάλλων and ἐλλείπων, Arist.EN 1104a18, al.;

    τὸ σ. καὶ καλόν Pl.Phlb. 66b

    ;

    τῶν φύσει ξηροτέρων.. ὡς πρὸς τὸν σ. παραβάλλειν Gal.6.360

    , cf. 27, al.
    4 moderate,

    πόνοι Isoc.1.12

    ;

    ὥστε σύμμετρον.. τὸ πνεῦμα.. ποιεῖν Antiph.202.16

    ;

    σ. τροφαί Sor.1.26

    , cf. 49, al.; σ. στέγη moderate in size, X.Oec.8.13; of suitable size,

    σκῆπτρον OGI56.62

     (Canopus, iii B.C.).
    III Adv. - τρως in moderation, Isoc.1.32, etc.; in due time,

    ἀφίκετο E.Alc.26

    ; σ. πρὸς ἑωυτόν conveniently, Hp.Off.3; σ. ἔχειν πρός τι to be in proportion to.., X.Eq.1.16;

    εἴς τι Arist.Mir. 834a15

    ;

    σ. ἴσχειν λεπτότητος καὶ πάχους Pl.Ti. 85c

    ; τὸ μετὰ νοῦ καὶ τὸ ς. Nicom.Com.1.36; = μετρίως, φέρειν IG12(7).396.31 (Amorgos, ii B.C.), cf. Aristid.Quint.2.5. [comp] Comp. - ότερον more fittingly, D.61.27 (v.l. -ώτερον).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σύμμετρος

  • 2 πνεῦμα

    πνεῦμα, ατος, τό (πνέω; Aeschyl., Pre-Socr., Hdt.+. On the history of the word s. Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 308ff).
    ① air in movement, blowing, breathing (even the glowing exhalations of a volcanic crater: Diod S 5, 7, 3)
    ⓐ wind (Aeschyl. et al.; LXX, EpArist, Philo; Jos., Ant. 2, 343; 349; SibOr 8, 297) in wordplay τὸ πνεῦμα πνεῖ the wind blows J 3:8a (EpJer 60 πνεῦμα ἐν πάσῃ χώρᾳ πνεῖ. But s. TDonn, ET 66, ’54f, 32; JThomas, Restoration Qtrly 24, ’81, 219–24). ὀθόνη πλοίου ὑπὸ πνεύματος πληρουμένη MPol 15:2. Of God ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα who makes his angels winds Hb 1:7; 1 Cl 36:3 (both Ps 103:4).
    ⓑ the breathing out of air, blowing, breath (Aeschyl. et al.; Pla., Tim. 79b; LXX) ὁ ἄνομος, ὅν ὁ κύριος Ἰησοῦς ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 2 Th 2:8 (cp. Is 11:4; Ps 32:6).
    ② that which animates or gives life to the body, breath, (life-)spirit (Aeschyl. et al.; Phoenix of Colophon 1, 16 [Coll. Alex. p. 231] πν.=a breathing entity [in contrast to becoming earth in death]; Polyb. 31, 10, 4; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 4 p. 394b, 8ff; PHib 5, 54 [III B.C.]; PGM 4, 538; 658; 2499; LXX; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 19 [Stone p. 44] al.; JosAs 19:3; SibOr 4, 46; Tat. 4:2) ἀφιέναι τὸ πνεῦμα give up one’s spirit, breathe one’s last (Eur., Hec. 571; Porphyr., Vi. Plotini 2) Mt 27:50. J says for this παραδιδόναι τὸ πν. 19:3 (cp. ApcMos 31 ἀποδῶ τὸ πν.; Just., D. 105, 5). Of the return of the (life-)spirit of a deceased person into her dead body ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πν. αὐτῆς Lk 8:55 (cp. Jdg 15:19). εἰς χεῖράς σου παρατίθεμαι τὸ πν. μου into your hands I entrust my spirit 23:46 (Ps 30:6; for alleged focus on ἐλπίζειν s. EBons, BZ 38, ’94, 93–101). κύριε Ἰησοῦ, δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου Ac 7:59; composite of both passages AcPl Ha 10, 23 (cp. ApcMos 42). τὸ πν. μου ὁ δεσπότης δέξεται GJs 23:3 (on the pneuma flying upward after death cp. Epicharm. in Vorsokrat. 23 [=13, 4th ed.], B 9 and 22; Eur., Suppl. 533 πνεῦμα μὲν πρὸς αἰθέρα, τὸ σῶμα δʼ ἐς γῆν; PGM 1, 177ff τελευτήσαντός σου τὸ σῶμα περιστελεῖ, σοῦ δὲ τὸ πνεῦμα … εἰς ἀέρα ἄξει σὺν αὑτῷ ‘when you are dead [the angel] will wrap your body … and take your spirit with him into the sky’). τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πν. νεκρόν ἐστιν Js 2:26. πν. ζωῆς ἐκ τ. θεοῦ εἰσῆλθεν ἐν αὐτοῖς (i.e. the prophet-witnesses who have been martyred) Rv 11:11 (cp. Ezk 37:10 v.l. εἰσῆλθεν εἰς αὐτοὺς πνεῦμα ζωῆς; vs. 5). Of the spirit that animated the image of a beast, and enabled it to speak and to have Christians put to death 13:15.—After a person’s death, the πν. lives on as an independent being, in heaven πνεύματα δικαὶων τετελειωμένων Hb 12:23 (cp. Da 3:86 εὐλογεῖτε, πνεύματα καὶ ψυχαὶ δικαίων, τὸν κύριον). According to non-biblical sources, the πν. are in the netherworld (cp. En 22:3–13; Sib Or 7, 127) or in the air (PGM 1, 178), where evil spirits can prevent them from ascending higher (s. ἀήρ2b). τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν πορευθεὶς ἐκήρυξεν 1 Pt 3:19 belongs here if it refers to Jesus’ preaching to the spirits of the dead confined in Hades (so Usteri et al.; s. also JMcCulloch, The Harrowing of Hell, 1930), whether it be when he descended into Hades, or when he returned to heaven (so RBultmann, Bekenntnis u. Liedfragmente im 1 Pt: ConNeot11, ’47, 1–14).—CClemen, Niedergefahren zu den Toten 1900; JTurmel, La Descente du Christ aux enfers 1905; JMonnier, La Descente aux enfers 1906; HHoltzmann, ARW 11, 1908, 285–97; KGschwind, Die Niederfahrt Christi in die Unterwelt 1911; DPlooij, De Descensus in 1 Pt 3:19 en 4:6: TT 47, 1913, 145–62; JBernard, The Descent into Hades a Christian Baptism (on 1 Pt 3:19ff): Exp. 8th ser., 11, 1916, 241–74; CSchmidt, Gespräche Jesu mit seinen Jüngern: TU 43, 1919, 452ff; JFrings, BZ 17, 1926, 75–88; JKroll, Gott u. Hölle ’32; RGanschinietz, Katabasis: Pauly-W. X/2, 1919, 2359–449; Clemen2 89–96; WBieder, Die Vorstellung v. d. Höllenfahrt Jesu Chr. ’49; SJohnson, JBL 79, ’60, 48–51; WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits ’65. S. also the lit. in Windisch, Hdb.2 1930, exc. on 1 Pt 3:20; ESelwyn, The First Ep. of St. Peter ’46 and 4c below.—This is prob. also the place for θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ ζωοποιηθεὶς δὲ πνεύματι• ἐν ᾧ καὶ … 1 Pt 3:18f (some mss. read πνεύματι instead of πνεύμασιν in vs. 19, evidently in ref. to the manner of Jesus’ movement; πνεῦμα is that part of Christ which, in contrast to σάρξ, did not pass away in death, but survived as an individual entity after death; s. ἐν 7). Likew. the contrast κατὰ σάρκα … κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 1:3f. Cp. 1 Ti 3:16.
    ③ a part of human personality, spirit
    ⓐ when used with σάρξ, the flesh, it denotes the immaterial part 2 Cor 7:1; Col 2:5. Flesh and spirit=the whole personality, in its outer and inner aspects, oft. in Ign.: IMg 1:2; 13:1a; ITr ins; 12:1; IRo ins; ISm 1:1; IPol 5:1; AcPl Ant 13, 18 (=Aa I 237, 3).—In the same sense beside σῶμα, the body (Simplicius, In Epict. p. 50, 1; Ps.-Phoc. 106f; PGM 1, 178) 1 Cor 5:3–5; 7:34.—The inner life of humans is divided into ψυχὴ καὶ πνεῦμα (cp. Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 10 p. 370c τὶ θεῖον ὄντως ἐνῆν πνεῦμα τῇ ψυχῇ=a divine spirit was actually in the soul; Wsd 15:11; Jos., Ant. 1, 34; Tat. 13, 2; 15, 1 et al.; Ath. 27, 1. S. also Herm. Wr. 10, 13; 16f; PGM 4, 627; 630. ἐκ τριῶν συνεστάναι λέγουσι τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐκ ψυχῆς καὶ σώματος καὶ πνεύματος Did., Gen. 55, 14) Hb 4:12. Cp. Phil 1:27. τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 Th 5:23 (s. GMilligan, Thess. 1908, 78f; EvDobschütz in Meyer X7 1909, 230ff; EBurton, Spirit, Soul, and Flesh 1918; AFestugière, La Trichotomie des 1 Th 5:23 et la Philos. gr.: RSR 20, 1930, 385–415; CMasson, RTP 33, ’45, 97–102; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 161–66). σαρκί, ψυχῇ, πνεύματι IPhld 11:2.
    ⓑ as the source and seat of insight, feeling, and will, gener. as the representative part of human inner life (cp. PGM 4, 627; 3 Km 20:5; Sir 9:9 al.; Just., D. 30, 1; Did., Gen. 232, 5) ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ Mk 2:8. ἀναστενάξας τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ λέγει 8:12 (s. ἀναστενάζω). ἠγαλλίασεν τὸ πν. μου Lk 1:47 (in parallelism w. ψυχή vs. 46, as Sir 9:9). ἠγαλλιάσατο τῷ πν. 10:21 v.l., Ἰησοῦς ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πν. J 11:33 (s. ἐμβριμάομαι 3); Ἰης. ἐταράχθη τῷ πν. 13:21. παρωξύνετο τὸ πν. αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ Ac 17:16; ζέων τῷ πν. with spirit-fervor 18:25 (s. ζέω). τὸ παιδίον ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι Lk 1:80; 2:40 v.l.; ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ πν. Paul made up his mind Ac 19:21 (some would put this pass. in 6c, but cp. Lk 1:66 and analogous formulations Hom. et al. in L-S-J-M s.v. τίθημι A6). προσκυνήσουσιν τῷ πατρὶ ἐν πνεύματι of the spiritual, i.e. the pure, inner worship of God, that has nothing to do w. holy times, places, appurtenances, or ceremonies J 4:23; cp. vs. 24b. πν. συντετριμμένον (Ps 50:19) 1 Cl 18:17; 52:4.—2 Cl 20:4; Hv 3, 12, 2; 3, 13, 2.—This usage is also found in Paul. His conviction (s. 5 below) that the Christian possesses the (divine) πνεῦμα and thus is different fr. all other people, leads him to choose this word in preference to others, in order to characterize a believer’s inner being gener. ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πν. μου Ro 1:9. οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πν. μου 2 Cor 2:13. Cp. 7:13. As a matter of fact, it can mean simply a person’s very self or ego: τὸ πνεῦμα συμμαρτυρεῖ τῷ πνεύματι ἡμῶν the Spirit (of God) bears witness to our very self Ro 8:16 (cp. PGM 12, 327 ἠκούσθη μου τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπὸ πνεύματος οὐρανοῦ). ἀνέπαυσαν τὸ ἐμὸν πν. καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν they have refreshed both me and you 1 Cor 16:18. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χρ. μετά τοῦ πν. (ὑμῶν) Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25. Cp. 2 Ti 4:22. Likew. in Ign. τὸ ἐμὸν πν. my (unworthy) self IEph 18:1; IRo 9:3; cp. 1 Cor 2:11a—On the relation of the divine Spirit to the believer’s spiritual self, s. SWollenweider, Der Geist Gottes als Selbst der Glaubenden: ZTK 93, ’96, 163–92.—Only a part of the inner life, i.e. that which concerns the will, is meant in τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής Mt 26:41; Mk 14:38; Pol 7:2. That which is inferior, anxiety, fear of suffering, etc. is attributed to the σάρξ.—The mng. of the expr. οἱ πτωχοὶ τῷ πνεύματι Mt 5:3 is difficult to determine w. certainty (cp. Pla., Ep. 7, 335a πένης ἀνὴρ τὴν ψυχήν. The dat. as τῇ ψυχῇ M. Ant. 6, 52; 8, 51). The sense is prob. those who are poor in their inner life, because they do not have a misdirected pride in their own spiritual riches (s. AKlöpper, Über den Sinn u. die ursprgl. Form der ersten Seligpreisung der Bergpredigt bei Mt: ZWT 37, 1894, 175–91; RKabisch, Die erste Seligpreisung: StKr 69, 1896, 195–215; KKöhler, Die ursprgl. Form der Seligpreisungen: StKr 91, 1918, 157–92; JBoehmer, De Schatkamer 17, 1923, 11–16, TT [Copenhagen] 4, 1924, 195–207, JBL 45, 1926, 298–304; WMacgregor, ET 39, 1928, 293–97; VMacchioro, JR 12, ’32, 40–49; EEvans, Theology 47, ’44, 55–60; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 134ff; Betz, SM 116 n. 178 for Qumran reff.).
    ⓒ spiritual state, state of mind, disposition ἐν ἀγάπῃ πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος with love and a gentle spirit 1 Cor 4:21; cp. Gal 6:1. τὸ πν. τοῦ νοὸς ὑμῶν Eph 4:23 (s. νοῦς 2a). ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος with the imperishable (gift) of a quiet disposition 1 Pt 3:4.
    ④ an independent noncorporeal being, in contrast to a being that can be perceived by the physical senses, spirit (ELangton, Good and Evil Spirits ’42).
    ⓐ God personally: πνεῦμα ὁ θεός J 4:24a (Ath. 16, 2; on God as a spirit, esp. in the Stoa, s. MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48/49. Hdb. ad loc. Also Celsus 6, 71 [Stoic]; Herm. Wr. 18, 3 ἀκάματον μέν ἐστι πνεῦμα ὁ θεός).
    ⓑ good, or at least not expressly evil spirits or spirit-beings (cp. CIG III, 5858b δαίμονες καὶ πνεύματα; Proclus on Pla., Cratyl. p. 69, 6; 12 Pasqu.; En 15:4; 6; 8; 10; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 15f [Stone p. 10, 15f] πάντα τὰ ἐπουράνια πνεύματα; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 26 [Stone p. 82] ὑψηλὸν πν.; PGM 3, 8 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε, ἱερὸν πνεῦμα; 4, 1448; 3080; 12, 249) πνεῦμα w. ἄγγελος (cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 108; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 33; 8, 12) Ac 23:8f. God is ὁ παντὸς πνεύματος κτίστης καὶ ἐπίσκοπος 1 Cl 59:3b.—Pl., God the μόνος εὐεργέτης πνεύματων 1 Cl 59:3a. Cp. 64 (s. on this Num 16:22; 27:16. Prayers for vengeance fr. Rheneia [Dssm., LO 351–55=LAE 423ff=SIG 1181, 2] τὸν θεὸν τὸν κύριον τῶν πνευμάτων; PGM 5, 467 θεὸς θεῶν, ὁ κύριος τῶν πν.; sim. the magic pap PWarr 21, 24; 26 [III A.D.]); the πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων Hb 12:9. Intermediary beings (in polytheistic terminology: δαίμονες) that serve God are called λειτουργικὰ πνεύματα Hb 1:14. In Rv we read of the ἑπτὰ πνεύματα (τοῦ θεοῦ) 1:4; 3:1; 4:5; 5:6; s. ASkrinjar, Biblica 16, ’35, 1–24; 113–40.— Ghost Lk 24:37, 39.
    ⓒ evil spirits (PGM 13, 798; 36, 160; TestJob 27, 2; ApcSed [both Satan]; AscIs 3:28; Just., D. 39, 6 al.; Ath. 25, 3), esp. in accounts of healing in the Synoptics: (τὸ) πνεῦμα (τὸ) ἀκάθαρτον (Just., D. 82, 3) Mt 12:43; Mk 1:23, 26; 3:30; 5:2, 8; 7:25; 9:25a; Lk 8:29; 9:42; 11:24; Rv 18:2. Pl. (TestBenj 5:2) Mt 10:1; Mk 1:27; 3:11; 5:13; 6:7; Lk 4:36; 6:18; Ac 5:16; 8:7; Rv 16:13; ending of Mk in the Freer ms.—τὸ πν. τὸ πονηρόν Ac 19:15f. Pl. (En 99:7; TestSim 4:9; 6:6, TestJud 16:1; Just., D. 76, 6) Lk 7:21; 8:2; Ac 19:12f.—πν. ἄλαλον Mk 9:17; cp. vs. 25b (s. ἄλαλος). πν. πύθων Ac 16:16 (s. πύθων). πν. ἀσθενείας Lk 13:11. Cp. 1 Ti 4:1b. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου (s. δαιμόνιον 2) Lk 4:33. πνεύματα δαιμονίων Rv 16:14 (in effect = personified ‘exhalations’ of evil powers; for the combination of πν. and δαιμ. cp. the love spell Sb 4324, 16f τὰ πνεύματα τῶν δαιμόνων τούτων).—Abs. of a harmful spirit Mk 9:20; Lk 9:39; Ac 16:18. Pl. Mt 8:16; 12:45; Lk 10:20; 11:26.—1 Pt 3:19 (s. 2 above) belongs here if the πνεύματα refer to hostile spirit-powers, evil spirits, fallen angels (so FSpitta, Christi Predigt an die Geister 1890; HGunkel, Zum religionsgesch. Verständnis des NT 1903, 72f; WBousset, ZNW 19, 1920, 50–66; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919, 25ff; Knopf, Windisch, FHauck ad loc.; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism ’46, esp. 54–56, 69).—Hermas also has the concept of evil spirits that lead an independent existence, and live and reign within the inner life of a pers.; the Holy Spirit, who also lives or would like to live there, is forced out by them (cp. TestDan 4) Hm 5, 1, 2–4; 5, 2, 5–8; 10, 1, 2. τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον … ἕτερον πονηρὸν πν. 5, 1, 2. These πνεύματα are ὀξυχολία 5, 1, 3; 5, 2, 8 (τὸ πονηρότατον πν.); 10, 1, 2; διψυχία 9:11 (ἐπίγειον πν. ἐστι παρὰ τοῦ διαβόλου); 10, 1, 2; λύπη 10, 1, 2 (πάντων τῶν πνευμάτων πονηροτέρα) and other vices. On the complicated pneuma-concept of the Mandates of Hermas s. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. on Hm 5, 2, 7; cp. Leutzsch, Hermas 453f n. 133.
    ⑤ God’s being as controlling influence, with focus on association with humans, Spirit, spirit as that which differentiates God fr. everything that is not God, as the divine power that produces all divine existence, as the divine element in which all divine life is carried on, as the bearer of every application of the divine will. All those who belong to God possess or receive this spirit and hence have a share in God’s life. This spirit also serves to distinguish Christians fr. all unbelievers (cp. PGM 4, 1121ff, where the spirit is greeted as one who enters devotees and, in accordance w. God’s will, separates them fr. themselves, i.e. fr. the purely human part of their nature); for this latter aspect s. esp. 6 below.
    ⓐ the Spirit of God, of the Lord (=God) etc. (LXX; TestSim 4:4; JosAs 8:11; ApcSed 14:6; 15:6; ApcMos 43; SibOr 3, 701; Ps.-Phoc. 106; Philo; Joseph. [s. c below]; apolog. Cp. Plut., Numa 4, 6 πνεῦμα θεοῦ, capable of begetting children; s. παρθένος a) τὸ πν. τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:11b, 14; 3:16; 6:11; 1J 4:2a (Just., D. 49, 3; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 22, 3). τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ πν. 1 Pt 4:14 (Just., A I, 60, 6). τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12b. τὸ πν. κυρίου Ac 5:9; B 6:14; B 9:2 (cp. Mel., P. 32, 222). τὸ πνεῦμά μου or αὐτοῦ: Mt 12:18 (Is 42:1); Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f.—Cp. 1QS 4:21); 1 Cor 2:10a v.l.; Eph 3:16; 1 Th 4:8 (where τὸ ἅγιον is added); 1J 4:13.—τὸ πν. τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν Mt 10:20. τὸ πν. τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ro 8:11a.—Without the art. πν. θεοῦ (JosAs 4:9; Tat. 15:3; Theoph. Ant. 1, 5 [p. 66, 18]) the Spirit of God Mt 3:16; 12:28; Ro 8:9b, 14, 19; 1 Cor 7:40; 12:3a; 2 Cor 3:3 (πν. θεοῦ ζῶντος); Phil 3:3. πν. κυρίου Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39 (like J 3:8; 20:22; Ac 2:4, this pass. belongs on the borderline betw. the mngs. ‘wind’ and ‘spirit’; cp. Diod S 3, 60, 3 Ἕσπερον ἐξαίφνης ὑπὸ πνευμάτων συναρπαγέντα μεγάλων ἄφαντον γενέσθαι ‘Hesperus [a son of Atlas] was suddenly snatched by strong winds and vanished fr. sight’. S. HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919, 19ff; OCullmann, TZ. 4, ’48, 364); 1 Cl 21:2.
    ⓑ the Spirit of Christ, of the Lord (=Christ) etc. τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ Ac 16:7. τὸ πν. Χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:32. τὸ ἐν αὐτοῖς πν. Χριστοῦ 1 Pt 1:11. πν. Χριστοῦ Ro 8:9c. πν. τοῦ Χριστοῦ AcPl Ha 8, 18. ἀπὸ τοῦ πν. τοῦ χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:10. τὸ πν. Ἰης. Χριστοῦ Phil 1:19. τὸ πν. κυρίου 2 Cor 3:17b (JHermann, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61). τὸ πν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ (=θεοῦ) Gal 4:6. As possessor of the divine Spirit, and at the same time controlling its distribution among humans, Christ is called κύριος πνεύματος Lord of the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18 (s. Windisch ad loc.); but many prefer to transl. from the Lord who is the Spirit.—CMoule, OCullmann Festschr., ’72, 231–37.
    ⓒ Because of its heavenly origin and nature this Spirit is called (the) Holy Spirit (cp. PGM 4, 510 ἵνα πνεύσῃ ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸ ἱερὸν πνεῦμα.—Neither Philo nor Josephus called the Spirit πν. ἅγιον; the former used θεῖον or θεοῦ πν., the latter πν. θεῖον: Ant. 4, 118; 8, 408; 10, 239; but ἅγιον πνεῦμα Orig. C. Cels 1, 40, 16).
    α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον (Is 63:10f; Ps 50:13; 142:10 v.l.; cp. Sus 45 Theod.; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 10 [Stone p. 10]; JosAs 8:11 [codd. ADE]; AscIs 3, 15, 26; Just., D. 36, 6 al.) Mt 12:32 = Mk 3:29 = Lk 12:10 (τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα; on the ‘sin against the Holy Spirit’ s. HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 96–112; AFridrichsen, Le péché contre le Saint-Esprit: RHPR 3, 1923, 367–72). Mk 12:36; 13:11; Lk 2:26; 3:22; 10:21; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; 2:33; 5:3, 32; 7:51; 8:18 v.l.; 10:44, 47; 11:15; 13:2; 15:8, 28; 19:6; 20:23, 28; 21:11; 28:25; Eph 1:13 (τὸ πν. τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τὸ ἅγιον); 4:30 (τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ); Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 16:2; 18:11 (Ps 50:13); 22:1; IEph 9:1; Hs 5, 5, 2; 5, 6, 5–7 (on the relationship of the Holy Spirit to the Son in Hermas s. ALink, Christi Person u. Werk im Hirten des Hermas 1886; JvWalter, ZNW 14, 1913, 133–44; MDibelius, Hdb. exc. following Hs 5, 6, 8 p. 572–76).—τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα (Wsd 9:17; OdeSol 11:2; TestJob 51:2; ApcEsdr 7:16; Just. D. 25, 1 al.) Mt 28:19; Lk 12:10 (s. above), 12; Ac 1:8; 2:38 (epexegetic gen.); 4:31; 9:31; 10:45; 13:4; 16:6; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 13:13; 1J 5:7 v.l. (on the Comma Johanneum s. λόγο 3); GJs 24:4 (s. χρηματίζω 1bα). As the mother of Jesus GHb 20, 61 (HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 64ff; SHirsch, D. Vorstellg. v. e. weibl. πνεῦμα ἅγ. im NT u. in d. ältesten christl. Lit. 1927. Also WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 9ff).
    β. without the art. (s. B-D-F §257, 2; Rob. 761; 795) πνεῦμα ἅγιον (PGM 3, 289; Da 5:12 LXX; PsSol 17:37; AssMos Fgm. b; Just., D. 4, 1 al.; Ath. 24, 1. S. also Da Theod. 4:8, 9, 18 θεοῦ πνεῦμα ἅγιον or πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἅγιον) Mk 1:8; Lk 1:15, 35, 41, 67; 2:25; 4:1; 11:13; J 20:22 (Cassien, La pentecôte johannique [J 20:19–23] ’39.—See also 1QS 4:20f); Ac 2:4a; 4:8; 7:55; 8:15, 17, 19; 9:17; 10:38; 11:24; 13:9; 19:2ab; Hb 2:4; 6:4; 1 Pt 1:12 v.l.; 1 Cl 2:2; AcPl 6:18; 9:4 (restored after Aa I 110, 11); AcPlCor 2:5.—So oft. in combination w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος ἁγίου Ac 1:2; 4:25; Ro 5:5; 2 Ti 1:14; 1 Cl 8:1 (cp. διὰ πν. αἰωνίου Hb 9:14). διὰ φωνῆς πν. ἁγίου AcPl Ha 11, 6. ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου (Eus., PE 3, 12, 3 of the Egyptians: ἐκ τ. πνεύματος οἴονται συλλαμβάνειν τὸν γῦπα. Here πνεῦμα= ‘wind’; s. Horapollo 1, 11 p. 14f. The same of other birds since Aristot.—On the neut. πνεῦμα as a masc. principle cp. Aristoxenus, Fgm. 13 of the two original principles: πατέρα μὲν φῶς, μητέρα δὲ σκότος) Mt 1:18, 20; IEph 18:2; GJs 14:2; 19:1 (pap). ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ (PsSol 17:37; ApcZeph; Ar. 15, 1) Mt 3:11; Mk 1:8 v.l.; Lk 3:16; J 1:33b; Ac 1:5 (cp. 1QS 3:7f); 11:16; Ro 9:1; 14:17; 15:16; 1 Cor 12:3b; 2 Cor 6:6; 1 Th 1:5; 1 Pt 1:12 (without ἐν v.l.); Jd 20. ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου 2 Pt 1:21. Cp. ἐν δυνάμει πνεύματος ἁγίου Ro 15:13, 19 v.l. (for πνεύματος θεοῦ). μετὰ χαρᾶς πνεύματος ἁγίου 1 Th 1:6. διὰ ἀνακαινώσεως πνεύματος ἁγίου Tit 3:5.
    ⓓ abs.
    α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα. In this connection the art. is perh. used anaphorically at times, w. the second mention of a word (s. B-D-F §252; Rob. 762); perh. Mt 12:31 (looking back to vs. 28 πν. θεοῦ); Mk 1:10, 12 (cp. vs. 8 πν. ἅγιον); Lk 4:1b, 14 (cp. vs. 1a); Ac 2:4b (cp. vs. 4a).—As a rule it is not possible to assume that anaphora is present: Mt 4:1; J 1:32, 33a; 3:6a, 8b (in wordplay), 34; 7:39a; Ac 8:29; 10:19; 11:12, 28; 19:1 D; 20:3 D, 22; 21:4; Ro 8:23 (ἀπαρχή 1bβ; 2), 26a, 27; 12:11; 15:30; 2 Cor 1:22 and 5:5 (KErlemann, ZNW 83, ’92, 202–23, and s. ἀρραβών); 12:18 (τῷ αὐτῷ πν.); Gal 3:2, 5, 14 (ἐπαγγελία 1bβ); Eph 4:3 (gen. of the author); 6:17 (perh. epexegetic gen.); 1 Ti 4:1a; Js 4:5; 1J 3:24; 5:6ab (some mss. add καὶ πνεύματος to the words διʼ ὕδατος κ. αἵματος at the beg. of the verse; this is approved by HvSoden, Moffatt, Vogels, Merk, and w. reservations by CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46, TManson, JTS 48, ’47, 25–33), vs. 8; Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 14:13; 22:17; B 19:2, B 7= D 4:10 (s. ἐτοιμάζω b). ἐν τῷ πνεύματι (led) by the Spirit Lk 2:27.—Paul links this Spirit of God, known to every Christian, with Christ as liberating agent in contrast to legal constraint ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμα ἐστιν the Lord means Spirit 2 Cor 3:17a (UHolzmeister, 2 Cor 3:17 Dominus autem Spiritus est 1908; JNisius, Zur Erklärung v. 2 Cor 3:16ff: ZKT 40, 1916, 617–75; JKögel, Ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν: ASchlatter Festschr. 1922, 35–46; C Guignebert, Congr. d’Hist. du Christ. II 1928, 7–22; EFuchs, Christus u. d. Geist b. Pls ’32; HHughes, ET 45, ’34, 235f; CLattey, Verb. Dom. 20, ’40, 187–89; DGriffiths ET 55, ’43, 81–83; HIngo, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61 [Paul]; JDunn, JTS 21, ’70, 309–20).
    β. without the art. πνεῦμα B 1:3. κοινωνία πνεύματος Phil 2:1 (κοινωνία 1 and 2). πνεύματι in the Spirit or through the Spirit Gal 3:3; 5:5, 16, 18; 1 Pt 4:6. εἰ ζῶμεν πνεύματι, πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν if we live by the Spirit, let us also walk by the Spirit Gal 5:25. Freq. used w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος 1 Pt 1:22 v.l. ἐξ (ὕδατος καὶ) πνεύματος J 3:5. ἐν πνεύματι in, by, through the Spirit Mt 22:43; Eph 2:22; 3:5; 5:18; 6:18; Col 1:8 (ἀγάπη ἐν πνεύματι love called forth by the Spirit); B 9:7. κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 8:4f; Gal 4:29. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2 (s. ἁγιασμός).—In neg. expressions: οὔπω ἧν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39b. ψυχικοὶ πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες worldly people, who do not have the Spirit Jd 19.—ἓν πνεῦμα one and the same Spirit 1 Cor 12:13; Eph 2:18; 4:4; one (in) Spirit 1 Cor 6:17.
    ⓔ The Spirit is more closely defined by a gen. of thing: τὸ πν. τῆς ἀληθείας (TestJud 20:5) J 14:17; 15:26; 16:13 (in these three places the Spirit of Truth is the Paraclete promised by Jesus upon his departure); 1J 4:6 (opp. τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης, as TestJud 20:1; PsSol 8:14 πλ. πλανήσεως; Just., D. 7, 3 πλάνου καὶ ἀκαθάρτου πνεύματος; cp. 1QS 4:23); τὸ τῆς δόξης πν. 1 Pt 4:14. τὸ πν. τῆς ζωῆς the Spirit of life Ro 8:2. το πν. τῆς πίστεως 2 Cor 4:13. πν. σοφίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως Eph 1:17 (cp. Just., D. 87, 4). πν. υἱοθεσίας Ro 8:15b (opp. πν. δουλείας vs. 15a). πν. δυνάμεως AcPl Ha 8, 25. πν. δυνάμεως καὶ ἀγάπης καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 2 Ti 1:7 (opp. πν. δειλίας). τὸ πν. τῆς χάριτος (s. TestJud 24:2) Hb 10:29 (Zech 12:10); cp. 1 Cl 46:6.
    ⓕ Of Christ ‘it is written’ in Scripture: (ἐγένετο) ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀδὰμ εἰς πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Cor 15:45. The scripture pass. upon which the first part of this verse is based is Gen 2:7, where Wsd 15:11 also substitutes the words πνεῦμα ζωτικόν for πνοὴν ζωῆς (cp. Just., D. 6, 2). On the other hand, s. Philo, Leg. All. 1, 42 and s. the lit. s.v. Ἀδάμ ad loc.
    ⓖ The (divine) Pneuma stands in contrast to everything that characterizes this age or the finite world gener.: οὐ τὸ πν. τοῦ κόσμου ἀλλὰ τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12; cp. Eph 2:2 and 1 Ti 4:1ab.
    α. in contrast to σάρξ, which is more closely connected w. sin than any other earthly material (Just., D. 135, 6): J 3:6; Ro 8:4–6, 9a, 13; Gal 3:3; 5:17ab; 6:8. Cp. B 10:9. πᾶσα ἐπιθυμία κατὰ τοῦ πνεύματος στρατεύεται Pol 5:3.
    β. in contrast to σῶμα (=σάρξ) Ro 8:10 and to σάρξ (=σῶμα, as many hold) J 6:63a (for τὸ πν. ἐστιν τὸ ζῳοποιοῦν cp. Philo, Op. Mund. 30; Herm. Wr. in Cyrill., C. Jul. I 556c=542, 24 Sc. the pneuma τὰ πάντα ζῳοποιεῖ καὶ τρέφει. S. also f above). Cp. Ro 8:11b.
    γ. in contrast to γράμμα, which is the characteristic quality of God’s older declaration of the divine will in the law: Ro 2:29; 7:6; 2 Cor 3:6ab, 8 (cp. vs. 7).
    δ. in contrast to the wisdom of humans 1 Cor 2:13.
    ⑥ the Spirit of God as exhibited in the character or activity of God’s people or selected agents, Spirit, spirit (s. HPreisker, Geist u. Leben ’33).
    ⓐ πνεῦμα is accompanied by another noun, which characterizes the working of the Spirit more definitely: πνεῦμα καὶ δύναμις spirit and power Lk 1:17; 1 Cor 2:4. Cp. Ac 10:38; 1 Th 1:5. πνεῦμα καὶ ζωή J 6:63b. πνεῦμα κ. σοφία Ac 6:3; cp. vs. 10 (cp. TestReub 2:6 πνεῦμα λαλίας). πίστις κ. πνεῦμα ἅγιον 6:5 (cp. Just., D. 135, 6). χαρὰ καὶ πνεῦμα ἅγ. 13:52.
    ⓑ Unless frustrated by humans in their natural condition, the Spirit of God produces a spiritual type of conduct Gal 5:16, 25 and produces the καρπὸς τοῦ πνεύματος vs. 22 (s. Vögtle under πλεονεξία).
    ⓒ The Spirit inspires certain people of God B 12:2; B 13:5, above all, in their capacity as proclaimers of a divine revelation (Strabo 9, 3, 5 the πνεῦμα ἐνθουσιαστικόν, that inspired the Pythia; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; 33, 5 of the divine πν. that impels prophets and poets to express themselves; schol. on Pla. 856e of a μάντις: ἄνωθεν λαμβάνειν τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ πληροῦσθαι τοῦ θεοῦ; Aristobulus in Eus., PE 8, 10, 4 [=Fgm. 2, 4 p. 136 Holladay] τὸ θεῖον πν., καθʼ ὸ̔ καὶ προφήτης ἀνακεκήρυκται ‘[Moses possessed] the Divine Spirit with the result that he was proclaimed a prophet’; AscIs 1:7 τὸ πν. τὸ λαλοῦν ἐν ἐμοί; AssMos Fgm. f εἶδεν πνεύματι ἐπαρθείς; Just., A I, 38, 1 al.; Ath. 10, 3 τὸ προφητικὸν πν. Cp. Marinus, Vi. Procli 23 of Proclus: οὐ γὰρ ἄνευ θείας ἐπινοίας … διαλέγεσθαι; Orig., C. Cels. 3, 28, 23). προφητεία came into being only as ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου φερόμενοι ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 2 Pt 1:21; cp. Ac 15:29 v.l.; cp. 1 Cl 8:1. David Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; cp. Ac 1:16; 4:25. Isaiah Ac 28:25. Moses B 10:2, B 9; the Spirit was also active in giving the tables of the law to Moses 14:2. Christ himself spoke in the OT διὰ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου 1 Cl 22:1. The ἱεραὶ γραφαί are called αἱ διὰ τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἁγίου 45:2.—The Christian prophet Agabus also ἐσήμαινεν διὰ τοῦ πν. Ac 11:28; cp. Ac 21:11. Likew. Ign. IPhld 7:2. In general the Spirit reveals the most profound secrets to those who believe 1 Cor 2:10ab.—1 Cl claims to be written διὰ τοῦ ἁγ. πν. 63:2. On Ac 19:21 s. 3b.
    ⓓ The Spirit of God, being one, shows the variety and richness of its life in the different kinds of spiritual gifts which are granted to certain Christians 1 Cor 12:4, 7, 11; cp. vs. 13ab.—Vss. 8–10 enumerate the individual gifts of the Spirit, using various prepositions: διὰ τοὺ πν. vs. 8a; κατὰ τὸ πν. vs. 8b; ἐν τῷ πν. vs. 9ab. τὸ πν. μὴ σβέννυτε do not quench the Spirit 1 Th 5:19 refers to the gift of prophecy, acc. to vs. 20.—The use of the pl. πνεύματα is explained in 1 Cor 14:12 by the varied nature of the Spirit’s working; in vs. 32 by the number of persons who possess the prophetic spirit; on the latter s. Rv 22:6 and 19:10.
    ⓔ One special type of spiritual gift is represented by ecstatic speaking. Of those who ‘speak in tongues’ that no earthly person can understand: πνεύματι λαλεῖ μυστήρια expresses secret things in a spiritual way 1 Cor 14:2. Cp. vss. 14–16 and s. νοῦς 1b. τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπερεντυγχάνει στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις the Spirit pleads in our behalf with groans beyond words Ro 8:26b. Of speech that is ecstatic, but expressed in words that can be understood λαλεῖν ἐν πνεύματι D 11:7, 8; cp. vs. 9 (on the subject-matter 1 Cor 12:3; Jos., Ant. 4, 118f; TestJob 43:2 ἀναλαβὼν Ἐλιφᾶς πν. εἶπεν ὕμνον). Of the state of mind of the seer of the Apocalypse: ἐν πνεύματι Rv 17:3; 21:10; γενέσθαι ἐν πν. 1:10; 4:2 (s. γίνομαι 5c, ἐν 4c and EMoering, StKr 92, 1920, 148–54; RJeske, NTS 31, ’85, 452–66); AcPl Ha 6, 27. On the Spirit at Pentecost Ac 2:4 s. KLake: Beginn. I 5, ’33, 111–21. κατασταλέντος τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἐν Μύρτῃ when the Spirit (of prophecy) that was in Myrta ceased speaking AcPl Ha 7, 9.
    ⓕ The Spirit leads and directs Christian missionaries in their journeys (Aelian, NA 11, 16 the young women are led blindfolded to the cave of the holy serpent; they are guided by a πνεῦμα θεῖον) Ac 16:6, 7 (by dreams, among other methods; cp. vs. 9f and s. Marinus, Vi. Procli 27: Proclus ἔφασκεν προθυμηθῆναι μὲν πολλάκις γράψαι, κωλυθῆναι δὲ ἐναργῶς ἔκ τινων ἐνυπνίων). In Ac 16:6–7 τὸ ἅγιον πν. and τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ are distinguished.
    ⑦ an activating spirit that is not fr. God, spirit: πν. ἔτερον a different (kind of) spirit 2 Cor 11:4. Cp. 2 Th 2:2; 1J 4:1–3. Because there are persons activated by such spirits, it is necessary to test the var. kinds of spirits (the same problem Artem. 3, 20 περὶ διαφορᾶς μάντεων, οἷς δεῖ προσέχειν καὶ οἷς μή) 1 Cor 12:10; 1J 4:1b. ὁ διάβολος πληροῖ αὐτὸν αὐτοῦ πν. Hm 11:3. Also οὐκ οἴδατε ποίου πνεύματός ἐστε Lk 9:55 v.l. distinguishes betw. the spirit shown by Jesus’ disciples, and another kind of spirit.—Even more rarely a spirit divinely given that is not God’s own; so (in a quot. fr. Is 29:10) a πνεῦμα κατανύξεως Ro 11:8.
    ⑧ an independent transcendent personality, the Spirit, which appears in formulas that became more and more fixed and distinct (cp. Ath. 12, 2; Hippol., Ref. 7, 26, 2.—Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 12 θεόν, υἱόν πατρός, πνεῦμα ἐκ πατρὸς ἐκπορευόμενον ἓν ἐκ τριῶν καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς τρία, ταῦτα νόμιζε Ζῆνα, τόνδʼ ἡγοῦ θεόν=‘God, son of the father, spirit proceeding from the father, one from three and three from one, consider these as Zeus, think of this one as God’. The entire context bears a Christian impress.—As Aion in gnostic speculation Iren. 1, 2, 5 [Harv. I 21, 2]): βαπτίζοντες αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος Mt 28:19 (on the text s. βαπτίζω 2c; on the subject-matter GWalther, Die Entstehung des Taufsymbols aus dem Taufritus: StKr 95, 1924, 256ff); D 7:1, 3. Cp. 2 Cor 13:13; 1 Cl 58:2; IEph 9:1; IMg 13:1b, 2; MPol 14:3; 22:1, 3; Epil Mosq 5. On this s. HUsener, Dreiheit: RhM 58, 1903, 1ff; 161ff; 321ff; esp. 36ff; EvDobschütz, Zwei-u. dreigliedrige Formeln: JBL 50, ’31, 116–47 (also Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 92–100); Norden, Agn. Th. 228ff; JMainz, Die Bed. der Dreizahl im Judentum 1922; Clemen2 125–28; NSöderblom, Vater, Sohn u. Geist 1909; DNielsen, Der dreieinige Gott I 1922; GKrüger, Das Dogma v. der Dreieinigkeit 1905, 46ff; AHarnack, Entstehung u. Entwicklung der Kirchenverfassung 1910, 187ff; JHaussleiter, Trinitarischer Glaube u. Christusbekenntnis in der alten Kirche: BFCT XXV 4, 1920; JLebreton, Histoire du dogme de la Trinité I: Les origines6 1927; RBlümel, Pls u. d. dreieinige Gott 1929.—On the whole word FRüsche, D. Seelenpneuma ’33; HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919; EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 486–95; PVolz, Der Geist Gottes u. d. verwandten Erscheinungen im AT 1910; JHehn, Zum Problem des Geistes im alten Orient u. im AT: ZAW n.s. 2, 1925, 210–25; SLinder, Studier till Gamla Testamentets föreställningar om anden 1926; AMarmorstein, Der Hl. Geist in der rabb. Legende: ARW 28, 1930, 286–303; NSnaith, The Distinctive Ideas of the OT ’46, 229–37; FDillistone, Bibl. Doctrine of the Holy Spirit: Theology Today 3, ’46/47, 486–97; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 341–46; ESchweizer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 482–508; DLys, Rûach, Le Souffle dans l’AT, ’62; DHill, Gk. Words and Hebr. Mngs. ’67, 202–93.—HGunkel, Die Wirkungen des Hl. Geistes2 1899; HWeinel, Die Wirkungen des Geistes u. der Geister im nachap. Zeitalter 1899; EWinstanley, The Spirit in the NT 1908; HSwete, The Holy Spirit in the NT 1909, The Holy Spirit in the Ancient Church 1912; EScott, The Spirit in the NT 1923; FBüchsel, Der Geist Gottes im NT 1926; EvDobschütz, Der Geistbesitz des Christen im Urchristentum: Monatsschr. für Pastoral-theol. 20, 1924, 228ff; FBadcock, ‘The Spirit’ and Spirit in the NT: ET 45, ’34, 218–21; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 151–62 (Eng. tr. KGrobel, ’51, I 153–64); ESchweizer, Geist u. Gemeinde im NT ’52, Int 6, ’52, 259–78.—WTosetti, Der Hl. Geist als göttliche Pers. in den Evangelien 1918; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion. Der Ursprung des Geistbegriffs der Syn. Ev. aus der griech. Mystik 1922; AFrövig, Das Sendungsbewusstsein Jesu u. der Geist 1924; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist nach Syn. Überl.: Studies in Early Christianity, presented to FCPorter and BWBacon 1928, 209–36; FSynge, The Holy Spirit in the Gospels and Acts: CQR 120, ’35, 205–17; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit and the Gospel Trad. ’47.—ESokolowski, Die Begriffe Geist u. Leben bei Pls 1903; KDeissner, Auferstehungshoffnung u. Pneumagedanke bei Pls 1912; GVos, The Eschatological Aspect of the Pauline Conception of the Spirit: Bibl. and Theol. Studies by the Faculty of Princeton Theol. Sem. 1912, 209–59; HBertrams, Das Wesen des Geistes nach d. Anschauung des Ap. Pls 1913; WReinhard, Das Wirken des Hl. Geistes im Menschen nach den Briefen des Ap. Pls 1918; HHoyle, The Holy Spirit in St. Paul 1928; PGächter, Z. Pneumabegriff des hl. Pls: ZKT 53, 1929, 345–408; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik des Ap. Pls 1930, 159–74 al. [Mysticism of Paul the Apostle, tr. WMontgomery ’31, 160–76 al.]; E-BAllo, RB 43, ’34, 321–46 [1 Cor]; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. after Ro 8:11; Synge [s. above], CQR 119, ’35, 79–93 [Pauline epp.]; NWaaning, Onderzoek naar het gebruik van πνεῦμα bij Pls, diss. Amsterd. ’39; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 167–200.—HvBaer, Der Hl. Geist in den Lukasschriften 1926; MGoguel, La Notion joh. de l’Esprit 1902; JSimpson, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: Exp., 9th ser., 4, 1925, 292–99; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist im J.: Amicitiae Corolla (RHarris Festschr.) ’33, 303–18; WLofthouse, The Holy Spirit in Ac and J: ET 52, ’40/41, 334–36; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: JTS 1 n.s., ’50, 1–15; FCrump, Pneuma in the Gospels, diss. Catholic Univ. of America, ’54; GLampe, Studies in the Gospels (RHLightfoot memorial vol.) ’55, 159–200; NHamilton, The Holy Spirit and Eschatology in Paul, ’57; WDavies, Paul and the Dead Sea Scrolls, Flesh and Spirit: The Scrolls and the NT, ed. KStendahl, ’57, 157–82.—GJohnston, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Holy Spirit’ in the Qumran Lit.: NT Sidelights (ACPurdy Festschr.) ’60, 27–42; JPryke, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Flesh’ in Qumran and NT, RevQ 5, ’65, 346–60; HBraun, Qumran und d. NT II, ’66, 150–64; DHill, Greek Words and Hebrew Meanings, ’67, 202–93; WBieder, Pneumatolog. Aspekte im Hb, OCullmann Festschr. ’72, 251–59; KEasley, The Pauline Usage of πνεύματι as a Reference to the Spirit of God: JETS 27, ’84, 299–313 (statistics).—B. 260; 1087. Pauly-W. XIV 387–412. BHHW I 534–37. Schmidt, Syn. II 218–50. New Docs 4, 38f. DELG s.v. πνέω. M-M. Dict. de la Bible XI 126–398. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πνεῦμα

  • 3 πρός

    πρός, Prep., expressing direction,
    A on the side of, in the direction of, hence c. gen., dat., and acc., from, at, to: [dialect] Ep. also [full] προτί and [full] ποτί, in Hom. usually c. acc., more rarely c. dat., and each only once c. gen., Il.11.831, 22.198:—dialectal forms: [dialect] Dor.[full] ποτί (q. v.) and [full] ποί, but Cret. [full] πορτί Leg.Gort.5.44, etc., Argive [full] προτ( [full] ί) Schwyzer 84.3 (found at Tylisus, V B.C.), restored in Mnemos.57.208(Argos, vi B.C.), and in Alcm.30; Arc., Cypr. [full] πός SIG306.11 (Tegea, iv B.C.), Inscr.Cypr. 135.19H., also sts. in Asia Minor in compds., v. ποσάγω, ποσφέρω; [dialect] Aeol. [full] πρός Sapph.69 ([etym.] προς-), 109, Alc.20 (s. v.l.); [full] πρές Jo.Gramm. Comp.3.10; Pamphylian περτ ([etym.] ί) Schwyzer 686.7, 686a4. (With [full] προτί, [full] πρός cf. Skt. práti 'towards, near to, against, back, etc.', Slav. protiv[ucaron], Lett. pret 'against', Lat. pretium: [full] ποτί (q. v.) and [full] πός are not cogn.) A. WITH GEN., πρός refers to that from which something comes:
    I of Place, from,

    ἵκετο ἠὲ π. ἠοίων ἦ ἑσπερίων ἀνθρώπων Od. 8.29

    ;

    τὸν π. Σάρδεων ἤλεκτρον S.Ant. 1037

     (v.l.).
    2 on the side of, towards, νήσοισι πρὸς Ἤλιδος towards Elis, Od.21.347; π. ἁλός, π. Θύμβρης, Il.10.428, 430;

    εἶναι π. θαλάσσης Hdt.2.154

    ;

    ἱδρῦσθαι π. τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου Id.8.120

    ;

    ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο π. Ὀλύνθου Th.1.62

    , etc.; φυλακαὶ π. Αἰθιόπων, π. Ἀραβίων, π. Διβύης, on the frontier towards the Ethiopians, etc., Hdt.2.30: freq. with words denoting the points of the compass, δύω θύραι εἰσίν, αἱ μὲν π. βορέαο, αἱ δ' αὖ π. νότου one on the north side, the other on the south side, Od.13.110;

    οἰκέουσι π. νότου ἀνέμου Hdt.3.101

    ; π. ἄρκτου τε καὶ βορέω ἀνέμου κατοικημένοι ib. 102; π. μεσαμβρίης ib. 107; π. τοῦ Τμώλου τετραμμένον τῆς πόλιος (in such phrases the acc. is more common) Id.1.84;

    π. Πλαταιῶν Th. 3.21

    ;

    π. Νεμέας Id.5.59

    ; ἀπὸ τῆσδε τῆς ὁδοῦ τὸ π. τοῦ λιμένος ἅπαν everything on the harbour- ward side of this road, IG12.892: combined with π. c. acc.,

    π. ἠῶ τε καὶ τοῦ Τανάϊδος Hdt.4.122

    ;

    τὸν μέν π. βορέω ἑστεῶτα, τὸν δὲ π. νότον Id.2.121

    , cf. 4.17.
    3 before, in presence of,

    μάρτυροι ἔστων π. τε θεῶν μακάρων π. τε θνητῶν ἀνθρώπων Il.1.339

    ;

    οὐδ' ἐπιορκήσω π. δαίμονος 19.188

    ; ποίτοῦ Ἀπόλλωνος .. ὑπίσχομαι prob. in IG22.1126.7 (Amphict. Delph., iv B. C.); ὑποσχομένους πρὸς τοῦ Διός ib.1237.16: hence,
    b in the eyes of,

    ἄδικον οὐδὲν οὔτε π. θεῶν οὔτε π. ἀνθρώπων Th.1.71

    , cf. X.An.1.6.6, etc.; ὅσιος π. θεῶν Lex ap.And.1.97; κατειπάτω.. ἁγνῶς π. τοῦ θεοῦ if he wishes to be pure in the sight of the god, SIG986.9, cf. 17 (Chios, v/iv B. C.);

    ὁ γὰρ καιρὸς π. ἀνθρώπων βραχὺ μέτρον ἔχει Pi.P.4.286

    .
    4 in supplication or adjuration, before, and so, in the name of,

    σε.. γουνάζομαι.. π. τ' ἀλόχου καὶ πατρός Od.11.67

    ;

    π. θεῶν πατρῴων S.Ant. 839

     (lyr.), etc.; ἱκετεύω, ἀντιβολῶ π. παίδων, π. γυναικῶν, etc., D.28.20, etc.: the verb is freq. omitted with π. θεῶν or τῶν θεῶν, E.Hec. 551, S.OT 1037, Ar.V. 760;

    π. τοῦ Διός Id.Av. 130

    : less freq. with other words,

    π. τῆς ἑστίας E.Fr.953.39

    ;

    π. Χαρίτων Luc.Hist.Conscr.14

    ;

    μὴ π. γενείου S.El. 1208

    ;

    μὴ π. ξενίας τᾶς σᾶς Id.OC 515

     (lyr.): sts. in questions, π. θεῶν, τίς οὕτως εὐήθης ἐστίν; in heaven's name, D.1.15;

    π. τῆς Ἀθηνᾶς.. ; Din.1.45

    ;

    ἆρ' οὖν, ὦ π. Διός,.. ; Pl.R. 459a

    , cf. Ap. 26e: sts. in Trag. with the pron. σε between prep. and case,

    π. νύν σε πατρὸς π. τε μητρός.. ἱκνοῦμαι S.Ph. 468

    ;

    μὴ π. σε γονάτων E.Med. 324

    .
    5 of origin or descent, from, on the side of, γένος ἐξ Ἁλικαρνησσοῦ τὰ π. πατρός by the father's side, Hdt.7.99;

    Ἀθηναῖον.. καὶ τὰ π. πατρὸς καὶ τὰ π. μητρός D.57.17

    , cf. Isoc.3.42, SIG1015.7 (Halic.); πρόγονοι ἢ π. ἀνδρῶν ἢ γυναικῶν in the male or female line, Pl.Tht. 173d;

    ὁ πατὴρ π. μὲν ἀνδρῶν ἦν τῶν Εὐπατριδῶν Isoc.16.25

    ;

    οἱ συγγενεῖς τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ π. ἀνδρῶν καὶ π. γυναικῶν D.57.23

    ; οἱ π. αἵματος blood-relations, S.Aj. 1305;

    ἢ φίλων τις ἢ π. αἵματος φύσιν Id.El. 1125

    .
    II of effects proceeding from what cause soever:
    1 from, at the hand of, with Verbs of having, receiving, etc.,

    ὡς ἂν.. τιμὴν καὶ κῦδος ἄρηαι π. πάντων Δαναῶν Il.16.85

    , cf. 1.160, etc.;

    τιμὴν π. Ζηνὸς ἔχοντες Od.11.302

    ;

    δίδοι οἱ.. χάριν ποτ' ἀστῶν καὶ ποτὶ ξείνων Pi.O.7.90

    ;

    ἄνθεα τιμῆς πρὸς θνητῶν ἀνελέσθαι Emp.4.7

    ;

    φυλακῆς π. δήμου κυρῆσαι Hdt.1.59

    ;

    τυχεῖν τινος π. θεῶν A.Th. 550

    , cf. S.Aj. 527;

    λαχὼν π. δαιμόνων ὄλβον Pi.N.9.45

    ;

    κακόν τι π. θεῶν ἢ π. ἀνθρώπων λαβεῖν Hdt.2.139

    , etc.;

    μανθάνειν π. ἀστῶν S.OC13

    : with passive Verbs, προτὶ Ἀχιλλῆος δεδιδάχθαι to have been taught by.., Il.11.831, cf. S.OT 357;

    ἄριστα πεποίηται.. πρὸς Τρώων Il.6.57

    ; αἴσχε' ἀκούω π. Τρώων ib. 525, cf. Heraclit.79;

    ταῦτα.. π. τούτου κλύειν S.OT 429

    ;

    οὐ λέγεται π. οὐδαμῶν Hdt.1.47

    ; ἀτιμάζεσθαι, τετιμῆσθαι π. τινῶν, ib.61,2.75; also

    λόγου οὐδενὸς γίνεσθαι π. τινῶν Id.1.120

    ; παθεῖν τι π. τινός at the hand of, ib.73;

    π. ἀλλήλοιν θανεῖν E. Ph. 1269

    , cf. S.OT 1237; π. τῆς τύχης ὄλωλεν ib. 949;

    τὸ ποιεύμενον π. τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων Hdt.7.209

    ;

    αἰτηθέντες π. τινὸς χρήματα Id.8.111

    ;

    ἱμέρου βέλει π. σοῦ τέθαλπται A.Pr. 650

    : with an Adj. or Subst.,

    τιμήεσσα π. πόσιος Od.18.162

    ;

    ἐπίφθονος π. τῶν πλεόνων ἀνθρώπων Hdt.7.139

    ;

    ἔρημος π. φίλων S.Ant. 919

    ;

    ἀπαθὴς π. ἀστῶν Pi.P.4.297

    ;

    πειθὼ π. τινός S.El. 562

    ;

    π. Τρώων.. κλέος εἶναι Il.22.514

    ; ἄρκεσις π. ἀνδρός, δόξα π. ἀνθρώπων, S.OC73, E.Heracl. 624 (lyr.);

    ἐλίπετο ἀθάνατον μνήμην π. Ἑλλησποντίων Hdt.4.144

    : with an Adv., οἶμαι γὰρ ἂν οὐκ ἀχαρίστως μοι ἔχειν οὔτε π. ὑμῶν οὔτε π. τῆς Ἑλλάδος I shall meet with no ingratitude at your hands, X.An.2.3.18, cf. Pl.R. 463d.
    2 of things, π. τίνος ποτ' αἰτίας [τέθνηκεν]; from of by what cause? S.OT 1236; π. ἀμπλακημάτων by or by reason of.., Id.Ant.51.
    III of dependence or close connexion: hence,
    1 dependent on one, under one's protection,

    π. Διός εἰσι ξεῖνοί τε πτωχοί τε Od.6.207

    ,14.57; δικασπόλοι, οἵ τε θέμιστας π. Διὸς εἰρύαται by commission from him, Il.1.239; π. ἄλλης ἱστὸν ὑφαίνοις at the bidding of another, 6.456.
    2 on one's side, in one's favour, Hdt.1.75, 124, S.OT 1434, Tr. 479, etc.;

    π. τῶν ἐχόντων.. τὸν νόμον τίθης E.Alc. 57

    .
    IV of that which is derivable from: hence, agreeable to, becoming, like,

    τὰ τοιαῦτα ἔργα οὐ π. τοῦ ἅπαντος ἀνδρὸς νενόμικα γίνεσθαι, ἀλλὰπ. ψυχῆς τε ἀγαθῆς καὶ ῥώμης ἀνδρηΐης Hdt.7.153

    , cf.5.12; ἦ κάρτα π. γυναικὸς αἴρεσθαι κέαρ 'tis very like a woman, A.Ag. 592, cf. 1636;

    οὐ π. ἰατροῦ σοφοῦ θρηνεῖν ἐπῳδάς S.Aj. 581

    , cf. Ar.V. 369, E.Hel. 950, etc.;

    π. σοῦ ἐστι Id.HF 585

    , etc.;

    οὐκ ἦν π. τοῦ Κύρου τρόπου X.An. 1.2.11

    , etc.: of qualities, etc.,

    π. δυσσεβείας A.Ch. 704

    ; π. δίκης οὐδὲν τρέμων agreeably to justice, S.OT 1014, cf.El. 1211;

    οὐ π. τῆς ὑμετέρας δόξης Th.3.59

    ; ἐάν τι ἡμῖν π. λόγου ᾖ if it be at all to our purpose, Pl.Grg. 459c;

    εἰ τόδε π. τρόπου λέγω

     correctly,

    Id.R. 470c

    ; but π. τρόπου τι ὠνεῖσθαι buy at a reasonable price, Thphr.Char.30.12;

    τὰ γενήματα π. ἐλάσσονος τιμᾶς πωλῶν IG5(2).515.14

     ([place name] Lycosura); π. ἀγαθοῦ, π. κακοῦ τινί ἐστι or γίγνεται, it is to one's advantage or otherwise, Arist.Mu. 397a30, Arr.An.7.16.5, Hld.7.12; π. ἀτιμίας λαβεῖν τι to take a thing as an insult, regard it so, Plu.Cic.13;

    π. δέους λαβεῖν τι Id.Flam.7

    ; λαβεῖν τι π. ὀργῆς (v.l. ὀργήν) J.AJ8.1.3; μοι π. εὐκλείας γένοιτο ib. 18.7.7; τῷ δήμῳ π. αἰσχύνης ἂν ἦν, π. ὀνείδους ἂν ἦν τῇ πόλει, Lib.Decl.43.27,28.
    B WITH DAT., it expresses proximity, hard by, near, at,

    ποτὶ γαίῃ Od.8.190

    , 11.423;

    ποτὶ γούνασι Il.5.408

    ; ποτὶ δρυσίν among the oaks, 14.398 (nisi leg. περί)

    ; πρὸς ἄκμονι χαλκεύειν Pi.P.1.86

    ; ποτὶ γραμμᾷ στᾶσαί τινα ib.9.118; ἄγκυραν ποτὶ ναΐ κρημνάντων ib.4.24;

    δῆσαί τινα πρὸς φάραγγι A.Pr.15

    ;

    νεὼς καμούσης ποντίῳ π. κύματι Id.Th. 210

    ;

    π. μέσῃ ἀγορᾷ S.Tr. 371

    ;

    π. Ἀργείων στρατῷ Id.Aj.95

    ;

    π. πέδῳ κεῖται Id.OT 180

     (lyr.); θακεῖν π. ναοῖς ib.20, cf. A.Eu. 855;

    π. ἡλίου ναίουσι πηγαῖς Id.Pr. 808

    ;

    π. τῇ γῇ ναυμαχεῖν Th. 7.34

    ; ἐς μάχην καθίστασθαι π. (v.l. ὑπ')

    αὐτῇ τῇ πόλει Id.2.79

    ;

    τεῖχος π. τῇ θαλάσσῃ Id.3.105

    ;

    αἱ π. θαλάττῃ πόλεις X.HG4.8.1

    ; τὸ π. Αἰγίνῃ στράτευμα off Aegina, Th.1.105; Αίβυες οἱ π. Αἰγύπτῳ bordering on.., ib. 104; τὸ π. ποσί that which is close to the feet, before one, S.OT 130, etc.; θρηνεῖν ἐπῳδὰς π... πήματι over it, Id.Aj. 582; αἱ π. τῇ βάσει γωνίαι the angles at the base, Euc.1.5,al.;

    τὴν π. τῷ.. ιερῷ κρήνην IG22.338.13

    , cf. SIG1040.15 (Piraeus, iv B. C.), al.
    2 before, in the presence of, π. τοῖς θεσμοθέταις, π. τῷ διαιτητῇ λέγειν, D. 20.98,39.22;

    ὅσα π. τοῖς κριταῖς γέγονεν Id.21.18

    ;

    π. διαιτητῇ φεύγειν Id.22.28

    .
    3 with Verbs denoting motion towards a place, upon, against,

    ποτὶ δὲ σκῆπτρον βάλε γαίῃ Il.1.245

    , Od.2.80;

    με βάλῃ.. ποτὶ πέτρῃ 5.415

    , cf. 7.279, 9.284;

    νῆας ποτὶ σπιλάδεσσιν ἔαξαν 3.298

    , cf. 5.401; λιαζόμενον ποτὶ γαίῃ sinking on the ground, Il.20.420;

    ἴσχοντες πρὸς ταῖς πόλεσι Th.7.35

    .
    4 sts. with a notion of clinging closely, προτὶ οἷ λάβε clasped to him, Il.20.418;

    προτὶ οἷ εἷλε 21.507

    ;

    πρὸς ἀλλήλῃσιν ἔχονται Od.5.329

    ;

    προσπεπλασμένας.. π. ὄρεσι Hdt.3.111

    ; π. δμῳαῖσι κλίνομαι fall into the arms of.., S.Ant. 1189;

    π. τινί

     close to,

    Men. Epit. 204

    .
    II to express close engagement, at the point of,

    π. αὐτῷ γ' εἰμὶ τῷ δεινῷ λέγειν S.OT 1169

    ; engaged in or about,

    π. τῷ εἰρημένῳ λόγῳ ἦν Pl.Phd. 84c

    , cf. Phdr. 249c, 249d;

    ἂν π. τῷ σκοπεῖν.. γένησθε D.18.176

    ;

    ἀεὶ π. ᾧ εἴη ἔργῳ, τοῦτο ἔπραττεν X. HG4.8.22

    ; διατρίβειν or σχολάζειν π. τινί, Epicr.11.3 (anap.), Arist. Pol. 1308b36 (but

    π. ταῦτα ἐσχόλασα X.Mem.3.6.6

    );

    ὅλος εἶναι π. τῷ λήμματι D.19.127

    ;

    π. τῇ ἀνάγκῃ ταύτῃ γίγνεσθαι Aeschin.1.74

    ; τὴν διάνοιαν, τὴν γνώμην ἔχειν π. τινί, Pl.R. 500b, Aeschin.3.192; κατατάξαι αὐτὸν π. γράμμασιν, i.e. give him a post as clerk, PCair.Zen. 342.3 (iii B. C.);

    ὁ π. τοῖς γράμμασι τεταγμένος Plb.15.27.7

    , cf. 5.54.7, D.S.2.29,3.22;

    ἐπιμελητὴς π. τῇ εἰκασίᾳ τοῦ σησάμου PTeb.713.2

    , cf.709.1 (ii B. C.).
    III to express union or addition, once in Hom., ἄασάν μ' ἕταροί τε κακοὶ π. τοῖσί τε ὕπνος and besides them sleep, Od.10.68;

    π. τοῖς παροῦσιν ἄλλα

     in addition to,

    A.Pr. 323

    , cf. Pers. 531, Xenoph.8.3. Emp.59.3;

    ἄλλους π. ἑαυτῷ Th.1.90

    ; π. ταῖς ἡμετέραις [τριήρεσι] Id.6.90;

    δέκα μῆνας π. ἄλλοις πέντε S.Tr.45

    ;

    τρίτος.. π. δέκ' ἄλλαισιν γοναῖς A.Pr. 774

    ; κυβερνήτης π. τῇ σκυτοτομίᾳ in addition to his trade of leather-cutter, Pl.R. 397e: freq. with neut. Adjs., π. τῷ νέῳ ἁπαλός besides his youth, Id.Smp. 195c, cf. Tht. 185e;

    π. τῷ βλαβερῷ καὶ ἀηδέστατον Id.Phdr. 240b

    ; π. τούτοισι besides this, Hdt.2.51, cf. A.Pers. 237 (troch.), etc.; rarely in sg.,

    π. τούτῳ Hdt.1.31

    ,41; π. τοῖς ἄλλοις besides all the rest, Th.2.61, etc.:—cf. the Advb. usage, infr. D.
    C WITH ACCUS., it expresses motion or direction towards an object:
    I of Place, towards, to, with Verbs of Motion,

    ἰέναι π. Ὄλυμπον Il.1.420

    ; ἰέναι π. δώματα, etc., Od.2.288, etc.;

    ἰέναι π. ἠῶ τ' ἠέλιόν τε Il.12.239

    ; φέρειν προτὶ ἄστυ, ἄγειν προτὶ Ἴλιον, etc., 13.538, 657, etc.; ἄγεσθαιπρὸς οἶκον, ἐρύεσθαι ποτὶ Ἴλιον, 9.147,18.174; ὠθεῖν, δίεσθαι προτὶ ἄστυ, 16.45, 15.681, etc.;

    ῥίπτασκε ποτὶ νέφεα Od.8.374

    ;

    βαλεῖν ποτὶ πέτρας 12.71

    ;

    κυλινδόμενα προτὶ χέρσον 9.147

    ; ἀπῆλθε πρὸς ἑαυτόν returned to his home, LXX Nu.24.25; κληθῆναι π. τὸ δεῖπνον (rarer than ἐπὶ δεῖπνον) Plu. Cat.Ma.3.
    2 with Verbs implying previous motion, upon, against, π. τεῖχος, π. κίονα ἐρείσας, Il.22.112, Od.8.66;

    ἅρματα.. ἔκλιναν π. ἐνώπια Il.8.435

    ;

    ἔγχος ἔστησε π. κίονα Od.1.127

    ;

    ποτὶ τοῖχον ἀρηρότες 2.342

    ;

    ποτὶ βωμὸν ἵζεσθαι 22.334

    ;

    πρὸς γοῦνα καθέζετό τινος 18.395

    ;

    π. ἄλλοτ' ἄλλον πημονὴ προσιζάνει A.Pr. 278

    ;

    τὰ πολλὰ πατρὸς π. τάφον κτερίσματα S.El. 931

    ; χῶρον π. αὐτὸν τόνδ' dub. in Id.Ph.23; later,

    ἔστη π. τὸν στῦλον LXX 4 Ki.23.3

    ;

    ὁ ὄχλος π. τὴν θάλασσαν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἦσαν Ev.Marc.4.1

    ; π. ὑμᾶς παραμενῶ with you, 1 Ep.Cor.16.6;

    ἐκήδευσαν τὸν.. πατέρα.. π. τοὺς λοιποὺς συγγενεῖς

     beside,

    Supp.Epigr.6.106

     ([place name] Cotiaeum).
    b of addition,

    ποὶ τὰν στάλαν ποιγραψάνσθω τάδε SIG56.46

    (Argos, v B. C.);

    ἵππον προσετίθει πρὸς τοὔνομα Ar.Nu.63

    , cf. Hdt.6.125, X.HG1.5.6, Pl.Phlb. 33c, Arist.Rh. 1359b28; προσεδαπάνησε π. τὸ μερισθὲν αὐτῷ εἰς τὸ ἔλαιον ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων over and above the sum allotted to him, IG22.1227.9; προσετέθη π. τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ was gathered to his people, LXX Ge.49.33.
    3 with Verbs of seeing, looking, etc., towards,

    ἰδεῖν π. τινά Od.12.244

    , al.; ὁρᾶν, ἀποβλέπειν π. τι or τινά, A.Supp. 725, Ar.Ach. 291, etc.;

    ἀνταυγεῖ π. Ὄλυμπον Emp.44

    ; στάντε ποτὶ πνοιήν so as to face it, Il.11.622 (similarly, πέτονται πρὸς τὸ πνεῦμα against the wind, Arist.HA 597a32); κλαίεσκε π. οὐρανόν cried to heaven, Il.8.364: freq. of points of the compass, π. ζόφον κεῖσθαι lie towards the West, Od.9.26;

    ναίειν π. ἠῶ τ' ἠέλιόν τε 13.240

    ;

    στάντα π. πρώτην ἕω S.OC 477

    ; so in Prose,

    π. ἠῶ τε καὶ ἡλίου ἀνατολάς Hdt. 1.201

    , cf. 4.40;

    π. βορέην τε καὶ νότον Id.2.149

    ; also

    ἀκτὴ π. Τυρσηνίην τετραμμένη τῆς Σικελίης Id.6.22

     (v. supr. A. 1.2); π. ἥλιον facing the sun, and so, in the sunlight, Ar.V. 772; so π. λύχνον by lamplight, Id. Pax 692, Jul.Ep.4;

    π. τὸ λύχνον Hippon.22

     Diehl, cf. Arist.Mete. 375a27;

    πὸτ τὸ πῦρ Ar.Ach. 751

    ;

    πρὸς τὸ πῦρ Pl.R. 372d

    , cf. Arist.Pr. 870a21; π. φῶς in open day, S.El. 640; but, by torch-light, Plu.2.237a.
    4 in hostile sense, against,

    π. Τρῶας μάχεαι Il.17.471

    ;

    ἐστρατόωνθ'.. π. τείχεα Θήβης 4.378

    ; π. δαίμονα against his will, 17.98;

    βεβλήκει π. στῆθος 4.108

    ;

    γούνατ' ἐπήδα π. ῥόον ἀΐσσοντος 21.303

    ;

    χρὴ π. θεὸν οὐκ ἐρίζειν Pi.P.2.88

    ;

    π. τοὐμὸν σπέρμα χωρήσαντα S.Tr. 304

    ;

    ἐπιέναι π. τινάς Th.2.65

    ;

    ὅσα ἔπραξαν οἱ Ἕλληνες π. τε ἀλλήλους καὶ τὸν βάρβαρον Id.1.118

    ;

    ἀγωνίζεσθαι π. τινά Pl.R. 579c

    ;

    ἀντιτάττεσθαι π. πόλιν X.Cyr.3.1.18

    : also in argument, in reply to,

    ταῦτα π. τὸν Πιττακὸν εἴρηται Pl.Prt. 345c

    ; and so in the titles of judicial speeches, πρός τινα in reply to, less strong than κατά τινος against or in accusation, D.20 tit., etc.;

    μήτε π. ἐμὲ μήτε κατ' ἐμοῦ δίκην εἶναι Is.11.34

    .
    5 without any hostile sense,

    π. ἀλλήλους ἔπεα πτερόεντ' ἀγόρευον Il.3.155

    ,cf.5.274,11.403,17.200;

    π.ξεῖνον φάσθαι ἔπος ἠδ' ἐπακοῦσαι Od.17.584

    ; λέγειν, εἰπεῖν, φράζειν π. τινά, Hdt. 1.8,90, Ar.V. 335, Nu. 359;

    ἀπαγγεῖλαι π. τινάς A.Ch. 267

    ;

    μνησθῆναι π. τινά Lys.1.19

    , etc.;

    ἀμείψασθαι π. τινά Hdt.8.60

     codd.;

    ἀποκρίνεσθαι π. τινάς Ar.Ach. 632

    , Th.5.42; ὤμοσε δὲ π. ἔμ' αὐτόν he swore to me, Od.14.331: π. sts. governs the reflex. pron.,

    διαλογίζεσθαι π. ὑμᾶς αὐτούς Is.7.45

    ; ἀναμνήσθητε, ἐνθυμήθητε π. ὑμᾶς αὐτούς, Isoc.6.52, 15.60;

    π. ἐμαυτὸν.. ἐλογιζόμην Pl.Ap. 21d

    ; μινύρεσθαι, ἄδειν π. ἑαυτόν, Ar.Ec. 880, 931;

    ἐπικωκύω.. αὐτὴ π. αὑτήν S.El. 285

    .
    b π. σφέας ἔχειν δοκέουσι, i.e. they think they are pregnant, Hp.Nat.Puer. 30.
    6 of various kinds of intercourse or reciprocal action, π... Διομήδεα τεύχε' ἄμειβεν changed arms with Diomedes, Il.6.235;

    ὅσα.. ξυμβόλαια.. ἦν τοῖς ἰδιώταις π. τοὺς ἰδιώτας ἢ ἰδιώτῃ π. τὸ κοινόν IG12.116.19

    ; σπονδάς, συνθήκας ποιεῖσθαι π. τινά, Th.4.15, Plb.1.17.6;

    ξυγχωρεῖν π. τινάς Th.2.59

    ;

    γίγνεται ὁμολογία π. τινάς Id.7.82

    , cf. Hdt. 1.61;

    π. τινὰς ξυμμαχίαν ποιεῖς θαι Th.5.22

    ;

    π. ἀλλήλους ἡσυχίαν εἶχον καὶ π. τοὺς ἄλλους.. εἰρήνην ἦγον Isoc.7.51

    ;

    π. ἀλλήλους ἔχθραι τε καὶ στέργηθρα A.Pr. 491

    ; also

    σαίνειν ποτὶ πάντας Pi.P.2.82

    , cf. O.4.6;

    παίζειν πρός τινας E.HF 952

    , etc.;

    ἀφροδισιάζειν π. τινά X.Mem.1.3.14

    ;

    ἀγαθὸς γίγνεσθαι π. τινά Th.1.86

    ;

    εὐσεβὴς π. τινὰς πέλειν A.Supp. 340

    ; διαλέγεσθαι π. τινά converse with.., X.Mem.1.6.1, Aeschin.2.38,40, 3.219;

    κοινοῦσθαι π. τινάς Pl.Lg. 930c

    ;

    π. τοὺς οἰκέτας ἀνακοινοῦσθαι περὶ τῶν μεγίστων Thphr.Char.4.2

    ; διαλογίζεσθαι π. τινά balance accounts with.., D.52.3, cf. SIG241.127 (Delph., iv B. C.);

    ἃ ἔχει διελόμενος π. τὸν ἀδελφόν IG12(7).55.8

     (Amorgos, iv/iii B. C.), cf. D. 47.34.
    b in phrases of the form ἡ π. τινὰ εὔνοια (ἔχθρα, etc.), π. sts. means towards, as ἡ π. αὑτοὺς φιλία the affection of their wives towards or for them, X.Cyr.3.1.39;

    ἡ π. ὑμᾶς ἔχθρα Id.HG3.5.10

    ;

    ἡ ἀπέχθεια ἡ π. τοὺς πλουσίους Arist.Pol. 1305a23

    ;

    τὴν π. τοὺς τετελευτηκότας εὔνοιαν ὑπάρχουσαν D.18.314

    , cf. SIG352.13 (Ephesus, iv/iii B. C.), al.;

    φυσικαὶ τοκέων στοργαὶ π. τέκνα ποθεινά IG12(5).305.13

     ([place name] Paros): but sts. at the hands of, ἡ π. τὸ θεῖον εὐμένεια the favour of the gods, Th.5.105; φθόνος τοῖς ζῶσι π. τὸ ἀντίπαλον jealousy is incurred by the living at the hands of their rivals, Id.2.45; τὴν ἀπέχθειαν τὴν π. Θηβαίους.. τῇ πόλει γενέσθαι the hostility incurred by Athens at the hands of the Thebans, D.18.36, cf.6.3, 19.85; τῇ φιλίᾳ τῇ π. τὸν τετελευτηκότα the friendship with (not 'affection for') the deceased, Is.1.17, cf. Pl.Ap. 21c, 28a, Isoc.15.101,19.50, Lycurg.135, Din.1.19, etc.;

    τίνος ὄντος ἐμοὶ π. ὑμᾶς ἐγκλήματος; Lys.10.23

    , cf. 16.10;

    τιμώμενος.. διὰ τὴν π. ὑμᾶς πίστιν Din.3.12

    , cf. Lys.12.67, D.20.25; τῷ φόβῳ τῷ π. ὑμᾶς the fear inspired by you, Id.25.93; τῇ π. Ῥωμαίους εὐνοία his popularity with the Romans, Plb.23.7.5.
    7 of legal or other business transacted before a magistrate, witness, etc.,

    τάδε ὁ σύλλογος ἐβουλεύσατο.. π. μνήμονας SIG45.8

     (Halic., v B. C.), cf. IG7.15.1 (Megara, ii B. C.); γράφεσθαι αὐτὸν κλοπῆς.. π. τοὺς ἐπιμελητάς ib.12.65.46; ἀτέλειαν εἶναι αὐτῷ καὶ δίκας π. τὸν πολέμαρχον ib.153.7; λόγον διδόντων τῶν.. χρημάτων.. π. τοὺς λογιστάς ib.91.27; before a jury,

    ἔστι δὲ τούτοις μὲν π. ὑμᾶς ἁγών, ὑμῖν δὲ π. ἅπασαν τὴν πόλιν Lys. 26.14

    ;

    ἀντιδικῆσαι τῷ παιδὶ.. π. ὑμᾶς Is.11.19

     codd. (dub.); before a witness to whom an appeal for corroboration is made, Id.3.25;

    ὀμόσαντες πὸ (τ) τὸν θεόν Schwyzer 418.11

     ([place name] Elis); φέρρεν αὐτὸν πὸ (τ) τὸν Δία in the eyes of Zeus, ib.415.7(ibid.); λαχεῖν πρὸς τὸν ἄρχοντα, γράφεσθαι π. τοὺς θεσμοθέτας, D.43.15, Lex ib.21.47, cf. Arist.Ath.56.6;

    τοῖς ἐμπόροις εἶναι τὰς δίκας π. τοὺς θεσμοθέτας D.33.1

    ; θέντων τὰ.. ποτήρια.. π. Πολύχαρμον having pawned the cups with P., IPE12.32A15 (Olbia, iii B. C.); also

    διαβάλλειν τινὰ π. τοὺς πολλούς X. Mem. 1.2.31

    , cf. D.7.33.
    II of Time, towards or near a certain time, at or about,

    ποτὶ ἕσπερα Od.17.191

    ;

    ποτὶἕσπερον Hes.Op. 552

    ;

    πρὸς ἑσπέραν Pl.R. 328a

    ;

    ἐπεὶ π. ἑσπέραν ἦν X.HG4.3.22

    ;

    π. ἡμέραν Id.An.4.5.21

    ;

    π. ὄρθρον Ar.Lys. 1089

    ; ποτ' ὄρθρον (nisi leg. πότορθρον) Theoc.5.126, Erinn. in PSI9.1090.48 + 8 (p.xii);

    πρὸς ἕω Ar.Ec. 312

    ; π.ἀῶ ἐγρέσθαι, π. ἡμέραν ἐξεγρέσθαι, Theoc.18.55, Pl.Smp. 223c; π. γῆρας, π. τὸ γῆρας, in old age, E.Med. 592, Pl.Lg. 653a; π. εὐάνθεμον φυάν in the bloom of life, Pi.O.1.67; μέχρις ὅτου π. γυναῖκας ὦσι, i.e.of marriageable age, IG22.1368.41: later, π.τὸ παρόν for the moment, Luc.Ep. Sat.28, etc.; v. infr. 111.5.
    III of Relation between two objects,
    1 in reference to, in respect of, touching, τὰ π. τὸν πόλεμον military matters, equipments, etc., Th.2.17, etc.; τὰ π. τὸν βασιλέα our relations to the King, D.14.2; τὰ π. βασιλέα πράγματα the negotiations with the King, Th.1.128; τὰ π. τοὺς θεούς our relations, i.e. duties, to the gods, S.Ph. 1441;

    μέτεστι π. τὰ ἴδια διάφορα πᾶσι τὸ ἴσον.. ἐλευθέρως δὲ τὰ π. τὸ κοινὸν πολιτεύομεν Th.2.37

    ;

    οὐδὲν διοίσει π. τὸ γενέσθαι..

     in respect of..,

    Arist.APr. 24a25

    , cf. Pl.Phd. 111b; ἕτερος λόγος, οὐ π. ἐμέ that is another matter, and does not concern me, D.18.44, cf. 21,60, Isoc.4.12; τῶν φορέτρων ὄντων π. ἐμέ freightage shall be my concern, i.e. borne by me, PAmh.91.18 (ii A. D.);

    π. τοῦτον ἦν ἡ τῶν διαφόρων πρᾶξις LXX 2 Ma.4.28

    ; ἐὰν.. βοᾷ καὶ σχετλιάζῃ μηδὲν π. τὸ πρᾶγμα, nihil ad rem, D.40.61; οὐδὲν π. τὸν Διόνυσον Prov. ap.Plb.39.2.3, Suid.; οὐδὲν αὐτῷ π. τὴν πόλιν ἐστίν he owes no reckoning to the State, D.21.44;

    λόγος ἐστὶν ἐμοὶ π. Ἀθηναίους Philonid. 1

     D.;

    π. Ἰάσονά ἐστιν αὐτῷ περὶ τῆς τιμῆς PHamb.27.8

     (iii B. C.), cf. PCair.Zen.150.18 (iii B. C.); ἔσται αὐτῷ π. τὸν Θεόν (sc. ὁ λόγος ) he shall have to reckon with God, Supp.Epigr.6.188, cf. 194, al. ([place name] Eumenia); without αὐτῷ, ib.236 ([place name] Phrygia);

    ἔσται π. τὴν Τριάδαν MAMA1.168

    , cf. Supp.Epigr.6.302 (Laodicea Combusta); ἕξει π. τὸν Θεόν ib.300, al. (ibid.); ἕξει π. τὴν ἐωνίαν κρίσιν ib.4.733 ([place name] Eukhaita), cf. 6.841 ([place name] Cyprus);

    π. πολλοὺς ἔχων ἀγωνιστάς Suid.

     s.v. ὅσα μῦς ἐν πίσσῃ, cf. 2 Ep.Cor.5.12: with Advbs.,

    ἀσφαλῶς ἔχειν π. τι X.Mem.1.3.14

    , etc.; [τὸ or τὰ] πρός τι, the relative term or terms, Arist.Cat. 1b25, 6a36, al.; τὸ π. τι, Pythag. name for two, Theol.Ar.8; π. ἡμᾶς relatively to us, opp. ἁπλῶς, Arist.APo. 72a1; ὀρθὸς πρός or ποτί c. acc., perpendicular to, Archim.Sph.Cyl.2.3, Spir.20; ἁ Δζ ποτὶ τὰν ΑΔ ἀμβλεῖαν ποιεῖ γωνίαν ib.16.
    2 in reference to, in consequence of,

    πρὸς τοῦτο τὸ κήρυγμα Hdt.3.52

    , cf. 4.161;

    π. τὴν φήμην

     in view of..,

    Id.3.153

    , cf. Th.8.39;

    χαλεπαίνειν π. τι Id.2.59

    ;

    ἀθύμως ἔχειν π. τι X.HG4.5.4

    , etc.: with neut. Pron.,

    π. τί;

     wherefore? to what end?

    S.OT 766

    , 1027, etc.; π. οὐδέν for nothing, in vain, Id.Aj. 1018; π. οὐδὲν ἀναγκαῖον unnecessarily, Sch.Il.9.23;

    π. ταῦτα

     therefore, this being so,

    Hdt.5.9

    ,40, A.Pr. 915, 992, S.OT 426, etc.; cf. οὗτος c. v111.1b.
    3 in reference to or for a purpose,

    ἕστηκεν.. μῆλα π. σφαγάς A.Ag. 1057

    ; χρήσιμος, ἱκανὸς π. τι, Pl.Grg. 474d, Prt. 322b;

    ὡς π. τί χρείας; S.OT 1174

    , cf. OC71, Tr. 1182;

    ἕτοιμος π. τι X.Mem.4.5.12

    ;

    ἱκανῶς ὡς π. τὴν παροῦσαν χρείαν Arist. Cael. 269b21

    ;

    ἢν ἀρήγειν φαίνηται π. τὴν σύμπασαν νοῦσον Hp.Acut. 60

    ; ποιεῖ π. ἐπιλημπτικούς is efficacious for cases of epilepsy, Dsc.1.6;

    ἐθέλοντες τὰ π. τὴν νοῦσον ἡδέα μᾶλλον ἢ τὰ π. τὴν ὑγιείην προσδέχεσθαι Hp. de Arte7

    .
    b with a view to or for a future time,

    ὅπως.. γράμματα δῷ π. ἢν ἂν ἡμέραν ἑκάτεροι παραγίνωνται SIG679.62

     (Senatus consultum, ii B. C.);

    θαυμάζεται τὰ Περικλέους ἔργα π. πολὺν χρόνον ἐν ὀλίγῳ γενόμενα Plu.Per.13

    .
    c = πρός B. 11,

    ἐγίνετο π. ἀναζογήν Plb.3.92.8

    ;

    ὄντων π. τὸ κωλύειν Id.1.26.3

    , cf. 1.29.3, al., Plu.Nic.5.
    4 in proportion or relation to, in comparison with,

    κοῖός τις δοκέοι ἀνὴρ εἶναι π. τὸν πατέρα Κῦρον Hdt.3.34

    ;

    ἔργα λόγου μέζω π. πᾶσαν χώρην Id.2.35

    ;

    π. πάντας τοὺς ἄλλους Id.3.94

    , 8.44;

    πολλὴν ἂν οἶμαι ἀπιστίαν τῆς δυνάμεως.. π. τὸ κλέος αὐτῶν εἶναι Th.1.10

    , cf. Pi.O.2.88, Pl. Prt. 327d, 328c, Phd. 102c, etc.; π. τὰς μεγίστας καὶ ἐλαχίστας ναῦς τὸ μέσον σκοπεῖν the mean between.., Th.1.10;

    τὸ κάλλιστον τῶν ἔργων π. τὸ αἴσχιστον συμβαλεῖν Lycurg.68

    ;

    ἓν π. ἓν συμβάλλειν Hdt.4.50

    ; also

    ἔχεις π. τὰ ἔτη μέλαιναν τὴν τρίχα Thphr. Char.2.3

    ;

    ἐνδεεστέρως ἢ π. τὴν ἐξουσίαν Th.4.39

    : also of mathematical ratio, οἷος ὁ πρῶτος (sc. ὅρος)

    ποτὶ τὸν δεύτερον, καὶ ὁ δεύτερος ποτὶ τὸν τρίτον Archyt.2

    , cf. Philol.11, Pl.Ti. 36b, Arist.Rh. 1409a4, al., Euc. 5 Def.4, etc.; πρὸς παρεὸν.. μῆτις ἀέξεται ἀνθρώποισι in proportion to the existing (physical development), Emp.106: also of price, value, πωλεῖσθαι δὶς π. ἀργύριον sells twice against or relatively to silver, i.e. for twice its weight in silver, Thphr.HP9.6.4;

    πωλεῖται ὁ σταθμὸς αὐτοῦ π. διπλοῦν ἀργύριον Dsc.1.19

    ; [ἡ μαργαρῖτις λίθος] πωλεῖται.. π. χρυσίον for its weight in gold, Androsthenes ap.Ath.3.93b: metaph.,

    π. ἀρετήν Pl.Phd. 69a

    ; ὅπως π. τὰς τιμὰς τῶν κριθῶν τὰ ἄλφιτα πωλήσουσι on the basis of the price of barley, Arist.Ath.51.3; ἐξέστω αὐτοῦ ἀπογραφὴ τῆς οὐσίας π. τοῦτο τὸ ἀργύριον Ἀθηναίων τῷ βουλομένῳ property equal in value to this silver, IG22.1013.14, cf. PHib. 1.32.9 (iii B. C.), IG5(1).1390.78 (Andania, i B. C.);

    τῶν ἐγγύων τῶν ἐγγυωμένων π. [αὐτὰ] τὰ κτήματα SIG364.42

     (Ephesus, iii B. C.);

    θέντων τὰ ποτήρια π. χρυσοῦς ἑκατόν IPE12.32A16

     (Olbia, iii B. C.); τοὺς ἀπαγομένους εἰς φυλακὴν π. τὰ χρέα imprisoned for debt, Plb. 38.11.10, cf. 1.72.5, 5.27.4,5,7,5.108.1, PTeb.707.9 (ii B. C.);

    τοὺς π. καταδίκας ἐκπεπτωκότας Plb.25.3.1

    , cf. SIG742.31 (Ephesus, i B. C.);

    ἐγδίδομεν τὸ ἔργον.. π. χαλκόν IG7.3073.6

     (Lebad., ii B. C.), cf. PSI5.356.7 (iii B. C.), PTeb. 825 (a).16 (ii B. C.), Sammelb.5106.3 (ii B. C.);

    οἷον π. ἀργύριον τὴν δόξαν τὰς ψυχὰς ἀποδιδόμενοι Jul. Or.1.42b

    ; π. ἅλας ἠγορασμένος, i.e. 'dirt cheap', Men.828 (also π. ἅλα δειπνεῖν καὶ κύαμον, i.e. dine frugally, take pot-luck, Plu.2.684f); so

    ἡδονὰς π. ἡδονὰς.. καταλλάττεσθαι Pl.Phd. 69a

    ; of measurements of time by the flow from the clepsydra,

    π. ἕνδεκα ἀμφορέας ἐν διαμεμετρημένῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ κρίνομαι Aeschin.2.126

    , cf. Arist.Ath.67.2,3,69.2;

    λεγέσθω τᾶς δίκας ὁ μὲν πρᾶτος λόγος ἑκατέροις ποτὶ χόας δεκαοκτώ SIG953.17

     (Calymna, ii B. C.); λεξάντων πρὸς τὴν τήρησιν τοῦ ὕδατος ib.683.60 (Olympia, ii B. C.); π. κλεψύδραν Eub.p.182 K., Epin. 2;

    π. κλεψύδρας Arist.Po. 1451a8

    ;

    π. ὀλίγον ὕδωρ ἀναγκαζόμενος λέγειν D.41.30

    ; hence later, π. ὀλίγον for a short time,

    ἐπανεῖναι π. ὀλίγον τὴν πολιορκίαν J.BJ5.9.1

    , cf. Alex.Aphr. in Top.560.2, Hld.2.19, POxy67.14 (iv A.D.), Orib.Fr.116, Gp.4.15.8; π.ὀλίγον καιρόν, χρόνον, Antyll. ap. Orib.9.24.26, Paul.Aeg.Prooem.; π. ὀλίγον ἐστὶ τὸ ζῆν Poet. in Mus.Script.p.452 von Jan;

    μήτηρ δ' ἦν π. μικρόν Sammelb. 7288.4

     ([place name] Ptolemaic);

    π. βραχύ Jul.Or.1.47b

     (but π. βραχὺ παρηβηκυίας (by) a little past their best, Gp.4.15.3);

    π. βραχὺν καιρόν Iamb. Protr. 21

    .

    κα'; π. τὸ ἀκαρές Porph.Gaur.3.3

    ;

    π. μίαν ἢ δευτέραν ἡμέραν Dsc. 2.101

    , cf. Sor.1.56;

    π. δύο ἡμέρας ἐκοίμησα ἐκεῖ BGU775.8

     (ii A. D.);

    π.μόνην τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἡμέραν Sammelb. 7399

     (ii A.D.), cf. M.Ant.12.4;

    προστιμάσθω π. χρόνον μὴ εἰσελθεῖν ὅσον ἂν δόξῃ IG22.1368.89

    .
    5 in or by reference to, according to, in view of,

    π. τὸ παρεὸν βουλεύεσθαι Hdt. 1.20

    , cf. 113, Th.6.46,47, IG22.1.20, etc.;

    π. τὴν παροῦσαν ἀρρωστίαν Th.7.47

    ;

    ἵνα π. τὸν ὑπάρχοντα καιρὸν ἕκαστα θεωρῆτε D.18.17

    , cf. 314, etc.;

    εἴ τι δεῖ τεκμαίρεσθαι π. τὸν ἄλλον τρόπον Id.27.22

    ; τοῖς π. ὑμᾶς ζῶσι those who live with your interests in view, Id.19.226;

    ἐλευθέρου τὸ μὴ π. ἄλλον ζῆν Arist.Rh. 1367a32

    ;

    π. τοῦτον πάντ' ἐσκόπουν, π. τοῦτον ἐποιοῦντο τὴν εἰρήνην D.19.63

    ; τὸ παιδεύεσθαι π. τὰς πολιτείας suitably to them, Arist.Pol. 1310a14; ὁρῶ.. ἅπαντας π. τὴν παροῦσαν δύναμιν τῶν δικαίων ἀξιουμένους according to their power, D.15.28;

    π. τὰς τύχας γὰρ τὰς φρένας κεκτήμεθα

     according to..,

    E.Hipp. 701

    ; πὸς τὰς συνθέσις in accordance with the agreements, IG5(2).343.41,60 (Orchom. Arc.); τὸν δικαστὰν ὀμνύντα κρῖναι πορτὶ τὰ μωλιόμενα having regard to the pleadings, Leg.Gort.5.44, cf. 9.30; αἱ ἀρχαὶ.. πρὸς τὰ κατεσκευασμένα σύμβολα σηκώματα ποιησάμεναι after making weights and measures in accordance with, or by reference to, the established standards, IG22.1013.7; π. τὰ στάθμια τὰ ἐν τῷ ἀργυροκοπίῳ as measured by the weights in the mint, ib. 30, cf. PAmh.43.10 (ii B. C.); [Εόλων] ἐποίησε σταθμὰ π. τὸ νόμισμα made (trade-) weights on the basis of (i.e. proportional to) the coinage, Arist.Ath.10.2;

    ὀρθὸν π. τὸν διαβήτην IG22.1668.9

    , cf. 95,7.3073.108 (Lebad., ii B. C.); π. τὸ δικαιότατον in accordance with the most just principle, D.C.Fr.104.6.
    6 with the accompaniment of musical instruments,

    π. κάλαμον Pi.O.10(11).84

    ; π. αὐλόν or τὸν αὐλόν, E.Alc. 346, X.Smp.6.3, etc.;

    π. λύραν.. ᾄδειν SIG662.13

     (Delos, ii B. C.); π. ῥυθμὸν ἐμβαίνειν to step in time, D.S.5.34.
    7 [full] πρός c.acc. freq. periphr. for Adv., π. βίαν, = βιαίως, under compulsion,

    νῦν χρὴ.. τινα π. βίαν πώνην Alc.20

     (s.v.l.);

    π. βίαν ἐπίνομεν Ar.Ach.73

    ;

    τὸ π. βίαν πίνειν ἴσον πέφυκε τῷ διψῆν κακόν S.Fr. 735

    ; ἥκω.. π. βίαν under compulsion, Critias 16.10 D.; by force, forcibly, A.Pr. 210, 355, etc.; οὐ π. βίαν τινός not forced by any one, Id.Eu.5 (but also, in spite of any one, S.OC 657);

    π. τὸ βίαιον A.Ag. 130

     (lyr.);

    π. τὸ καρτερόν Id.Pr. 214

    ; π. ἀλκήν, π. ἀνάγκαν, Id.Th. 498, Pers. 569 (lyr.);

    οὐ διαχωρέεει [ἡ γαστὴρ] εἰ μὴ π. ἀνάγκην Hp. Prog.8

    ,19;

    π. ἰσχύος κράτος S.Ph. 594

    ;

    π. ἡδονὴν εἶναί τινι A.Pr. 494

    ; π. ἡδονὴν λέγειν, δημηγορεῖν, so as to please, Th.2.65, S.El. 921, D.4.38, cf. E.Med. 773;

    οἱ πάντα π. ἡδονὴν ἐπαινοῦντες Arist.EN 1126b13

    ;

    ἅπαντα π. ἡδ. ζητεῖν D.1.15

    , cf. 18.4; λούσασθαι τὸ σῶμα π. ἡδ. as much or little as one like s, Hp.Mul.2.133;

    πίνειν π. ἡδ. Pl. Smp. 176e

    ; π. τὸ τερπνόν calculated to delight, Th.2.53; π. χάριν so as to gratify,

    μήτε π. ἔχθραν ποιεῖσθαι λόγον μήτε π. χ. D.8.1

    , cf. S.OT 1152;

    π. χάριν δημηγορεῖν D.3.3

    , etc.: c. gen. rei, π. χάριν τινός for the sake of,

    π. χ. βορᾶς S.Ant.30

    , cf. Ph. 1156 (lyr.);

    π. ἰσχύος χ.

     by means of,

    E.Med. 538

    ; π. ὀργήν with anger, angrily, S.El. 369, Th.2.65, D.53.16 (v.l.);

    π. ὀργὴν ἐλθεῖν τινι Id.39.23

    , etc.; π. τὸ λιπαρές importunately, S.OC 1119;

    π. εὐσέβειαν Id.El. 464

    ; π. καιρόν seasonably, Id.Aj.38, etc.;

    π. φύσιν Id.Tr. 308

    ; π. εὐτέλειαν cheaply, Antiph.226.2; π. μέρος in due proportion, D.36.32;

    π. ὀλίγον μέρος Gp.2.15.1

    ; τέτραπτο π. ἰθύ οἱ straight towards him, Il.14.403; π. ὀρθὰς (sc. γωνίας ( .. τῇ AEB at right angles to, Arist.Mete. 373a14, cf. Euc.1.11, Archim.Sph.Cyl.1.3;

    π. ὀρθὴν τέμνουσα Arist.Mete. 363b2

    ; π. ἀχθηδόνα, π. ἀπέχθειαν, Luc.Tox.9, Hist.Conscr.38; γυνὴ π. ἀλήθειαν οὖσα in truth a woman, a very woman, Ath.15.687a, cf. Luc. JTr.48, Alex.61: c. [comp] Sup., π. τὰ μέγιστα in the highest degree, Hdt.8.20.
    8 of Numbers. up to, about, Plb.16.7.5, etc.: cf. πρόσπου.
    D ABS. AS ADV., besides, over and above; in Hom. always π. δέ or ποτὶ δέ, Il.5.307, 10.108, al., cf. Hdt.1.71, etc.; π. δὲ καί ib. 164, 207;

    π. δὲ ἔτι Id.3.74

    ;

    καὶ π. Id.7.154

    , 184, prob. in A.Ch. 301, etc.;

    καὶ π. γε E.Hel. 110

    , Pl.R. 328a, 466e;

    καὶ.. γε π. A.Pr.73

    ;

    καὶ δὴ π. Hdt.5.67

    ; freq. at the end of a second clause,

    τάδε λέγω, δράσω τε π. E.Or. 622

    ;

    ἀλογία.., καὶ ἀμαθία γε π. Pl.Men. 90e

    , cf. E.Ph. 610;

    ἐνενήκοντα καὶ μικρόν τι π. D.4.28

    , cf. 22.60.
    I motion towards, as προσάγω, προσέρχομαι, etc.
    II addition, besides, as προσκτάομαι, προσδίδωμι, προστίθημι, etc.
    III a being on, at, by, or beside: hence, a remaining beside, and metaph. connexion and engagement with anything, as πρόσειμι, προσγίγνομαι, etc.
    F REMARKS,
    1 in poetry πρός sts. stands after its case and before an attribute,

    ποίμνας βουστάσεις τε π. πατρός A.Pr. 653

    , cf. Th. 185, S.OT 178 (lyr.), E.Or.94; ἄστυ πότι (or ποτὶ)

    σφέτερον Il.17.419

    , cf. Pi.O.4.5.
    2 in Hom. it is freq. separated from its Verb by tmesis.
    3 sts. (in violation of the rule given by A.D.Synt.127.8, Pron.42.5) followed by an enclit. Pron.,

    πρός με S.Aj. 292

    , Ar.Pl. 1055, D.18.14 (v.l.), Men.978, Pk.77, Com.Adesp.15.25 D., 22.68 D., etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > πρός

  • 4 γίνομαι

    γίνομαι (in the form γίγνομαι [s. below] Hom.+; as γίν. since Aristot.+; and s. Kühner-Bl. II p. 391; Schwyzer I 215; KBrugmann4-AThumb, Griech. Gramm. 1913, 126; Mayser p. 165 and lit. there). Impf. ἐγινόμην; fut. γενήσομαι; 2 aor. ἐγενόμην, 3 sg. opt. γένοιτο; very rare v.l. (B-D-F §81, 3) γενάμενος (GJs 6:1; 16;1; 25:1 [s. deStrycker 249]; also found in Ps.-Callisth. 1, 20, 1; 1, 41, 11; ApcEsdr 1:3 p. 24, 7 Tdf.; Mel., P. 49, 346 [Bodm.]). Pass.: fut. ptc. τῶν γενηθησομένων (Eccl 1:11 v.l.); 1 aor. ἐγενήθην (Doric, H. Gk.; Phryn. 108 Lob.; pap fr. III B.C., Mayser I/22 ’38, 157f [w. lit.]; ins [Schweizer 181; Nachmanson 168; Thieme 13]; LXX), impv. γενηθήτω; pf. γεγένημαι (Meisterhans3-Schw.: Att. ins since 376 B.C.; Mayser 391) uncontested use in NT only J 2:9; GJs 24:3 (γεγένν-pap); apolog. On pf. γέγονα s. Meisterhans3-Schw.: since 464 B.C.; Mayser 372; on the aoristic use of γέγονα s. Mlt. 145f; 238; 239; PChantraine, Histoire du parfait grec 1927, 233–45; 3 pl. γέγοναν Ro 16:7 (v.l. γεγόνασιν) and Rv 21:6; s. KBuresch, Γέγοναν: RhM 46, 1891, 193ff; Mlt. 52 n.; ptc. γεγονώς; plpf. 3 sg. ἐγεγόνει (1 Macc. 4:27; 2 Macc. 13:17; J 6:17; Just.), without augment γεγόνει (Ac 4:22; v.l. ἐγεγόνει), s. B-D-F §78; Mlt-H. 190. On the variation γίνομαι and γίγνομαι s. W-S. §5, 31; B-D-F §34, 4; Mlt-H. 108. A verb with numerous nuances relating to being and manner of being. Its contrast to the more static term εἰμί can be seen in Kaibel 595, 5 οὐκ ἤμην καὶ ἐγενόμην=I was not and then I came to be (cp. Ath. 4, 2 in 3 below).
    ① to come into being through process of birth or natural production, be born, be produced (SIG 1168, 6; Epict. 2, 17, 8; Wsd 7:3; Sir 44:9; Just., A I, 13, 3; Tat. 26, 2) J 8:58; w. ἔκ τινος foll. (Diod S 3, 64, 1; Appian, Basil. 5 §1; Parthenius 1, 4; Athen. 13, 37 p. 576c ἐξ ἑταίρας; PPetr III, 2, 20; PFlor 382, 38 ὁ ἐξ ἐμοῦ γενόμενος υἱός; 1 Esdr 4:16; Tob 8:6; Jos., Ant. 2, 216) Ro 1:3; Gal 4:4 (cp. 1QS 11:21). Also of plants 1 Cor 15:37. Of fruits ἔκ τινος be produced by a tree Mt 21:19 (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 13 ὁ ἐκ τ. χώρας γιγνόμενος σῖτος). W. ἀπό τινος foll. Ox 1081 (SJCh), 11 γε̣[ινόμε]νον, 14 γέγ[ονος], 14f γε[ι]νομεν[ον], 19 γέγονος.
    ② to come into existence, be made, be created, be manufactured, be performed
    ⓐ gener. ὸ̔ γέγονεν J 1:3c (s. ref. to Vawter, below); w. διά τινος vs. 3a (MTeschendorf, D. Schöpfungsged. im NT: StKr 104, ’32, 337–72). W. χωρίς τινος vs. 3b (IAndrosIsis, Cyrene 15 [103 A.D.] Ἐμοῦ δὲ χωρὶς γείνετʼ οὐδὲν πώποτε; Cleanthes, Hymn to Zeus 15 [Stoic. I 537=Coll. Alex. no. 1 p. 227] οὐδέ τι γίγνεται ἔργον σοῦ δίχα; note the related style 1QH 1:20; on the syntax of J 1:3f see BVawter, CBQ 25, ’63, 401–6, who favors a full stop after οὐδὲ ἕν, s. εἷς 2b and lit. cited there on J 1:3). W. ἔκ τινος Hb 11:3. Of cult images διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι made w. hands Ac 19:26 (cp. PRyl 231, 3 [40 A.D.] τοὺς ἄρτους γενέσθαι). Of miracles: be done, take place (Tob 11:15; Wsd 19:13 v.l. Swete) Mt 11:20f, 23; Lk 10:13; Ac 8:13. ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο on whom this miracle had been performed 4:22. W. mention of the author διά τινος (cp. 4 Macc 17:11) 2:43; 4:16, 30; 12:9; 24:2. διὰ τῶν χειρῶν τινος Mk 6:2; Ac 14:3. ὑπό τινος (Herodian 8, 4, 2; OGI 168, 46 [115 B.C.] τὰ γεγονότα ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς φιλάνθρωπα; UPZ III, 3, 7 [116 B.C.]; PTebt 786, 14 [II B.C.]; Wsd 9:2; Jos., Ant. 8, 111; 347; Just., D. 35, 8 τῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ [Jesus] καὶ νῦν γινομένων δυνάμεων) Lk 9:7 v.l.; 13:17; 23:8; Eph 5:12. Of commands, instructions be fulfilled, performed γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου thy will be done (Appian, Liby. 90 §423 τὸ πρόσταγμα δεῖ γενέσθαι; Syntipas p. 25, 3 γενέσθω τὸ αἴτημα) Mt 6:10; 26:42; Lk 11:2; cp. 22:42. γέγονεν ὸ̔ ἐπέταξας your order has been carried out 14:22. γενέσθαι τὸ αἴτημα αὐτῶν that their demand should be granted 23:24. Of institutions: be established, the Sabbath for the sake of humans Mk 2:27 (Crates, Ep. 24 οὐ γεγόνασιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι τ. ἵππων χάριν, ἀλλʼ οἱ ἵπποι τ. ἀνθρώπων).
    ⓑ w. mention of the special nature of an undertaking: ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί in order to have such action taken in my case 1 Cor 9:15. ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ τί γένηται; what will be done when it (the wood) is dry? Lk 23:31.
    ③ come into being as an event or phenomenon from a point of origin, arise, come about, develop (Alcaeus 23 Diehl2 [320 L-P.] καί κʼ οὐδὲν ἐκ δένος γένοιτο=nothing could originate from nothing; Ath. 4:2 τὸ ὸ̓ν οὐ γίνεται ἀλλὰ τὸ μὴ ὸ̓ν)
    ⓐ of events or phenomena in nature (Sir 40:10; Ex 10:22; Job 40:23; Jos., Ant. 9, 36): lightning, thunder (X., An. 3, 1, 11) J 12:29; Rv 8:5; 11:19; calm (on the sea) Mt 8:26; Mk 4:39; Lk 8:24; storm Mk 4:37; a cloud (cp. Jos., Ant. 9, 36) 9:7; Lk 9:34; Hv 4, 3, 7; flood Lk 6:48; earthquake (Parian Marbles [III B.C.]=FGrH: 239B, 24) Mt 8:24; 28:2; Ac 16:26; Rv 6:12; 11:13; 16:18; darkness Mt 27:45; Mk 15:33; Lk 23:44; J 6:17; hail, fire Rv 8:7. Of a dawning day ὅτε δὲ ἡμέρα ἐγένετο (cp. περὶ ἀρχομένην ἡμέραν ‘about dawn’ Jos., Vi 15: in a related story of shipwreck) Ac 27:39.
    ⓑ of other occurrences (Arrian, Anab. 4, 4, 3 τὰ ἱερὰ οὐκ ἐγίγνετο=the sacrifice did not turn out [favorably]; 1 Macc 1:25; 4:58; 9:27; 13:44; Jdth 7:29; 14:19 al.): complaining Ac 6:1; persecution, oppression Mt 13:21; 24:21; Mk 4:17; 13:19; Ac 11:19; discussion J 3:25; Ac 15:7; tumult Mt 26:5; 27:24; GJs 21:1 and 25:1; a sound Ac 2:2, 6; weeping 20:37; clamor 23:9; Mt 25:6; AcPl Ha 4, 6; famine Lk 4:25; 15:14; Ac 11:28; ὁρμή (q.v.) 14:5; war Rv 12:7; sharp contention Ac 15:39; tear (in a garment) Mt 9:16; Mk 2:21; Lk 6:49; silence (s. σιγή) Ac 21:40; Rv 8:1; στάσις (q.v. 2) Lk 23:19; Ac 15:2; 23:7, 10; concourse 21:30; confusion 19:23; shout, loud voice 2:6; 19:34; Rv 11:15; dispute Lk 22:24; envy, strife 1 Ti 6:4; astonishment AcPl Ha 4, 25; joy 6, 3; prayer 6, 7; offering 6, 37.
    ⓒ of the various divisions of a day (Jdth 13:1; 1 Macc 5:30; 4 Macc 3:8 al.) γενομένης ἡμέρας when day came (Jos., Ant. 10, 202, Vi. 405) Lk 4:42; Ac 12:18; 16:35; 23:12; cp. Lk 6:13; 22:66; Ac 27:29, 33, 39. Difft. Mk 6:21 γενομένης ἡμέρας εὐκαίρου when a convenient/opportune day arrived. ὀψέ (cp. Gen 29:25; 1 Km 25:37) 11:19. ὀψίας γενομένης Mt 8:16; 14:15, 23; 16:2; 26:20; 27:57; Mk 1:32; 6:47; 14:17; 15:42; cp. J 6:16. πρωί̈ας Mt 27:1; J 21:4. νύξ Ac 27:27. ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης when it had grown late Mk 6:35; cp. 15:33; Lk 22:14; Ac 26:4.
    ④ to occur as process or result, happen, turn out, take place (Dicaearch., Fgm. 102 W.: a campaign ‘takes place’; Diod S 32 Fgm. 9c τὰς εἰς τ. πατέρα γεγενημένας ἁμαρτίας=the misdeeds ‘perpetrated’ against his father; 2 Macc 1:32; 13:17; 3 Macc 1:11; 4:12; 5:17 al.)
    ⓐ gener. τοῦτο ὅλον γέγονεν all this took place w. ἵνα foll. Mt 1:22; 26:56. ἕως ἂν πάντα γένηται until all has taken place (=is past) 5:18. πάντα τὰ γενόμενα everything that had happened (cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 121 §508 τὰ γενόμενα; 1 Esdr 1:10; Jdth 15:1; 1 Macc 4:20; 2 Macc 10:21; 3 Macc 1:17) 18:31; cp. 21:21; 24:6, 20, 34; 26:54; 27:54; 28:11; Mk 5:14. ἴδωμεν τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο τὸ γεγονός let us see this thing that has taken place Lk 2:15 (TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 15 [Stone p. 40]) θανάτου γενομένου since a death has occurred, i.e. since he has died Hb 9:15. τούτου γενομένου after this had happened (Jos., Ant. 9, 56; 129) Ac 28:9. τὸ γεγονός what had happened (Diod S 12, 49, 4; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 18 §496; Jos., Ant. 14, 292) Lk 8:34; 24:12. τὰ γεγονότα AcPl Ha 11, 1.—μὴ γένοιτο strong negation, in Paul only after rhet. questions (cp. TestJob 38:1; JosAs 25:8; Epict., index p. 540e; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 1, 2, Dial. Meretr. 13, 4; Achilles Tat. 5, 18, 4; Aristaen., Ep. 1, 27) by no means, far from it, God forbid (Goodsp., Probs., 88; AMalherbe, HTR 73, ’80, 231–41) Lk 20:16; Ro 3:4, 6, 31; 6:2, 15; 7:7, 13; 9:14; 11:1, 11; 1 Cor 6:15; Gal 2:17; 3:21. In more extensive phrasing (the LXX has exx. only of this usage: Gen 44:17; 3 Km 20:3 al.; cp. Josh 22:29; Demosth. 10, 27; Alciphron 2, 5, 3 al.; Ael. Aristid. 23, 80 K.=42 p. 795 D.; 30 p. 578 D.; 54 p. 679 ὸ̔ μὴ γένοιτο) Gal 6:14; w. ἵνα foll. AcPl Ha 7, 40. τί γέγονεν ὅτι (cp. Eccl 7:10) why is it that J 14:22.—Of festivals: be held, take place, come (X., Hell. 7, 4, 28 τὰ Ὀλύμπια; 4, 5, 1; 4 Km 23:22f; 2 Macc 6:7) feast of dedication J 10:22; passover Mt 26:2; sabbath Mk 6:2; wedding J 2:1.—Abs. impv. (put twice for emphasis as Lucian, Pisc. 1 βάλλε, βάλλε; Philostrat., Ep. 35, 1 λάβε λάβε; Procop. Soph., Ep. 45) γενηθήτω γενηθήτω so let it be as a closing formula 1 Cor 16:24 v.l. (cp. Herodas 4, 85, where the sacristan closes his prayer to Asclepius with the words: ὧδε ταῦτʼ εἴη=so may it be).—On γένοιτο ἀμήν GJs 6:2 s. ἀμήν 1a.
    ⓑ w. dat. of pers. affected
    α. w. inf. foll. (UPZ 24, 29 al.; 1 Macc 13:5; Jos., Ant. 6, 232) ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι so that he would not have to lose time Ac 20:16.
    β. w. adv. or adv. phrase added (1 Esdr 6:33) κατὰ τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν γενηθήτω ὑμῖν according to your faith let it be done to you, i.e. you believe, and you won’t be disappointed Mt 9:29; cp. 8:13. γένοιτό μοι κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμά σου may that happen to me as you have said Lk 1:38. πῶς ἐγένετο τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ what had happened to the possessed man Mk 5:16. ἵνα εὖ σοι γένηται that it may be well w. you Eph 6:3 (Dt 5:16; cp. Epict. 2, 5, 29 εὖ σοι γένοιτο; Aelian, VH 9, 36). γενηθήτω σοι ὡς θέλεις let it be done for you as you desire, i.e. your wish is granted Mt 15:28.
    γ. w. nom. of thing (1 Macc 4:25; Sir 51:17; Ar. 15:5) γίνεταί τινί τι someth. happens to or befalls a person Mk 9:21. ἵνα μὴ χεῖρόν σοί τι γένηται lest someth. worse come upon you J 5:14. τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ what has happened to him Ac 7:40 (Ex 32:1, 23; AcPl Ha 5, 20). τὸ γεγενημένον αὐτῷ Ac 3:10 D. ἐγίνετο πάσῃ ψυχῄ φόβος fear came upon everyone (cp. Tob 11:18) 2:43. λύπη AcPl Ha 6, 16. Freq. γέγονε ἐμοί τι someth. has come to me= I have someth.: πώρωσις τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν a hardening (of heart) has befallen Israel Ro 11:25; σωτηρία τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γεγένηται GJs 19:2; cp. Lk 19:9; διὰ τὴν ὀπτασίαν τὴν γενομένην Παύλῳ AcPl Ha 3, 15; ἐὰν γένηταί τινι ἀνθρώπῳ ἑκατὸν πρόβατα if a man has a hundred sheep Mt 18:12. τοῖς ἔξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὰ πάντα γίνεται those outside receive everything in parables Mk 4:11. μήποτε γένηται ἀνταπόδομά σοι that you may receive no repayment Lk 14:12; cp. 19:9; J 15:7; 1 Cor 4:5.
    ⓒ w. gen. of pers. (Diod S 16, 64, 2 τὸν τῆς Ἑλένης γεγενημένον ὅρμον=the necklace that had belonged to Helen): ἐγένετο ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ κόσμου τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν the kingdom of the world has come into the possession of our Lord Rv 11:15.
    ⓓ γίνεταί τι ἐπί τινι someth. happens in the case of or to a person Mk 5:33 v.l.; ἐν v.l. This can also be expressed w. εἴς τινα Ac 28:6 or the double nom. τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο what had become of Peter 12:18 (cp. Jos., Vi. 296 οἱ εἴκοσι χρυσοῖ τὶ γεγόνασιν).
    ⓔ w. inf. foll., to emphasize the actual occurrence of the action denoted by the verb: ἐὰν γένηται εὑρεῖν αὐτό if it comes about that he finds it= if he actually finds it Mt 18:13 (s. PCatt V, 19f [=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 372 V] ἐὰν γένηταί με ἀποδημεῖν; PAmh 135, 10; BGU 970, 5). ἐγένετο αὐτὸν παραπορεύεσθαι he happened to be passing Mk 2:23; cp. Lk 6:1, 6. ἐγένετο ἀνεῳχθῆναι τὸν οὐρανόν just then the heaven opened Lk 3:21; cp. 16:22 (ἐν τῷ ἀποθανεῖν P75); Ac 4:5; 9:3, 32, 37, 43; 11:26; 14:1; 16:16; 19:1; 21:1, 5; 22:6, 17; 27:44; 28:8 (UPZ 62, 29 [161 B.C.] γίνεται γὰρ ἐντραπῆναι).
    ⓕ καὶ ἐγένετο (ἐγένετο δέ) periphrastic like וַיְהִי with וַ foll. to indicate the progress of the narrative; it is followed either by a conjunction like ὅτε, ὡς etc., or a gen. abs., or a prepositional constr., and joined to it is a finite verb w. καί (Jdth 5:22; 10:1; Sus 19 Theod.; 1 Macc 1:1; 5:1; Gen 39:7, 13, 19; 42:35; JosAs 11:1; 22:1; AscIs 3:2) Mt 9:10; Mk 2:15 v.l.; Lk 2:15; 5:1, 12, 17; 8:1, 22; 14:1.—Without the second καί (Jdth 2:4; 12:10; 13:12; 1 Macc 6:8; 7:2 v.l.; 9:23; Sus 28 Theod.; Bel 18 Theod.; TestAbr B 1 p. 105, 1 [Stone p. 58] and 6 p. 109, 27 [Stone p. 66]; TestJob 31:1; JosAs 1:1; 3:1) Mt 7:28; 11:1; 13:53; 19:1; 26:1; Mk 1:9; 4:4; Lk 1:8, 23, 41, 59; 2:1, 6, 46; 6:12 al. At times it is followed by an inf. The phrase is usually omitted in translation; older versions transl. it came to pass.—Mlt. 16f; MJohannessohn, Das bibl. καὶ ἐγένετο u. s. Geschichte: ZVS 53, 1926, 161–212 (LXX); s. MDibelius, Gnomon 3, 1927, 446–50; HPernot, Études sur la langue des Évangiles 1927, 189–99; KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 29–62; JReiling, BT 16, ’65, 153–63; EDelebecque, Études grecques sur l’Évangile de Luc ’76, 123–65.
    ⑤ to experience a change in nature and so indicate entry into a new condition, become someth.
    ⓐ w. nouns (Lamellae Aur. Orphicae ed. AOlivieri 1915, p. 16, 5 θεὸς ἐγένου ἐξ ἀνθρώπου [IV/III]; Arrian, Anab. 5, 26, 5; Sir 51:2; 1 Esdr 4:26; Wsd 8:2; 4 Macc 16:6; En 103:11; Tat. 19, 2 τοῦ θανάτου καταφρονηταὶ γίνεσθε): ὅπως γένησθε υἱοὶ τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν that you may become sons of your father Mt 5:45; ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων I will turn you into fishers of people Mk 1:17; a traitor Lk 6:16; friends 23:12 (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 121); children of God J 1:12; children of light 12:36; a Christian Ac 26:29; apostle AcPlCor 2:4; a father Ro 4:18; a fool 1 Cor 3:18; a spectacle 4:9; a man, an adult 13:11 (Tob 1:9); a curse Gal 3:13. οὐχ ἑαυτὸν ἐδόξασεν γενηθῆναι ἀρχιερέα he did not exalt himself to be made high priest Hb 5:5; ἐγένετο ἀντὶ αὐτοῦ Σαμουήλ Samuel became (high priest) in his place GJs 10:2. W. double nom. (Ps.-Apollod., Epit. 3, 15 δράκων λίθος ἐγένετο; Quint. Smyrn. 12, 507; Bel 28; 4 Macc 18:7) οἱ λίθοι ἄρτοι γίνονται the stones turn into loaves Mt 4:3. τὸ αἵμα αὐτοῦ λίθον γεγενημένον GJs 24:3. ὁ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο J 1:14 (the reverse PBerl 13044, col. III, 28ff [UWilcken, SBBerlAk 1923, 161f] τί ποιῶν ἄν τις γένοιτο θεός;). τὸ ὕδωρ γενήσεται πηγή 4:14. ἡ περιτομὴ ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν Ro 2:25. ἐγενόμην ἐγὼ διάκονος I became a courier Col 1:23 (cp. Herodian 2, 6, 8 ἀνὴρ ἔπαρχος γενόμενος).—Also γ. εἴς τι (Menand., Peric. 49f Kö. [169f S.] τὸ κακὸν εἰς ἀγαθὸν ῥέπει γινόμενον; 1 Km 4:9; Jdth 5:18; 1 Macc 2:11, 43; 3:58; En 19:2 al.; B-D-F §145, 1): ἐγένετο εἰς δένδρον it became a tree Lk 13:19; εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας Mt 21:42; Mk 12:10; Lk 20:17; Ac 4:11; 1 Pt 2:7 (all in ref. to Ps 117:22); εἰς χαρὰν γ. change (or, turn) into joy J 16:20. εἰς οὐδέν come to nothing Ac 5:36. εἰς παγίδα Ro 11:9 (Ps 68:23); εἰς κενὸν γ. be done in vain 1 Th 3:5. εἰς ἄψινθον Rv 8:11. Cp. AcPl Ha 6, 6. Also w. γίνεσθαι omitted: εἰς κατάκριμα (sc. ἐγένετο τὸ κρίμα) Ro 5:18.
    ⓑ used w. an adj. to paraphrase the passive (Jdth 11:11; 1 Esdr 7:3; 2 Macc 3:34; Sus 64 Theod.; En 103:9; Ath. 37, 1 πάντων ὑποχειρίων γιγνομένων): ἁπαλὸν γ. become tender Mt 24:32; Mk 13:28; ἀπειθῆ γ. Ac 26:19; ἀποσυνάγωγον γ. be expelled fr. the synagogue J 12:42; ἄφαντον γ. disappear Lk 24:31; σκωληκόβρωτον γ. be eaten by worms Ac 12:23; γνωστόν, φανερὸν γ. become known (Just., A I, 63, 6) Mk 6:14; Ac 1:19; 9:42; 19:17; 1 Cor 3:13; 14:25; Phil 1:13; δόκιμον γ. pass the test Js 1:12; ἑδραῖον γ. 1 Cor 15:58; ἔκδηλον γ. 2 Ti 3:9; AcPlCor 1:16; ἔξυπνον γ. Ac 16:27 (1 Esdr 3:3=Jos., Ant. 11:34); s. ἀπόπληκτος, ἐλεύθερος, ἐμφανής, ἔμφοβος, ἐνεργής, ἔντρομος, καθαρός, μέγας, περιδάκρυτος, περικρατής, πλήρης, πρηνής, τυφλός, ὑγιής, ὑπήκοος, ὑπόδικος, φανερός 1.
    ⓒ w. ἐν of a state of being (Stoic. III 221, 16; Diod S 20, 62, 4 ἐν ἀνέσει γ.; Plut., Tit. Flam. 378 [16, 1] ἐν ὀργῇ γ.; Lucian, Tim. 28; PPetr II, 20; III, 12 [252 B.C.] ἐν ἐπισχέσει γ.; BGU 5 II, 19 ἐν νόσῳ; POxy 471 IV, 77f; 4 Km 9:20; 1 Macc 1:27 v.l.; Sus 8 Theod.; Jos., Bell. 1, 320, Ant. 16, 372; Mel., P. 18 ἐν πόνοις … ἐν πληγαῖς etc.) ἐν ἀγωνίᾳ Lk 22:44. ἐν ἐκστάσει Ac 22:17. ἐν πνεύματι under the Spirit’s influence Rv 1:10; 4:2; AcPl Ha 6, 28. ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων be like human beings Phil 2:7. ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ, φόβῳ, τρόμῳ 1 Cor 2:3. ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:7. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γ. come to one’s senses (Soph., Phil. 950; X., An. 1, 5, 17; Polyb. 1, 49, 8; Chariton 3, 9, 11) Ac 12:11; γ. ἐν Χριστῷ be a Christian Ro 16:7. Cp. 7 below.
    ⑥ to make a change of location in space, move
    ⓐ εἴς τι (Hdt. 5, 87 al.; Philo, Op. M. 86; 2 Macc 1:13; also ἐν: Just., A II, 9, 3 ἐγενόμεθα ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ τόπω): εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα γ. (Jos., Ant. 10, 42) Ac 20:16; 21:17; 25:15. εἰς τὸν ἀγρόν Hv 3, 1, 4. Of a voice: ἐγένετο εἰς τὰ ὦτά μου reached my ear Lk 1:44. Fig. (cp. Bar 4:28) of Abraham’s blessing εἰς τὰ ἔθνη come to the Gentiles Gal 3:14; cp. 2 Cor 8:14 (s. περίσσευμα 1, ὑστέρημα 1).
    ⓑ ἔκ τινος (Job 28:2): γ. ἐκ μέσου be removed, Lat. e medio tolli (cp. Ps.-Aeschin., Ep. 12, 6 ἐκ μέσου γενομένων ἐκείνων; Plut., Timol. 238 [5, 3]; Achilles Tat. 2, 27, 2) 2 Th 2:7 (HFulford, ET 23, 1912, 40f: ‘leave the scene’). Of a voice fr. heaven: ἐκ τ. οὐρανῶν γ. sound forth fr. heaven (2 Macc 2:21; cp. Da 4:31 Theod.) Mk 1:11; Lk 3:22; 9:35; cp. vs. 36.
    ⓒ ἐπί τι: ἐπὶ τὸ μνημεῖον go to the tomb Lk 24:22; ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς when he was at the steps Ac 21:35. Of fear that befalls someone (2 Macc 12:22) Lk 1:65; 4:36; Ac 5:5. Of ulcers: break out on someone Rv 16:2 (Ex 9:10f). Of divine commands: go out to someone Lk 3:2. ἐπί is somet. used w. the gen. (Appian, Liby. 93 §440; Alex. Aphr., Mixt. II 2 p. 213, 21) instead of the acc.: γενόμενος ἐπὶ τοῦ τόπου when he had arrived at the place 22:40 (Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 327, 18 ἐπὶ τ. τόπων γινόμενος).—J 6:21.
    ⓓ w. κατά and gen. of place: τὸ γενόμενον ῥῆμα καθʼ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας the message that has spread throughout all Judea Ac 10:37. W. acc. of place (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 15; Apollon. Paradox. 3 κατὰ τόπους γ.; Jos., Ant. I, 174; cp. 2 Macc 9:8): γενόμενος κατὰ τὸν τόπον Lk 10:32; γενόμενοι κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον Ac 27:7.
    ⓔ w. πρός and acc. of the direction and goal (PLond III, 962, 1 p. 210 [III A.D.] γενοῦ πρὸς Ἄταϊν τὸν ποιμένα; PFlor 180, 45) 1 Cor 2:3; 2J 12. Of divine instructions be given to someone (Gen 15:1, 4; Jer 1:2, 11; 13:8; Ezk 6:1; Hos 1:1; cp. ἐπί w. acc.) J 10:35; Ac 7:31 v.l.; 10:13; 13:32.
    ⓕ w. σύν and the dat. join someone (X., Cyr. 5, 3, 8; 2 Macc 13:13) Lk 2:13.
    ⓖ w. ἐγγύς (X., An. 1, 8, 8, Cyr. 7, 1, 7; cp. γίν. πλησίον Philo, Mos. 1, 228; Jos., Ant. 4, 40): ἐγγὺς τοῦ πλοίου γίνεσθαι come close to the boat J 6:19. Fig. of the relation of believers to Christ: come near Eph 2:13.
    ⓗ w. ὧδε come here J 6:25;
    ⓘ ἔμπροσθέν τινος γ. J 1:15, 30 s. on ἔμπροσθεν 1bζ and ὀπίσω 2b.
    ⑦ to come into a certain state or possess certain characteristics, to be, prove to be, turn out to be (on relation to the forms of εἰμί [here and in 8–10] s. ALink, StKr 69, 1896, 420ff). Used w. the nom. (Wsd 16:3; Jdth 16:21; Sir 31:22; 1 Macc 3:58) γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι be prudent Mt 10:16. ἄκαρπος γίνεται 13:22; Mk 4:19.—W. other words: vs. 22; 9:50; Lk 1:2; 2:2; 6:36 and very oft. Freq. the dat. of advantage (dat. commodi) is added (1 Macc 10:47; 2 Macc 7:37; 4 Macc 6:28; 12:17): ἀγαπητόν τινι γ. be dear to someone 1 Th 2:8. ἀπρόσκοπον γ. τινι be inoffensive to someone 1 Cor 10:32; γ. τινι μαθητήν J 15:8; μισθαποδότην γ. τινι be a rewarder of someone Hb 11:6; γ. ὁδηγόν τινι Ac 1:16. Cp. παρηγορία, σημεῖον, τύπος.—γ. ὁμοθυμαδόν come together in unanimity or reach unanimity Ac 15:25.—τὶ γίνεταί τινί τι a thing results in someth. for someone τὸ ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγ. θάνατος; Ro 7:13. ἡ ἐξουσία πρόσκομμα τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν 1 Cor 8:9.—γίνομαι ὡς, ὥσπερ, ὡσεί τις (Ps 21:15; 31:9; 37:15; 82:11; 87:5 al.) be, become, show oneself like Mt 6:16; 10:25; 18:3; 28:4; Lk 22:26, 44; 1 Cor 4:13; 9:20f; Gal 4:12. καθὼς ἐγένετο … οὕτως ἔσται as it was … so it will be Lk 17:26, 28. οὐ χρὴ ταῦτα οὕτως γίνεσθαι this should not be so Js 3:10. ὁσίως καὶ δικαίως καὶ ἀμέμπτως ὑμῖν ἐγενήθημεν we proved/showed ourselves … toward you 1 Th 2:10.—In statements pert. to age (Aristoxenus, Fgm. 16 γεγονότα [sc. τὸν Πυθαγόραν] ἐτῶν τεσσαράκοντα; Demetr. of Phaleron [IV–III B.C.], Fgm. 153 Wehrli [’49]; Demetr: 722 Fgm. 1, 1 Jac.; Jos., Ant. 10, 50) ἐτῶν δώδεκα Lk 2:42; cp. 1 Ti 5:9.—Here prob. also belongs ἐγένετο γνώμης he decided Ac 20:3 (cp. Plut., Phoc. 752 [23, 4] ἐλπίδος μεγάλης γ.; Cass. Dio 61, 14 τ. ἐπιθυμίας γ.; Jos., Bell. 6, 287).
    ⑧ to be present at a given time, be there ([Ps.-]Jos., Ant. 18, 63) Mk 1:4; J 1:6, hence exist (Diod S 3, 52, 4 γέγονε γένη γυναικῶν=there have been nations of women; Appian, Maced. 18 §3 τὸ χρυσίον τὸ γιγνόμενον=the gold that was at hand; Bar 3:26; 2 Macc 10:24) Ro 11:5; 1J 2:18. ἐγένετο there lived Lk 1:5. ἔν τινι 2 Pt 2:1. ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς Rv 16:18 (Da 12:1 Theod.).
    ⑨ to be closely related to someone or someth., belong to
    ⓐ gen. of the possessor (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 79 §336 a slave γεγένητο Πομπηίου=had belonged to Pompey: B-D-F §162, 7) belong to someone Lk 20:14, 33 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 83 §350 γυνὴ Κράσσου γεγενημένη=who had been the wife of [the younger] Crassus).
    ⓑ w. dat. of pers. belong to someone (PPetr II, 40b, 7 [277 B.C.]; O. Wilck II, 1530, 2f [120 B.C.] τὸ γινόμενόν μοι=what belongs to me) of a woman ἀνδρὶ ἑτέρῳ Ro 7:3f (cp. Ruth 1:12f; Dt 24:2).
    ⓒ w. prep. μετά τινος (Josh 2:19) Ac 9:19; 20:18. οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ γενόμενοι his intimate friends Mk 16:10. πρός τινα be w. someone 1 Cor 16:10 ( make him [Timothy] feel quite at home with you Mft.) ὑπό τινα be under the authority of someone or someth. (1 Macc 10:38) Gal 4:4.
    ⓓ Here perh. belongs ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται it is not a matter of private interpretation 2 Pt 1:20.
    ⑩ to be in or at a place, be in, be there
    ⓐ ἔν τινι to designate one’s present or future place of residence (X., An. 4, 3, 29; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 4 §15 Ἀντώνιος ἐν Ἐφέσῳ γενόμενος; Aelian, VH 4, 15; Herodian 2, 2, 5; POxy 283, 11; 709, 6 ἐν Μένφει γενόμενος; PTebt 416, 3; BGU 731 II, 6 ἐν οἰκίᾳ μου; Num 11:35; Judg 17:4; 1 Ch 14:17; Jdth 5:7 al. Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 18 Jac.) Mt 26:6; Mk 9:33; Ac 7:38; 13:5; 2 Ti 1:17; Rv 1:9; AcPl Ha 7, 23.
    ⓑ w. adv.: ἐκεῖ (X., An. 6, 5, 20; 3 Km 8:8 v.l.; Jos., Ant. 10, 180) Ac 19:21. κατὰ μόνας Mk 4:10.—B. 637. DELG s.v. γίγνομαι. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > γίνομαι

  • 5 λόγος

    λόγος, ὁ, verbal noun of λέγω (B), with senses corresponding to λέγω (B) II and III (on the various senses of the word v. Theo Sm.pp.72,73 H., An.Ox.4.327): common in all periods in Prose and Verse, exc. Epic, in which it is found in signf. derived from λέγω (B) 111, cf.infr. VI. 1 a:
    I computation, reckoning (cf. λέγω (B) II).
    1 account of money handled,

    σανίδες εἰς ἃς τὸν λ. ἀναγράφομεν IG12.374.191

    ; ἐδίδοσαν τὸν λ. ib.232.2;

    λ. δώσεις τῶν μετεχείρισας χρημάτων Hdt.3.142

    , cf. 143;

    οὔτε χρήματα διαχειρίσας τῆς πόλεως δίδωμι λ. αὐτῶν οὔτε ἀρχὴν ἄρξας οὐδεμίαν εὐθύνας ὑπέχω νῦν αὐτῆς Lys.24.26

    ;

    λ. ἀπενεγκεῖν Arist.Ath.54.1

    ;

    ἐν ταῖς εὐθύναις τοῦ τοιούτου λ. ὑπεχέτω Pl.Lg. 774b

    ;

    τὸν τῶν χρημάτων λ. παρὰ τούτων λαμβάνειν D.8.47

    ;

    ἀδικήματα εἰς ἀργυρίου λ. ἀνήκοντα Din.1.60

    ; συνᾶραι λόγον μετά τινος settle accounts with, Ev.Matt.18.23, etc.; δεύτεροι λ. a second audit, Cod.Just.1.4.26.1; ὁ τραπεζιτικὸς λ. banking account, Theo Sm.p.73 H.: metaph.,

    οὐκ ἂν πριαίμην οὐδενὸς λ. βροτόν S.Aj. 477

    .
    b public accounts, i. e. branch of treasury, ἴδιος λ., in Egypt, OGI188.2, 189.3, 669.38; also as title of treasurer, ib.408.4, Str.17.1.12;

    ὁ ἐπὶ τῶν λ. IPE2.29

     A ([place name] Panticapaeum); δημόσιος λ., = Lat. fiscus, OGI669.21 (Egypt, i A.D.), etc. (but later, = aerarium, Cod.Just.1.5.15); also

    Καίσαρος λ. OGI669.30

    ; κυριακὸς λ. ib.18.
    2 generally, account, reckoning, μὴ φῦναι τὸν ἅπαντα νικᾷ λ. excels the whole account, i.e. is best of all, S.OC 1225 (lyr.); δόντας λ. τῶν ἐποίησαν accounting for, i.e. paying the penalty for their doings, Hdt.8.100;

    λ. αἰτεῖν Pl.Plt. 285e

    ;

    λ. δοῦναι καὶ δέξασθαι Id.Prt. 336c

    , al.;

    λαμβάνειν λ. καὶ ἐλέγχειν Id.Men. 75d

    ;

    παρασχεῖν τῶν εἰρημένων λ. Id.R. 344d

    ;

    λ. ἀπαιτεῖν D.30.15

    , cf. Arist. EN 1104a3; λ. ὑπέχειν, δοῦναι, D.19.95;

    λ. ἐγγράψαι Id.24.199

    , al.;

    λ. ἀποφέρειν τῇ πόλει Aeschin.3.22

    , cf. Eu. Luc.16.2, Ep.Hebr.13.17;

    τὸ παράδοξον τῶν συμβεβηκότων ὑπὸ λόγον ἄγειν Plb.15.34.2

    ; λ. ἡ ἐπιστήμη, πολλὰ δὲ ὁ λ. the account is manifold, Plot.6.9.4; ἔχων λόγον τοῦ διὰ τί an account of the cause, Arist.APo. 74b27; ἐς λ. τινός on account of,

    ἐς χρημάτων λ. Th.3.46

    , cf. Plb.5.89.6, LXX 2 Ma1.14, JRS 18.152 ([place name] Jerash); λόγῳ c. gen., by way of, Cod.Just.3.2.5. al.; κατὰ λόγον τοῦ μεγέθους if we take into account his size, Arist.HA 517b27;

    πρὸς ὃν ἡμῖν ὁ λ. Ep.Hebr.4.13

    , cf. D.Chr.31.123.
    3 measure, tale (cf. infr. 11.1),

    θάλασσα.. μετρέεται ἐς τὸν αὐτὸν λ. ὁκοῖος πρόσθεν Heraclit.31

    ;

    ψυχῆς ἐστι λ. ἑαυτὸν αὔξων Id.115

    ; ἐς τούτου (sc. γήραος) λ. οὐ πολλοί τινες ἀπικνέονται to the point of old age, Hdt.3.99, cf.7.9.β; ὁ ξύμπας λ. the full tale, Th.7.56, cf. Ep.Phil.4.15; κοινῷ λ. νομίσαντα common measure, Pl.Lg. 746e; sum, total of expenditure, IG42(1).103.151 (Epid., iv B.C.); ὁ τῆς οὐσίας λ., = Lat. patrimonii modus, Cod.Just.1.5.12.20.
    4 esteem, consideration, value put on a person or thing (cf. infr. VI. 2 d), οὗ πλείων λ. ἢ τῶν ἄλλων who is of more worth than all the rest, Heraclit.39; βροτῶν λ. οὐκ ἔσχεν οὐδέν' A.Pr. 233;

    οὐ σμικροῦ λ. S.OC 1163

    : freq. in Hdt.,

    Μαρδονίου λ. οὐδεὶς γίνεται 8.102

    ;

    τῶν ἦν ἐλάχιστος ἀπολλυμένων λ. 4.135

    , cf. E.Fr.94;

    περὶ ἐμοῦ οὐδεὶς λ. Ar.Ra.87

    ; λόγου οὐδενὸς γίνεσθαι πρός τινος to be of no account, repute with.., Hdt.1.120, cf.4.138; λόγου ποιήσασθαί τινα make one of account, Id.1.33; ἐλαχίστου, πλείστου λ. εἶναι, to be highly, lowly esteemed, Id.1.143, 3.146; but also λόγον τινὸς ποιεῖσθαι, like Lat. rationem habere alicujus, make account of, set a value on, Democr.187, etc.: usu. in neg. statements,

    οὐδένα λ. ποιήσασθαί τινος Hdt.1.4

    , cf. 13, Plb.21.14.9, etc.;

    λ. ἔχειν Hdt.1.62

    , 115;

    λ. ἴσχειν περί τινος Pl.Ti. 87c

    ;

    λ. ἔχειν περὶ τοὺς ποιητάς Lycurg.107

    ;

    λ. ἔχειν τινός D.18.199

    , Arist.EN 1102b32, Plu.Phil.18 (but also, have the reputation of.., v. infr. VI. 2 e);

    ἐν οὐδενὶ λ. ποιήσασθαί τι Hdt.3.50

    ; ἐν οὐδενὶ λ. ἀπώλοντο without regard, Id.9.70;

    ἐν σμικρῷ λ. εἶναι Pl.R. 550a

    ; ὑμεῖς οὔτ' ἐν λ. οὔτ' ἐν ἀριθμῷ Orac. ap. Sch.Theoc.14.48; ἐν ἀνδρῶν λ. [εἶναι] to be reckoned, count as a man, Hdt.3.120; ἐν ἰδιώτεω λόγῳ καὶ ἀτίμου reckoned as.., Eus.Mynd.Fr. 59;

    σεμνὸς εἰς ἀρετῆς λ. καὶ δόξης D.19.142

    .
    II relation, correspondence, proportion,
    1 generally, ὑπερτερίης λ. relation (of gold to lead), Thgn.418 = 1164;

    πρὸς λόγον τοῦ σήματος A.Th. 519

    ; κατὰ λόγον προβαίνοντες τιμῶσι in inverse ratio, Hdt.1.134, cf. 7.36;

    κατὰ λ. τῆς ἀποφορῆς Id.2.109

    ; τἄλλα κατὰ λ. in like fashion, Hp.VM16, Prog.17: c. gen., κατὰ λ. τῶν πρόσθεν ib. 24;

    κατὰ λ. τῶν ἡμερῶν Ar. Nu. 619

    ;

    κατὰ λ. τῆς δυνάμεως X. Cyr.8.6.11

    ;

    ἐλάττω ἢ κατὰ λ. Arist. HA 508a2

    , cf. PA 671a18;

    ἐκ ταύτης ἐγένετο ἐκείνη κατὰ λ. Id.Pol. 1257a31

    ; cf. εὔλογος: sts. with ὁ αὐτός added, κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν λ. τῷ τείχεϊ in fashion like to.., Hdt.1.186; περὶ τῶν νόσων ὁ αὐτὸς λ. analogously, Pl.Tht. 158d, cf. Prm. 136b, al.; εἰς τὸν αὐτὸν λ. similarly, Id.R. 353d; κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν λ. in the same ratio, IG12.76.8; by parity of reasoning, Pl.Cra. 393c, R. 610a, al.; ἀνὰ λόγον τινός, τινί, Id.Ti. 29c, Alc.2.145d; τοῦτον ἔχει τὸν λ. πρὸς.. ὃν ἡ παιδεία πρὸς τὴν ἀρετήν is related to.. as.., Procl.in Euc.p.20 F., al.
    2 Math., ratio, proportion (ὁ κατ' ἀνάλογον λ., λ. τῆς ἀναλογίας, Theo Sm.p.73 H.), Pythag. 2;

    ἰσότης λόγων Arist.EN 113a31

    ;

    λ. ἐστὶ δύο μεγεθῶν ἡ κατὰ πηλικότητα ποιὰ σχέσις Euc.5

     Def.3;

    τῶν ἁρμονιῶν τοὺς λ. Arist.Metaph. 985b32

    , cf. 1092b14; λόγοι ἀριθμῶν numerical ratios, Aristox.Harm.p.32 M.; τοὺς φθόγγους ἀναγκαῖον ἐν ἀριθμοῦ λ. λέγεσθαι πρὸς ἀλλήλους to be expressed in numerical ratios, Euc.Sect.Can. Proëm.: in Metre, ratio between arsis and thesis, by which the rhythm is defined, Aristox.Harm.p.34 M.;

    ἐὰν ᾖ ἰσχυροτέρα τοῦ αἰσθητηρίου ἡ κίνησις, λύεται ὁ λ. Arist.de An. 424a31

    ; ἀνὰ λόγον analogically, Archyt.2; ἀνὰ λ. μερισθεῖσα [ἡ ψυχή] proportionally, Pl. Ti. 37a; so

    κατὰ λ. Men.319.6

    ; πρὸς λόγον in proportion, Plb.6.30.3, 9.15.3 (but πρὸς λόγον ἐπὶ στενὸν συνάγεται narrows uniformly, Sor. 1.9, cf. Diocl.Fr.171);

    ἐπὶ λόγον IG5(1).1428

     ([place name] Messene).
    3 Gramm., analogy, rule, τῷ λ. τῶν μετοχικῶν, τῆς συγκοπῆς, by the rule of the participles, of syncope, Choerob. in Theod.1.75 Gaisf., 1.377 H.;

    εἰπέ μοι τὸν λ. τοῦ Αἴας Αἴαντος, τουτέστι τὸν κανόνα An.Ox. 4.328

    .
    1 plea, pretext, ground, ἐκ τίνος λ.; A.Ch. 515;

    ἐξ οὐδενὸς λ. S.Ph. 731

    ;

    ἀπὸ παντὸς λ. Id.OC 762

    ;

    χὠ λ. καλὸς προσῆν Id.Ph. 352

    ;

    σὺν ἀφανεῖ λ. Id.OT 657

     (lyr., v.l. λόγων)

    ; ἐν ἀφανεῖ λ. Antipho 5.59

    ;

    ἐπὶ τοιούτῳ λ. Hdt.6.124

    ; κατὰ τίνα λ.; on what ground? Pl.R. 366b; οὐδὲ πρὸς ἕνα λ. to no purpose, Id.Prt. 343d; ἐπὶ τίνι λ.; for what reason? X.HG2.2.19; τὸν λ. τοῦτον this ground of complaint, Aeschin.3.228; τίνι δικαίῳ λ.; what just cause is there? Pl.Grg. 512c; τίνι λ.; on what account? Act.Ap.10.29; κατὰ λόγον ἂν ἠνεσχόμην ὑμῶν reason would that.., ib.18.14; λ. ἔχειν, with personal subject, εἶχον ἄν τινα λ. I (i.e. my conduct) would have admitted of an explanation, Pl.Ap. 31b; τὸν ὀρθὸν λ. the true explanation, ib. 34b.
    b plea, case, in Law or argument (cf. VIII. I), τὸν ἥττω λ. κρείττω ποιεῖν to make the weaker case prevail, ib. 18b, al., Arist.Rh. 1402a24, cf. Ar.Nu. 1042 (pl.); personified, ib. 886, al.;

    ἀμύνεις τῷ τῆς ἡδονῆς λ. Pl.Phlb. 38a

    ;

    ἀνοίσεις τοὺς λ. αὐτῶν πρὸς τὸν θεόν LXXEx.18.19

    ; ἐχειν λ. πρός τινα to have a case, ground of action against.., Act.Ap.19.38.
    2 statement of a theory, argument, οὐκ ἐμεῦ ἀλλὰ τοῦ λ. ἀκούσαντας prob. in Heraclit.50; λόγον ἠδὲ νόημα ἀμφὶς ἀληθείης discourse and reflection on reality, Parm.8.50; δηλοῖ οὗτος ὁ λ. ὅτι .. Democr.7; οὐκ ἔχει λόγον it is not arguable, i.e. reasonable, S.El. 466, Pl.Phd. 62d, etc.;

    ἔχει λ. D.44.32

    ;

    οὐδεὶς αὐτὰ καταβαλεῖ λ. E.Ba. 202

    ;

    δίκασον.. τὸν λ. ἀκούσας Pl.Lg. 696b

    ; personified, φησὶ οὗτος ὁ λ. ib. 714d, cf. Sph. 238b, Phlb. 50a; ὡς ὁ λ. (sc. λέγει) Arist.EN 1115b12; ὡς ὁ λ. ὁ ὀρθὸς λέγει ib. 1138b20, cf. 29;

    ὁ λ. θέλει προσβιβάζειν Phld.Rh.1.41

    , cf.1.19 S.;

    οὐ γὰρ ἂν ἀκούσειε λόγου ἀποτρέποντος Arist.EN 1179b27

    ;

    λ. καθαίρων Aristo Stoic.1.88

    ; λόγου τυγχάνειν to be explained, Phld.Mus.p.77 K.; ὁ τὸν λ. μου ἀκούων my teaching, Ev.Jo.5.24; ὁ προφητικὸς λ., collect., of VT prophecy, 2 Ep.Pet.1.19: pl.,

    ὁκόσων λόγους ἤκουσα Heraclit.108

    ;

    οὐκ ἐπίθετο τοῖς ἐμοῖς λ. Ar.Nu.73

    ; of arguments leading to a conclusion ([etym.] ὁ λ.), Pl. Cri. 46b;

    τὰ Ἀναξαγόρου βιβλία γέμει τούτων τῶν λ. Id.Ap. 26d

    ; λ. ἀπὸ τῶν ἀρχῶν, ἐπὶ τὰς ἀρχάς, Arist.EN 1095a31; συλλογισμός ἐστι λ. ἐν ᾧ τεθέντων τινῶν κτλ. Id.APr. 24b18; λ. ἀντίτυπός τε καὶ ἄπορος, of a self-contradictory theory, Plot.6.8.7.
    b ὁ περὶ θεῶν λ., title of a discourse by Protagoras, D.L.9.54; ὁ Ἀχιλλεὺς λ., name of an argument, ib.23;

    ὁ αὐξόμενος λ. Plu.2.559b

    ; καταβάλλοντες (sc. λόγοι), title of work by Protagoras, S.E.M.7.60;

    λ. σοφιστικοί Arist.SE 165a34

    , al.;

    οἱ μαθηματικοὶ λ. Id.Rh. 1417a19

    , etc.; οἱ ἐξωτερικοὶ λ., current outside the Lyceum, Id.Ph. 217b31, al.; Δισσοὶ λ., title of a philosophical treatise (= Dialex.); Λ. καὶ Λογίνα, name of play of Epicharmus, quibble, argument, personified, Ath.8.338d.
    c in Logic, proposition, whether as premiss or conclusion,

    πρότασίς ἐστι λ. καταφατικὸς ἢ ἀποφατικός τινος κατά τινος Arist.APr. 24a16

    .
    d rule, principle, law, as embodying the result of λογισμός, Pi.O.2.22, P.1.35, N.4.31;

    πείθεσθαι τῷ λ. ὃς ἄν μοι λογιζομένῳ βέλτιστος φαίνηται Pl.Cri. 46b

    , cf. c; ἡδονὰς τοῖς ὀρθοῖς λ. ἑπομένας obeying right principles, Id.Lg. 696c; προαιρέσεως [ἀρχὴ] ὄρεξις καὶ λ. ὁ ἕνεκά τινος principle directed to an end, Arist.EN 1139a32; of the final cause,

    ἀρχὴ ὁ λ. ἔν τε τοῖς κατὰ τέχνην καὶ ἐν τοῖς φύσει συνεστηκόσιν Id.PA 639b15

    ; ἀποδιδόασι τοὺς λ. καὶ τὰς αἰτίας οὗ ποιοῦσι ἑκάστου ib.18; [

    τέχνη] ἕξις μετὰ λ. ἀληθοῦς ποιητική Id.EN 1140a10

    ; ὀρθὸς λ. true principle, right rule, ib. 1144b27, 1147b3, al.; κατὰ λόγον by rule, consistently,

    ὁ κατὰ λ. ζῶν Pl.Lg. 689d

    , cf. Ti. 89d; τὸ κατὰ λ. ζῆν, opp. κατὰ πάθος, Arist.EN 1169a5; κατὰ λ. προχωρεῖν according to plan, Plb.1.20.3.
    3 law, rule of conduct,

    ᾧ μάλιστα διηνεκῶς ὁμιλοῦσι λόγῳ Heraclit.72

    ;

    πολλοὶ λόγον μὴ μαθόντες ζῶσι κατὰ λόγον Democr.53

    ; δεῖ ὑπάρχειν τὸν λ. τὸν καθόλου τοῖς ἄρχουσιν universal principle, Arist.Pol. 1286a17;

    ὁ νόμος.. λ. ὢν ἀπό τινος φρονήσεως καὶ νοῦ Id.EN 1180a21

    ; ὁ νόμος.. ἔμψυχος ὢν ἑαυτῷ λ. conscience, Plu. 2.780c; τὸν λ. πρόχειρον ἔχειν precept, Phld.Piet.30, cf. 102;

    ὁ προστακτικὸς τῶν ποιητέων ἢ μὴ λ. κοινός M.Ant.4.4

    .
    4 thesis, hypothesis, provisional ground, ὡς ἂν εἰ λέγοι λόγον maintain a thesis, Pl. Prt. 344b; ὑποθέμενος ἑκάστοτε λ. provisionally assuming a proposition, Id.Phd. 100a; τὸν τῆς ὁμοιότητος λ. hypothesis of equivalence, Arist.Cael. 296a20.
    5 reason, ground,

    πάντων γινομένων κατὰ τὸν λ. τόνδε Heraclit.1

    ;

    οὕτω βαθὺν λ. ἔχει Id.45

    ; ἐκ λόγου, opp. μάτην, Leucipp. 2;

    μέγιστον σημεῖον οὗτος ὁ λ. Meliss.8

    ; [ἐμπειρία] οὐκ ἔχει λ. οὐδένα ὧν προσφέρει has no grounds for.., Pl.Grg. 465a; μετὰ λόγου

    τε καὶ ἐπιστήμης θείας Id.Sph. 265c

    ; ἡ μετα λόγου ἀληθὴς δόξα ([etym.] ἐπιστήμη) Id.Tht. 201c; λόγον ζητοῦσιν ὧν οὐκ ἔστι λ. proof, Arist. Metaph. 1011a12;

    οἱ ἁπάντων ζητοῦντες λ. ἀναιροῦσι λ. Thphr.Metaph. 26

    .
    6 formula (wider than definition, but freq. equivalent thereto), term expressing reason,

    λ. τῆς πολιτείας Pl.R. 497c

    ; ψυχῆς οὐσία τε καὶ λ. essential definition, Id.Phdr. 245e;

    ὁ τοῦ δικαίου λ. Id.R. 343a

    ; τὸν λ. τῆς οὐσίας ib. 534b, cf. Phd. 78d;

    τὰς πολλὰς ἐπιστήμας ἑνὶ λ. προσειπεῖν Id.Tht. 148d

    ;

    ὁ τῆς οἰκοδομήσεως λ. ἔχει τὸν τῆς οἰκίας Arist. PA 646b3

    ;

    τεθείη ἂν ἴδιον ὄνομα καθ' ἕκαστον τῶν λ. Id.Metaph. 1006b5

    , cf. 1035b4;

    πᾶς ὁρισμὸς λ. τίς ἐστι Id.Top. 102a5

    ; ἐπὶ τῶν σχημάτων λ. κοινός generic definition, Id.de An. 414b23; ἀκριβέστατος λ. specific definition, Id.Pol. 1276b24;

    πηγῆς λ. ἔχον Ph.2.477

    ; τὸ ᾠὸν οὔτε ἀρχῆς ἔχει λ. fulfils the function of.., Plu.2.637d; λ. τῆς μίξεως formula, i. e. ratio (cf. supr. II) of combination, Arist.PA 642a22, cf. Metaph. 993a17.
    7 reason, law exhibited in the world-process, κατὰ λόγον by law,

    κόσμῳ πάντα καὶ κατὰ λ. ἔχοντα Pl.R. 500c

    ; κατ τὸν < αὐτὸν αὖ> λ. by the same law, Epich.170.18;

    ψυχῆς τὸ πᾶν τόδε διοικούσης κατὰ λ. Plot.2.3.13

    ; esp. in Stoic Philos., the divine order,

    τὸν τοῦ παντὸς λ. ὃν ἔνιοι εἱμαρμένην καλοῦσιν Zeno Stoic.1.24

    ; τὸ ποιοῦν τὸν ἐν [τῇ ὕλῃ] λ. τὸν θεόν ibid., cf. 42;

    ὁ τοῦ κόσμου λ. Chrysipp.Stoic.2.264

    ; λόγος, = φύσει νόμος, Stoic.2.169;

    κατὰ τὸν κοινὸν θεοῖς καὶ ἀνθρώποις λ. M.Ant.7.53

    ;

    ὁ ὀρθὸς λ. διὰ πάντων ἐρχόμενος Chrysipp.Stoic.3.4

    : so in Plot.,

    τὴν φύσιν εἶναι λόγον, ὃς ποιεῖ λ. ἄλλον γέννημα αὑτοῦ 3.8.2

    .
    b σπερματικὸς λ. generative principle in organisms,

    ὁ θεὸς σπ. λ. τοῦ κόσμου Zeno Stoic.1.28

    : usu. in pl., Stoic. 2.205,314,al.;

    γίνεται τὰ ἐν τῷ παντὶ οὐ κατὰ σπερματικούς, ἀλλὰ κατὰ λ. περιληπτικούς Plot.3.1.7

    , cf.4.4.39: so without

    σπερματικός, ὥσπερ τινὲς λ. τῶν μερῶν Cleanth.Stoic.1.111

    ;

    οἱ λ. τῶν ὅλων Ph.1.9

    .
    c in Neo-Platonic Philos., of regulative and formative forces, derived from the intelligible and operative in the sensible universe,

    ὄντων μειζόνων λ. καὶ θεωρούντων αὑτοὺς ἐγὼ γεγέννημαι Plot.3.8.4

    ;

    οἱ ἐν σπέρματι λ. πλάττουσι.. τὰ ζῷα οἷον μικρούς τινας κόσμους Id.4.3.10

    , cf.3.2.16,3.5.7; opp. ὅρος, Id.6.7.4;

    ἀφανεῖς λ. τῆς φύσεως Procl.

    in R.1.18 K.; τεχνικοὶ λ. ib.142 K., al.
    IV inward debate of the soul (cf.

    λ. ὃν αὐτὴ πρὸς αὑτὴν ἡ ψυχὴ διεξέρχεται Pl.Tht. 189e

     ( διάλογος in Sph. 263e); ὁ ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ, ὁ ἔσω λ. (opp. ὁ ἔξω λ.), Arist.APo. 76b25, 27; ὁ ἐνδιάθετος, opp. ὁ προφορικὸς λ., Stoic.2.43, Ph.2.154),
    1 thinking, reasoning, τοῦ λ. ἐόντος ξυνοῦ, opp. ἰδία φρόνησις, Heraclit. 2; κρῖναι δὲ λόγῳ.. ἔλεγχον test by reflection, Parm.1.36; reflection, deliberation (cf. VI.3),

    ἐδίδου λόγον ἑωυτῷ περὶ τῆς ὄψιος Hdt.1.209

    , cf. 34, S.OT 583, D.45.7; μὴ εἰδέναι.. μήτε λόγῳ μήτε ἔργῳ neither by reasoning nor by experience, Anaxag.7;

    ἃ δὴ λόγῳ μὲν καὶ διανοίᾳ ληπτά, ὄψει δ' οὔ Pl.R. 529d

    , cf. Prm. 135e;

    ὁ λ. ἢ ἡ αἴσθησις Arist.EN 1149a35

    ,al.; αὐτῷ μόνον τῷ λ. πιστεύειν (opp. αἰσθήσεις), of Parmenides and his school, Aristocl. ap. Eus.PE14.17: hence λόγῳ or τῷ λ. in idea, in thought,

    τῷ λ. τέμνειν Pl.R. 525e

    ; τῷ λ. δύο ἐστίν, ἀχώριστα πεφυκότα two in idea, though indistinguishable in fact, Arist. EN 1102a30, cf. GC 320b14, al.; λόγῳ θεωρητά mentally conceived, opp. sensibly perceived, Placit.1.3.5, cf. Demetr.Lac.Herc.1055.20;

    τοὺς λ. θεωρητοὺς χρόνους Epicur.Ep.1p.19U.

    ; διὰ λόγου θ. χ. ib.p.10 U.;

    λόγῳ καταληπτός Phld.Po.5.20

    , etc.; ὁ λ. οὕτω αἱρέει analogy proves, Hdt.2.33; ὁ λ. or λ. αἱρέει reasoning convinces, Id.3.45,6.124, cf. Pl.Cri. 48c (but, our argument shows, Lg. 663d): also c. acc. pers., χρᾶται ὅ τι μιν λ. αἱρέει as the whim took him, Hdt.1.132; ἢν μὴ ἡμέας λ. αἱρῇ unless we see fit, Id.4.127, cf. Pl.R. 607b; later ὁ αἱρῶν λ. ordaining reason, Zeno Stoic.1.50, M.Ant.2.5, cf. 4.24, Arr.Epict. 2.2.20, etc.: coupled or contrasted with other functions, καθ' ὕπνον ἐπειδὴ λόγου καὶ φρονήσεως οὐ μετεῖχε since reason and understanding are in abeyance, Pl.Ti. 71d; μετὰ λόγου τε καὶ ἐπιστήμης, opp. αἰτία αὐτομάτη, of Nature's processes of production, Id.Sph. 265c; τὸ μὲν δὴ νοήσει μετὰ λόγου περιληπτόν embraced by thought with reflection, opp. μετ' αἰσθήσεως ἀλόγου, Id.Ti. 28a; τὸ μὲν ἀεὶ μετ' ἀληθοῦς λ., opp. τὸ δὲ ἄλογον, ib. 51e, cf. 70d, al.;

    λ. ἔχων ἑπόμενον τῷ νοεῖν Id.Phlb. 62a

    ; ἐπιστήμη ἐνοῦσα καὶ ὀρθὸς λ. scientific knowledge and right process of thought, Id.Phd. 73a;

    πᾶς λ. καὶ πᾶσα ἐπιστήμη τῶν καθόλου Arist.Metaph. 1059b26

    ;

    τὸ λόγον ἔχον Id.EN 1102b15

    , 1138b9, al.: in sg. and pl., contrasted by Pl. and Arist. as theory, abstract reasoning with outward experience, sts. with depreciatory emphasis on the former,

    εἰς τοὺς λ. καταφυγόντα Pl.Phd. 99e

    ; τὸν ἐν λόγοις σκοπούμενον τὰ ὄντα, opp. τὸν ἐν ἔργοις (realities), ib. 100a;

    τῇ αἰσθήσει μᾶλλον τῶν λ. πιστευτέον Arist.GA 760b31

    ; γνωριμώτερα κατὰ τὸν λ., opp. κατὰ τὴν αἴσθησιν, Id.Ph. 189a4; ἐκ τῶν λ. δῆλον, opp. ἐκ τῆς ἐπαγωγῆς, Id.Mete. 378b20; ἡ τῶν λ. πίστις, opp. ἐκ τῶν ἔργων φανερόν, Id.Pol. 1326a29;

    ἡ πίστις οὐ μόνον ἐπὶ τῆς αἰσθήσεως ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ λ. Id.Ph. 262a19

    ;

    μαρτυρεῖ τὰ γιγνόμενα τοῖς λ. Id.Pol. 1334a6

    ; ὁ μὲν λ. τοῦ καθόλου, ἡ δὲ αἴσθησις τοῦ κατὰ μέρος explanation, opp. perception, Id.Ph. 189a7; ἔσονται τοῖς λ. αἱ πράξεις ἀκόλουθοι theory, opp. practice, Epicur.Sent.25; in Logic, of discursive reasoning, opp. intuition, Arist.EN 1142a26, 1143b1; reasoning in general, ib. 1149a26; πᾶς λ. καὶ πᾶσα ἀπόδειξις all reasoning and demonstration, Id.Metaph. 1063b10;

    λ. καὶ φρόνησιν Phld.Mus.p.105

     K.; ὁ λ. ἢ λογισμός ibid.; τὸ ἰδεῖν οὐκέτι λ., ἀλλὰ μεῖζον λόγου καὶ πρὸ λόγου, of mystical vision, opp. reasoning, Plot.6.9.10.—Phrases, κατὰ λ. τὸν εἰκότα by probable reasoning, Pl.Ti. 30b;

    οὔκουν τόν γ' εἰκότα λ. ἂν ἔχοι Id.Lg. 647d

    ; παρὰ λόγον, opp. κατὰ λ., Arist.Rh.Al. 1429a29, cf. EN 1167b19; cf. παράλογος (but παρὰ λ. unexpectedly, E.Ba. 940).
    2 reason as a faculty, ὁ λ. ἀνθρώπους κυβερνᾷ [Epich.] 256; [

    θυμοειδὲς] τοῦ λ. κατήκοον Pl.Ti. 70a

    ; [

    θυμὸς] ὑπὸ τοῦ λ. ἀνακληθείς Id.R. 440d

    ; σύμμαχον τῷ λ. τὸν θυμόν ib. b;

    πειθαρχεῖ τῷ λ. τὸ τοῦ ἐγκρατοῦς Arist. EN 1102b26

    ; ἄλλο τι παρὰ τὸν λ. πεφυκός, ὃ μάχεται τῷ λ. ib.17;

    ἐναντίωσις λόγου πρὸς ἐπιθυμίας Plot.4.7.13(8)

    ;

    οὐ θυμός, οὐκ ἐπιθυμία, οὐδὲ λ. οὐδέ τις νόησις Id.6.9.11

    : freq. in Stoic. Philos. of human Reason, opp. φαντασία, Zeno Stoic.1.39; opp. φύσις, Stoic.2.206; οὐ σοφία οὐδὲ λ. ἐστὶν ἐν [τοῖς ζῴοις] ibid.;

    τοῖς ἀλόγοις ζῴοις ὡς λ. ἔχων λ. μὴ ἔχουσι χρῶ M.Ant.6.23

    ;

    ὁ λ. κοινὸν πρὸς τοὺς θεούς Arr.Epict. 1.3.3

    ;

    οἷον [εἰκὼν] λ. ὁ ἐν προφορᾷ λόγου τοῦ ἐν ψυχῇ, οὕτω καὶ αὐτὴ λ. νοῦ Plot.5.1.3

    ; τὸ τὸν λ. σχεῖν τὴν οἰκείαν ἀρετήν (sc. εὐδαιμονίαν) Procl.in Ti.3.334 D.; also of the reason which pervades the universe, θεῖος λ. [Epich.] 257;

    τὸν θεῖον λ. καθ' Ἡράκλειτον δι' ἀναπνοῆς σπάσαντες νοεροὶ γινόμεθα S.E.M.7.129

     (cf. infr. x).
    b creative reason,

    ἀδύνατον ἦν λόγον μὴ οὐκ ἐπὶ πάντα ἐλθεῖν Plot.3.2.14

    ;

    ἀρχὴ οὖν λ. καὶ πάντα λ. καὶ τὰ γινόμενα κατ' αὐτόν Id.3.2.15

    ;

    οἱ λ. πάντες ψυχαί Id.3.2.18

    .
    V continuous statement, narrative (whether fact or fiction), oration, etc. (cf. λέγω (B) 11.2),
    1 fable, Hdt.1.141;

    Αἰσώπου λόγοι Pl.Phd. 60d

    , cf. Arist.Rh. 1393b8;

    ὁ τοῦ κυνὸς λ. X.Mem. 2.7.13

    .
    2 legend,

    ἱρὸς λ. Hdt.2.62

    , cf. 47, Pi.P.3.80 (pl.);

    συνθέντες λ. E.Ba. 297

    ;

    λ. θεῖος Pl.Phd. 85d

    ; ἱεροὶ λ., of Orphic rhapsodies, Suid. S.V. Ὀρφεύς.
    3 tale, story,

    ἄλλον ἔπειμι λ. Xenoph. 7.1

    , cf. Th.1.97, etc.;

    συνθέτους λ. A.Pr. 686

    ; σπουδὴν λόγου urgent tidings, E.Ba. 663; ἄλλος λ. 'another story', Pl.Ap. 34e; ὁμολογούμενος ὁ λ. ἐστίν the story is consistent, Isoc.3.27: pl., histories,

    ἐν τοῖσι Ἀσσυρίοισι λ. Hdt.1.184

    , cf. 106, 2.99; so in sg., a historical work, Id.2.123, 6.19,7.152: also in sg., one section of such a work (like later βίβλος), Id.2.38,6.39, cf. VI.3d; so in pl.,

    ἐν τοῖσι Λιβυκοῖσι λ. Id.2.161

    , cf. 1.75,5.22,7.93, 213;

    ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ τῶν λ. Id.5.36

    ; ὁ πρῶτος λ., of St. Luke's gospel, Act.Ap.1.1: in Pl., opp. μῦθος, as history to legend, Ti. 26e;

    ποιεῖν μύθους ἀλλ' οὐ λόγους Phd. 61b

    , cf. Grg. 523a (but μῦθον λέγειν, opp. λόγῳ ( argument)

    διεξελθεῖν Prt. 320c

    , cf. 324d);

    περὶ λόγων καὶ μύθων Arist.Pol. 1336a30

    ;

    ὁ λ... μῦθός ἐστι Ael.NA4.34

    .
    4 speech, delivered in court, assembly, etc.,

    χρήσομαι τῇ τοῦ λ. τάξει ταύτῃ Aeschin.3.57

    , cf. Arist.Rh. 1358a38;

    δικανικοὶ λ. Id.EN 1181a4

    ;

    τρία γένη τῶν λ. τῶν ῥητορικῶν, συμβουλευτικόν, δικανικόν, ἐπιδεικτικόν Id.Rh. 1358b7

    ;

    τῷ γράψαντι τὸν λ. Thphr. Char.17.8

    , cf.

    λογογράφος 11

    ; ἐπιτάφιος λ. funeral oration, Pl.Mx. 236b; esp. of the body of a speech, opp. ἐπίλογος, Arist.Rh. 1420b3; opp. προοίμιον, ib. 1415a12; body of a law, opp. proem, Pl.Lg. 723b; spoken, opp. written word,

    τὸν τοῦ εἰδότος λ. ζῶντα καὶ ἔμψυχον οὗ ὁ γεγραμμένος εἴδωλόν τι Id.Phdr. 276a

    ; ὁ ἐκ τοῦ βιβλίου ῥηθεὶς [λ.] speech read from a roll, ib. 243c; published speech, D.C.40.54; rarely of the speeches in Tragedy ([etym.] ῥήσεις), Arist.Po. 1450b6,9.
    VI verbal expression or utterance (cf. λέγω (B) 111), rarely a single word, v. infr. b, never in Gramm. signf. of vocable ([etym.] ἔπος, λέξις, ὄνομα, ῥῆμα), usu. of a phrase, cf. IX. 3 (the only sense found in [dialect] Ep.).
    a pl., without Art., talk,

    τὸν ἔτερπε λόγοις Il.15.393

    ;

    αἱμύλιοι λ. Od.1.56

    , h.Merc. 317, Hes.Th. 890, Op.78, 789, Thgn.704, A.R.3.1141; ψευδεῖς Λ., personified, Hes.Th. 229;

    ἀφροδίσιοι λ. Semon.7.91

    ;

    ἀγανοῖσι λ. Pi.P. 4.101

    ; ὄψον δὲ λ. φθονεροῖσιν tales, Id.N.8.21; σμικροὶ λ. brief words, S.Aj. 1268 (s.v.l.), El. 415; δόκησις ἀγνὼς λόγων bred of talk, Id.OT 681 (lyr.): also in sg., λέγ' εἴ σοι τῷ λ. τις ἡδονή speak if thou delightest in talking, Id.El. 891.
    b sg., expression, phrase,

    πρὶν εἰπεῖν ἐσθλὸν ἢ κακὸν λ. Id.Ant. 1245

    , cf. E.Hipp. 514;

    μυρίας ὡς εἰπεῖν λόγῳ Hdt.2.37

    ; μακρὸς λ. rigmarole, Simon.189, Arist.Metaph. 1091a8; λ. ἠρέμα λεχθεὶς διέθηκε τὸ πόρρω a whispered message, Plot.4.9.3; ἑνὶ λόγῳ to sum up, in brief phrase, Pl.Phdr. 241e, Phd. 65d; concisely, Arist. EN 1103b21 (but also, = ἁπλῶς, περὶ πάντων ἑνὶ λ. Id.GC 325a1): pl., λ. θελκτήριοι magic words, E.Hipp. 478; rarely of single words,

    λ. εὐσύνθετος οἷον τὸ χρονοτριβεῖν Arist.Rh. 1406a36

    ; οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῇ λ. answered her not a word, Ev.Matt.15.23.
    c coupled or contrasted with words expressed or understood signifying act, fact, truth, etc., mostly in a depreciatory sense,

    λ. ἔργου σκιή Democr. 145

    ;

    ὥσπερ μικρὸν παῖδα λόγοις μ' ἀπατᾷς Thgn.254

    ; λόγῳ, opp. ἔργῳ, Democr.82, etc.;

    νηπίοισι οὐ λ. ἀλλὰ ξυμφορὴ διδάσκαλος Id.76

    ;

    ἔργῳ κοὐ λόγῳ τεκμαίρομαι A.Pr. 338

    , cf. S.El.59, OC 782;

    λόγῳ μὲν λέγουσι.. ἔργῳ δὲ οὐκ ἀποδεικνῦσι Hdt.4.8

    ;

    οὐ λόγων, φασίν, ἡ ἀγορὴ δεῖται, χαλκῶν δέ Herod.7.49

    ;

    οὔτε λ. οὔτε ἔργῳ Lys.9.14

    ; λόγοις, opp. ψήφῳ, Aeschin.2.33; opp. νόῳ, Hdt.2.100;

    οὐ λόγῳ μαθών E.Heracl.5

    ;

    ἐκ λόγων, κούφου πράγματος Pl.Lg. 935a

    ; λόγοισι εἰς τὸ πιθανὸν περιπεπεμμένα ib. 886e, cf. Luc.Anach.19;

    ἵνα μὴ λ. οἴησθε εἶναι, ἀλλ' εἰδῆτε τὴν ἀλήθειαν Lycurg.23

    , cf. D.30.34; opp. πρᾶγμα, Arist.Top. 146a4; opp. βία, Id.EN 1179b29, cf. 1180a5; opp. ὄντα, Pl.Phd. 100a; opp. γνῶσις, 2 Ep.Cor.11.6; λόγῳ in pretence, Hdt.1.205, Pl.R. 361b, 376d, Ti. 27a, al.; λόγου ἕνεκα merely as a matter of words,

    ἄλλως ἕνεκα λ. ἐλέγετο Id.Cri. 46d

    ; λόγου χάριν, opp. ὡς ἀληθῶς, Arist.Pol. 1280b8; but also, let us say, for instance, Id.EN 1144a33, Plb.10.46.4, Phld. Sign.29, M.Ant.4.32; λόγου ἕνεκα let us suppose, Pl.Tht. 191c; ἕως λόγου, μέχρι λ., = Lat. verbo tenus, Plb.10.24.7, Epict.Ench.16: sts. without depreciatory force, the antithesis or parallelism being verbal (cf. 'word and deed'),

    λόγῳ τε καὶ σθένει S.OC68

    ;

    ἔν τε ἔργῳ καὶ λ. Pl.R. 382e

    , cf. D.S.13.101, Ev.Luc.24.19, Act.Ap.7.22, Paus.2.16.2; ὅσα μὲν λόγῳ εἶπον, opp. τὰ ἔργα τῶν πραχθέντων, Th. 1.22.
    2 common talk, report, tradition,

    ὡς λ. ἐν θνητοῖσιν ἔην Batr. 8

    ;

    λ. ἐκ πατέρων Alc.71

    ;

    οὐκ ἔστ' ἔτυμος λ. οὗτος Stesich.32

    ;

    διξὸς λέγεται λ. Hdt.3.32

    ;

    λ. ὑπ' Αἰγυπτίων λεγόμενος Id.2.47

    ; νέον [λ.] tidings, S.Ant. 1289 (lyr.); τὰ μὲν αὐτοὶ ὡρῶμεν, τὰ δὲ λόγοισι ἐπυνθανόμεθα by hearsay, Hdt.2.148: also in pl., ἐν γράμμασιν λόγοι κείμενοι traditions, Pl.Lg. 886b.
    b rumour,

    ἐπὶ παντὶ λ. ἐπτοῆσθαι Heraclit. 87

    ; αὐδάεις λ. voice of rumour, B.14.44; περὶ θεῶν διῆλθεν ὁ λ. ὅτι .. Th.6.46; λ. παρεῖχεν ὡς .. Plb.3.89.3; ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λ. οὗτος εῖς τινας ὅτι .. Ev.Jo.21.23, cf. Act.Ap.11.22; fiction, Ev.Matt.28.15.
    c mention, notice, description, οὐκ ὕει λόγου ἄξιον οὐδέν worth mentioning, Hdt.4.28, cf. Plb.1.24.8, etc.; ἔργα λόγου μέζω beyond expression, Hdt.2.35; κρεῖσσον λόγου τὸ εἶδος τῆς νόσου beyond description, Th. 2.50;

    μείζω ἔργα ἢ ὡς τῷ λ. τις ἂν εἴποι D.6.11

    .
    d the talk one occasions, repute, mostly in good sense, good report, praise, honour (cf. supr. 1.4),

    πολλὰ φέρειν εἴωθε λ... πταίσματα Thgn.1221

    ;

    λ. ἐσλὸν ἀκοῦσαι Pi.I.5(4).13

    ;

    πλέονα.. λ. Ὀδυσσέος ἢ πάθαν Id.N.7.21

    ;

    ἵνα λ. σε ἔχῃ πρὸς ἀνθρώπων ἀγαθός Hdt.7.5

    , cf. 9.78; Τροίαν.. ἧς ἁπανταχοῦ λ. whose fame, story fills the world, E.IT 517;

    οὐκ ἂν ἦν λ. σέθεν Id.Med. 541

    : less freq. in bad sense, evil report, λ. κακόθρους, κακός, S. Aj. 138 (anap.), E.Heracl. 165: pl., λόγους ψιθύρους πλάσσων slanders, S.Aj. 148 (anap.).
    e λ. ἐστί, ἔχει, κατέχει, the story goes, c. acc. et inf.,

    ἔστ τις λ. τὰν Ἀρετὰν ναίειν Simon.58.1

    , cf. S.El. 417; λ. μὲν ἔστ' ἀρχαῖος ὡς .. Id.Tr.1; λ. alone, E.Heracl.35;

    ὡς λ. A.Supp. 230

    , Pl. Phlb. 65c, etc.;

    λ. ἐστί Hdt.7.129

    ,9.26, al.;

    λ. αἰὲν ἔχει S.OC 1573

     (lyr.); ὅσον ὁ λ. κατέχει tradition prevails, Th.1.10: also with a personal subject in the reverse construction. Κλεισθένης λ. ἔχει τὴν Πυθίην ἀναπεῖσαι has the credit of.., Hdt.5.66, cf. Pl.Epin. 987b, 988b;

    λ. ἔχοντα σοφίας Ep.Col.2.23

    , v.supr.1.4.
    3 discussion, debate, deliberation,

    πολλὸς ἦν ἐν τοῖσι λ. Hdt.8.59

    ;

    συνελέχθησαν οἱ Μῆδοι ἐς τὠυτὸ καὶ ἐδίδοσαν σφίσι λόγον, λέγοντες περὶ τῶν κατηκόντων Id.1.97

    ;

    οἱ Πελασγοὶ ἑωυτοῖσι λόγους ἐδίδοσαν Id.6.138

    ;

    πολέμῳ μᾶλλον ἢ λόγοις τὰ ἐγκλήματα διαλύεσθαι Th.1.140

    ;

    οἱ περὶ τῆς εἰρήνης λ. Aeschin.2.74

    ; τοῖς ἔξωθεν λ. πεπλήρωκε τὸν λ. [Plato] has filled his dialogue with extraneous discussions, Arist.Pol. 1264b39;

    τὸ μῆκος τῶν λ. D.Chr.7.131

    ; μεταβαίνων ὁ λ. εἰς ταὐτὸν ἀφῖκται our debate, Arist.EN 1097a24; ὁ παρὼν λ. ib. 1104a11; θεῶν ὧν νῦν ὁ λ. ἐστί discussion, Pl.Ap. 26b, cf. Tht. 184a, M.Ant.8.32; τῷ λ. διελθεῖν, διϊέναι, Pl.Prt. 329c, Grg. 506a, etc.; τὸν λ. διεξελθεῖν conduct the debate, Id.Lg. 893a; ξυνελθεῖν ἐς λόγον confer, Ar.Eq. 1300: freq. in pl., ἐς λόγους συνελθόντες parley, Hdt. 1.82; ἐς λ. ἐλθεῖν τινι have speech with, ib.86;

    ἐς λ. ἀπικέσθαι τινί Id.2.32

    ;

    διὰ λόγων ἰέναι E.Tr. 916

    ;

    ἐμαυτῇ διὰ λ. ἀφικόμην Id.Med. 872

    ;

    ἐς λ. ἄγειν τινά X.HG4.1.2

    ;

    κοινωνεῖν λόγων καὶ διανοίας Arist.EN 1170b12

    .
    b right of discussion or speech, ἢ 'πὶ τῷ πλήθει λ.; S.OC 66; λ. αἰτήσασθαι ask leave to speak, Th.3.53;

    λ. διδόναι X.HG5.2.20

    ; οὐ προυτέθη σφίσιν λ. κατὰ τὸν νόμον ib.1.7.5;

    λόγου τυχεῖν D.18.13

    , cf. Arist.EN 1095b21, Plb.18.52.1;

    οἱ λόγου τοὺς δούλους ἀποστεροῦντες Arist.Pol. 1260b5

    ;

    δοῦλος πέφυκας, οὐ μέτεστί σοι λόγου Trag.Adesp.304

    ;

    διδόντας λ. καὶ δεχομένους ἐν τῷ μέρει Luc.Pisc.8

    : hence, time allowed for a speech,

    ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ λ. And.1.26

    ,al.;

    ἐν τῷ ἑαυτοῦ λ. Pl.Ap. 34a

    ;

    οὐκ ἐλάττω λ. ἀνήλωκε D.18.9

    .
    c dialogue, as a form of philosophical debate,

    ἵνα μὴ μαχώμεθα ἐν τοῖς λ. ἐγώ τε καὶ σύ Pl. Cra. 430d

    ;

    πρὸς ἀλλήλους τοὺς λ. ποιεῖσθαι Id.Prt. 348a

    : hence, dialogue as a form of literature,

    οἱ Σωκρατικοὶ λ. Arist.Po. 1447b11

    , Rh. 1417a20; cf. διάλογος.
    d section, division of a dialogue or treatise (cf. v. 3),

    ὁ πρῶτος λ. Pl.Prm. 127d

    ; ὁ πρόσθεν, ὁ παρελθὼν λ., Id.Phlb. 18e, 19b;

    ἐν τοῖς πρώτοις λ. Arist.PA 682a3

    ; ἐν τοῖς περὶ κινήσεως λ. in the discussion of motion (i. e. Ph.bk.8), Id.GC 318a4;

    ἐν τῷ περὶ ἐπαίνου λ. Phld.Rh.1.219

    ; branch, department, division of a system of philosophy,

    τὴν φρόνησιν ἐκ τριῶν συνεστηκέναι λ., τῶν φυσικῶν καὶ τῶν ἠθικῶν καὶ τῶν λογικῶν Chrysipp.Stoic.2.258

    .
    e in pl., literature, letters, Pl.Ax. 365b, Epin. 975d, D.H.Comp.1,21 (but, also in pl., treatises, Plu.2.16c);

    οἱ ἐπὶ λόγοις εὐδοκιμώτατοι Hdn.6.1.4

    ; Λόγοι, personified, AP9.171 (Pall.).
    VII a particular utterance, saying:
    1 divine utterance, oracle, Pi.P.4.59;

    λ. μαντικοί Pl. Phdr. 275b

    ;

    οὐ γὰρ ἐμὸν ἐρῶ τὸν λ. Pl.Ap. 20e

    ;

    ὁ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ Apoc.1.2

    ,9.
    2 proverb, maxim, saying, Pi.N.9.6, A.Th. 218; ὧδ' ἔχει λ. ib. 225; τόνδ' ἐκαίνισεν λ. ὡς .. Critias 21, cf. Pl.R. 330a, Ev.Jo.4.37;

    ὁ παλαιὸς λ. Pl.Phdr. 240c

    , cf. Smp. 195b, Grg. 499c, Lg. 757a, 1 Ep.Ti.1.15, Plu.2.1082e, Luc.Alex.9, etc.;

    τὸ τοῦ λόγου δὴ τοῦτο Herod.2.45

    , cf. D.Chr.66.24, Luc.JTr.3, Alciphr.3.56, etc.: pl., Arist.EN 1147a21.
    3 assertion, opp. oath, S.OC 651; ψιλῷ λ. bare word, opp. μαρτυρία, D.27.54.
    4 express resolution, κοινῷ λ. by common consent, Hdt.1.141,al.; ἐπὶ λ. τοιῷδε, ἐπ' ᾧ τε .. on the following terms, Id.7.158, cf. 9.26;

    ἐνδέξασθαι τὸν λ. Id.1.60

    , cf. 9.5; λ. ἔχοντες πλεονέκτην a greedy proposal, Id.7.158: freq. in pl., terms, conditions, Id.9.33, etc.
    5 word of command, behest, A.Pr.17,40 (both pl.), Pers. 363;

    ἀνθρώπους πιθανωτέρους ποιεῖν λόγῳ X.Oec.13.9

    ;

    ἐξέβαλε τὰ πνεύματα λόγῳ Ev.Matt.8.16

    ; οἱ δέκα λ. the ten Commandments, LXX Ex.34.28, Ph.1.496.
    VIII thing spoken of, subject-matter (cf. 111.1 b and 2),

    λ. τοῦτον ἐάσομεν Thgn.1055

    ; προπεπυσμένος πάντα λ. the whole matter, Hdt.1.21, cf. 111; τὸν ἐόντα λ. the truth of the matter, ib.95, 116; μετασχεῖν τοῦ λ. to be in the secret, ib. 127;

    μηδενὶ ἄλλῳ τὸν λ. τοῦτον εῐπῃς Id.8.65

    ; τίς ἦν λ.; S.OT 684 ( = πρᾶγμα, 699); περί τινος λ. διελεγόμεθα subject, question, Pl.Prt. 314c; [τὸ προοίμιον] δεῖγμα τοῦ λ. case, Arist.Rh. 1415a12, cf. 111.1b; τέλος δὲ παντὸς τοῦ λ. ψηφίζονται the end of the matter was that.., Aeschin.3.124;

    οὐκ ἔστεξε τὸν λ. Plb.8.12.5

    ;

    οὐκ ἔστι σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λ. τούτῳ Act.Ap.8.21

    ;

    ἱκανὸς αὐτῷ ὁ λ. Pl.Grg. 512c

    ; οὐχ ὑπολείπει [Γοργίαν] ὁ λ. matter for talk, Arist.Rh. 1418a35;

    μηδένα λ. ὑπολιπεῖν Isoc.4.146

    ; πρὸς λόγον to the point, apposite,

    οὐδὲν πρὸς λ. Pl.Phlb. 42e

    , cf. Prt. 344a;

    ἐὰν πρὸς λ. τι ᾖ Id.Phlb. 33c

    ; also

    πρὸς λόγου Id.Grg. 459c

     (s. v.l.).
    2 plot of a narrative or dramatic poem, = μῦθος, Arist.Po. 1455b17, al.
    b in Art, subject of a painting,

    ζωγραφίας λόγοι Philostr.VA 6.10

    ;

    λ. τῆς γραφῆς Id.Im.1.25

    .
    3 thing talked of, event,

    μετὰ τοὺς λ. τούτους LXX 1 Ma.7.33

    , cf. Act.Ap.15.6.
    IX expression, utterance, speech regarded formally, τὸ ἀπὸ [ψυχῆς] ῥεῦμα διὰ τοῦ στόματος ἰὸν μετὰ φθόγγου λ., opp. διάνοια, Pl.Sph. 263e; intelligent utterance, opp. φωνή, Arist.Pol. 1253a14;

    λ. ἐστὶ φωνὴ σημαντικὴ κατὰ συνθήκην Id.Int. 16b26

    , cf. Diog.Bab.Stoic.3.213; ὅθεν (from the heart)

    ὁ λ. ἀναπέμπεται Stoic.2.228

    , cf. 244; Protagoras was nicknamed λόγος, Hsch. ap. Sch.Pl.R. 600c, Suid.;

    λόγου πειθοῖ Democr.181

    : in pl., eloquence, Isoc.3.3,9.11;

    τὴν ἐν λόγοις εὐρυθμίαν Epicur.Sent.Pal.5p.69

     v. d. M.; λ. ἀκριβής precise language, Ar.Nu. 130 (pl.), cf. Arist.Rh. 1418b1;

    τοῦ μὴ ᾀδομένου λ. Pl.R. 398d

    ; ἡδυσμένος λ., of rhythmical language set to music, Arist.Po. 1449b25; ἐν παντὶ λ. in all manner of utterance, 1 Ep.Cor.1.5; ἐν λόγοις in orations, Arist.Po. 1459a13; λ. γελοῖοι, ἀσχήμονες, ludicrous, improper speech, Id.SE 182b15, Pol. 1336b14.
    2 of various modes of expression, esp. artistic and literary,

    ἔν τε ᾠδαῖς καὶ μύθοις καὶ λόγοις Pl.Lg. 664a

    ;

    ἐν λόγῳ καὶ ἐν ᾠδαῖς X.Cyr.1.4.25

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 835b; prose, opp. ποίησις, Id.R. 390a; opp. ψιλομετρία, Arist.Po. 1448a11; opp. ἔμμετρα, ib. 1450b15 (pl.); τῷ λ. τοῦτο τῶν μέτρων (sc. τὸ ἰαμβεῖον)

    ὁμοιότατον εἶναι Id.Rh. 1404a31

    ; in full, ψιλοὶ λ. prose, ib. b33 (but ψιλοὶ λ., = arguments without diagrams, Pl.Tht. 165a); λ. πεζοί, opp. ποιητική, D.H.Comp.6; opp. ποιήματα, ib.15;

    κοινὰ καὶ ποιημάτων καὶ λόγων Phld.Po.5.7

    ; πεζὸς λ. ib.27, al.
    b of the constituents of lyric or dramatic poetry, words,

    τὸ μέλος ἐκ τριῶν.. λόγου τε καὶ ἁρμονίας καὶ ῥυθμοῦ Pl.R. 398d

    ; opp. πρᾶξις, Arist.Po. 1454a18; dramatic dialogue, opp. τὰ τοῦ χοροῦ, ib. 1449a17.
    3 Gramm., phrase, complex term, opp. ὄνομα, Id.SE 165a13; λ. ὀνοματώδης noun- phrase, Id.APo. 93b30, cf. Rh. 1407b27; expression, D.H.Th.2, Demetr.Eloc.92.
    b sentence, complete statement, "

    ἄνθρωπος μανθάνει λόγον εἶναί φῃς.. ἐλάχιστόν τε καὶ πρῶτον Pl.Sph. 262c

    ;

    λ. αὐτοτελής A.D.Synt.3.6

    , D.T.634.1; ῥηθῆναι λόγῳ to be expressed in a sentence, Pl.Tht. 202b; λ. ἔχειν to be capable of being so expressed, ib. 201e, cf. Arist.Rh. 1404b26.
    c language, τὰ τοῦ λ. μέρη parts of speech, Chrysipp.Stoic.2.31, S.E.M.9.350, etc.;

    τὰ μόρια τοῦ λ. D.H.Comp.6

    ;

    μέρος λ. D.T.633.26

    , A.D.Pron.4.6, al. (but ἓν μέρος <τοῦ cod.> λόγου one word, Id.Synt.340.10, cf. 334.22); περὶ τῶν στοιχείων τοῦ λ., title of work by Chrysippus.
    X the Word or Wisdom of God, personified as his agent in creation and world-government,

    ὁ παντοδύναμός σου λ. LXX Wi.18.15

    ;

    ὁ ἐκ νοὸς φωτεινὸς λ. υἱὸς θεοῦ Corp.Herm.1.6

    , cf. Plu.2.376c; λ. θεοῦ δι' οὗ κατεσκευάσθη [ὁ κόσμος] Ph.1.162; τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ σοφίας· ἡ δέ ἐστιν ὁ θεοῦ λ. ib.56; λ. θεῖος.. εἰκὼν θεοῦ ib. 561, cf. 501; τὸν τομέα τῶν συμπάντων [θεοῦ] λ. ib. 492; τὸν ἄγγελον ὅς ἐστι λ. ib. 122: in NT identified with the person of Christ,

    ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λ. Ev.Jo.1.1

    , cf. 14, 1 Ep.Jo.2.7, Apoc.19.13;

    ὁ λ. τῆς ζωῆς 1 Ep.Jo.1.1

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > λόγος

  • 6 εἰμί

    εἰμί (Hom.+) impv. ἴσθι, ἔσο IPol 4:1, ἔστω—also colloq. ἤτω (BGU 276, 24; 419, 13; POxy 533, 9; Ps 103:31; 1 Macc 10:31) 1 Cor 16:22; Js 5:12; 1 Cl 48:5; Hv 3, 3, 4;—3 pers. pl. ἔστωσαν (ins since 200 B.C. Meisterhans3-Schw. 191; PPetr III, 2, 22 [237 B.C.]) Lk 12:35; 1 Ti 3:12; GJs 7:2. Inf. εἶναι. Impf. 1 pers. only mid. ἤμην (Jos., Bell. 1, 389; 631; s. further below); ἦν only Ac 20:18 D, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Jos., Ant. 6, 104) Mt 26:69; Mk 14:67 and ἦς (Lobeck, Phryn. 149 ‘say ἦσθα’; Jos., Ant. 17, 110 al.; Sb 6262, 16 [III A.D.]) Mt 25:21, 23 al., 3 sg. ἦν, 1 pl. ἦμεν. Beside this the mid. form ἤμην (pap since III B.C.; Job 29:16; Tob 12:13 BA), s. above, gives the pl. ἤμεθα (pap since III B.C.; Bar 1:19) Mt 23:30; Ac 27:37; Eph 2:3. Both forms in succession Gal. 4:3. Fut. ἔσομαι, ptc. ἐσόμενος. The mss. vary in choice of act. or mid., but like the edd. lean toward the mid. (W-S. §14, 1; Mlt-H. 201–3; Rob. index; B-D-F §98; Rdm.2 99; 101f; Helbing 108f; Reinhold 86f). Also s. ἔνι.
    ① be, exist, be on hand a pred. use (for other pred. use s. 3a, 4, 5, 6, 7): of God (Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 123 θεοί εἰσιν; Zaleucus in Diod S 12, 20, 2 θεοὺς εἶναι; Wsd 12:13; Just., D. 128, 4 angels) ἔστιν ὁ θεός God exists Hb 11:6; cp. 1 Cor 8:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν the one who is and who was (cp. SibOr 3, 16; as amulet PMich 155, 3 [II A.D.] ὁ ὢν θεὸς ὁ Ἰάω κύριος παντοκράτωρ=the god … who exists.) Rv 11:17; 16:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, in this and the two preceding passages ἦν is treated as a ptc. (for the unusual use of ἦν cp. Simonides 74 D.: ἦν ἑκατὸν φιάλαι) 1:4; 4:8 (cp. Ex 3:14; Wsd 13:1; Paus. 10, 12, 10 Ζεὺς ἦν, Ζ. ἔστι, Ζ. ἔσσεται; cp. Theosophien 18. S. OWeinreich, ARW 19, 1919, 178f). οὐδʼ εἶναι θεὸν παντοκράτορα AcPlCor 1:11. ἐγώ εἰμι (ins in the Athena-Isis temple of Saïs in Plut., Is. et Os. 9, 354c: ἐγώ εἰμι πᾶν τὸ γεγονὸς κ. ὸ̓ν κ. ἐσόμενον. On the role of Isis in Gk. rel. s. IBergman, Ich bin Isis ’68; RMerkelbach, Isis Regina—Zeus Sarapis ’95; for further lit. s. MGustafson in: Prayer fr. Alexander to Constantine, ed. MKiley et al. ’97, 158.) Rv 1:8 (s. ἐγώ beg.). ὁ ὤν, … θεός Ro 9:5 is classed here and taken to mean Christ by JWordsworth ad loc. and HWarner, JTS 48, ’47, 203f. Of the λόγος: ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λ. J 1:1 (for ἦν cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 4; 3, 1b ἦν σκότος, Fgm. IX 1 p. 422, 23 Sc. γέγονεν ἡ ὕλη καὶ ἦν).—Of Christ πρὶν Ἀβραὰμ γενέσθαι, ἐγὼ εἰμί before Abraham was born, I am 8:58 (on the pres. εἰμί cp. Parmenides 8, 5: of the Eternal we cannot say ἦν οὐδʼ ἔσται, only ἔστιν; Ammonius Hermiae [Comm. in Aristotl. IV 5 ed. ABusse 1897] 6 p. 172: in Timaeus we read that we must not say of the gods τὸ ἦν ἢ τὸ ἔσται μεταβολῆς τινος ὄντα σημαντικά, μόνον δὲ τὸ ἔστι=‘was’ or ‘will be’, suggesting change, but only ‘is’; Ps 89:2; DBall, ‘I Am’ in John’s Gospel [JSNT Suppl. 124] ’96).—Of the world πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον εἶναι before the world existed 17:5. Satirically, of the beast, who parodies the Lamb, ἦν καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν Rv 17:8. Of God’s temple: ἔστιν B 16:6f it exists. τὸ μὴ ὄν that which does not exist, the unreal (Sallust. 17 p. 32, 7 and 9; Philo, Aet. M. 5; 82) Hm 1:1. τὰ ὄντα that which exists contrasted w. τὰ μὴ ὄντα Ro 4:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:28; 2 Cl 1:8. Of God κτίσας ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος τὰ ὄντα what is out of what is not Hv 1, 1, 6 (on the contrast τὰ ὄντα and τὰ μὴ ὄντα cp. Ps.-Arist. on Xenophanes: Fgm. 21, 28; Artem. 1, 51 p. 49, 19 τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα; Ocellus Luc. 12; Sallust. 17, 5 p. 30, 28–32, 12; Philo, Op. M. 81; PGM 4, 3077f ποιήσαντα τὰ πάντα ἐξ ὧν οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι; 13, 272f τὸν ἐκ μὴ ὄντων εἶναι ποιήσαντα καὶ ἐξ ὄντων μὴ εἶναι; Theoph. Ant. 1, 4 [p. 64, 21] τὰ πάντα ὁ θεὸς ἐποίησεν ἐξ οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι).—Of existing in the sense be present, available, provided πολλοῦ ὄχλου ὄντος since a large crowd was present Mk 8:1. ὄντων τῶν προσφερόντων those are provided who offer Hb 8:4. οὔπω ἦν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39. ἀκούσας ὄντα σιτία when he heard that grain was available Ac 7:12.—Freq. used to introduce parables and stories (once) there was: ἄνθρωπός τις ἦν πλούσιος there was (once) a rich man Lk 16:1, 19. ἦν ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τ. Φαρισαίων there was a man among the Pharisees J 3:1.—There is, there are ὥσπερ εἰσὶν θεοὶ πολλοί as there are many gods 1 Cor 8:5. διαιρέσεις χαρισμάτων εἰσίν there are various kinds of spiritual gifts 12:4ff; 1J 5:16 al. Neg. οὐκ ἔστι there is (are) not, no (Ps 52:2; Simplicius in Epict. p. 95, 42 as a quot. from ‘tragedy’ οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί) δίκαιος there is no righteous man Ro 3:10 (Eccl 7:20). ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν there is no resurr. of the dead 1 Cor 15:12; οὐδʼ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν AcPlCor 1:12; 2:24; cp. Mt 22:23; Ac 23:8 (cp. 2 Macc 7:14). εἰσὶν οἵ, or οἵτινες there are people who (Hom. et al.; LXX; Just., D. 47, 2 εἰ μήτι εἰσὶν οἱ λέγοντες ὅτι etc.—W. sing. and pl. combined: Arrian, Ind. 24, 9 ἔστι δὲ οἳ διέφυγον=but there are some who escaped) Mt 16:28; 19:12; Mk 9:1; Lk 9:27; J 6:64; Ac 11:20. Neg. οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅς there is no one who Mk 9:39; 10:29; Lk 1:61; 18:29. As a question τίς ἐστιν ὅς; who is there that? Mt 12:11—In an unusual (perh. bureaucratic terminology) participial construction Ac 13:1 ἡ οὖσα ἐκκλησία the congregation there (cp. Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 6, 394c οἱ ὄντες ἄνθρωποι=the people with whom he has to deal; PLond III 1168, 5 p. 136 [18 A.D.] ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις=on the adjoining areas there; PGen 49; PSI 229, 11 τοῦ ὄντος μηνός of the current month); cp. 14:13.—αἱ οὖσαι (sc. ἐξουσίαι) those that exist Ro 13:1 (cp. UPZ 180a I, 4 [113 B.C.] ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν).
    ② to be in close connection (with), is, freq. in statements of identity or equation, as a copula, the equative function, uniting subject and predicate. On absence of the copula, Mlt-Turner 294–310.
    ⓐ gener. πραΰς εἰμι I am gentle Mt 11:29. ἐγώ εἰμι Γαβριήλ Lk 1:19. σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mk 3:11; J 1:49 and very oft. ἵνα … ὁ πονηρὸς … ἐλεγχθῇ [το? s. app. in Bodm.] μὴ ὢν θεός AcPlCor 2:15 (Just., D. 3, 3 φιλολόγος οὖν τις εἶ σύ).—The pred. can be supplied fr. the context: καὶ ἐσμέν and we are (really God’s children) 1J 3:1 (Eur., Ion 309 τ. θεοῦ καλοῦμαι δοῦλος εἰμί τε. Dio Chrys. 14 [31], 58 θεοφιλεῖς οἱ χρηστοὶ λέγονται καὶ εἰσίν; Epict. 2, 16, 44 Ἡρακλῆς ἐπιστεύθη Διὸς υἱὸς εἶναι καὶ ἦν.—The ptc. ὤν, οὖσα, ὄν used w. a noun or adj.and serving as an if-, since-, or although-clause sim. functions as a copula πονηροὶ ὄντες Mt 7:11; 12:34.—Lk 20:36; J 3:4; 4:9; Ac 16:21; Ro 5:10; 1 Cor 8:7; Gal 2:3 al.).—W. adv. of quality: οὕτως εἶναι be so preceded by ὥσπερ, καθώς or followed by ὡς, ὥσπερ Mt 13:40; 24:27, 37, 39; Mk 4:26; Lk 17:26. W. dat. of pers. οὕτως ἔσται ὁ υἱὸς τ. ἀ. τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ so the Human One (Son of Man) will be for this generation 11:30. εἰμὶ ὡσ/ὥσπερ I am like Mt 6:5; Lk 18:11. W. dat. ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ τελώνης he shall be to you as a tax-collector Mt 18:17. εἰμὶ ὥς τις I am like someone of outward and inward similarity 28:3; Lk 6:40; 11:44; 22:27 al. καθώς εἰμι as I am Ac 22:3; 1J 3:2, 7; 4:17.—W. demonstr. pron. (Just., A I, 16, 1 ἃ ἔφη, ταῦτά ἐστι: foll. by a quotation; sim. 48, 5 ἔστι δὲ ταῦτα; and oft.) τὰ ὀνόματά ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ μαρτυρία J 1:19. W. inf. foll. θρησκεία αὕτη ἐστίν, ἐπισκέπτεσθαι Js 1:27. W. ὅτι foll. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ κρίσις, ὅτι τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν J 3:19; cp. 21:24; 1J 1:5; 3:11; 5:11. W. ἵνα foll. τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον, ἵνα πιστεύητε J 6:29; cp. vs. 39f; 15:12; 17:3; 1J 3:11, 23; 5:3. W. τηλικοῦτος: τὰ πλοῖα, τηλικαῦτα ὄντα though they are so large Js 3:4. W. τοσοῦτος: τοσοῦτων ὄντων although there were so many J 21:11. W. τοιοῦτος: τοιοῦτος ὤν Phlm 9 (cp. Just., A I, 18, 4 ὅσα ἄλλα τοιαῦτά ἐστι).—W. interrog. pron. ὑμεῖς τίνα με λέγετε εἶναι; who do you say I am? Mt 16:15; cp. 21:10; Mk 1:24; 4:41; 8:27, 29; Lk 4:34 al.; σὺ τίς εἶ; J 1:19; 8:25; 21:12 al. (cp. JosAs 14:6 τίς εἶ συ tell me ‘who you are’). σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ κρίνων; (Pla., Gorg. 452b; Strabo 6, 2, 4 σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ τὸν Ὅμηρον ψέγων ὡς μυθογράφον;) Ro 14:4; ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην; (cp. Ex 3:11) Ac 11:17; τίς εἰμι ἐγὼ ὅτι who am I, that GJs 12:2 (Ex 3:11). W. πόσος: πόσος χρόνος ἐστίν; how long a time? Mk 9:21. W. ποταπός of what sort Lk 1:29.—W. relative pron. οἷος 2 Cor 10:11; ὁποῖος Ac 26:29; 1 Cor 3:13; Gal 2:6; ὅς Rv 1:19; ὅστις Gal 5:10, 19.—W. numerals ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 6:44 (cp. Polyaenus 7, 25 ἦσαν οἱ πεσόντες ἀνδρῶν μυριάδες δέκα); cp. Ac 19:7; 23:13. Λάζαρος εἷς ἦν ἐκ τῶν ἀνακειμένων L. was one of those at the table J 12:2; cp. Gal 3:20; Js 2:19. τῶν πιστευσάντων ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία Ac 4:32. εἷς εἶναι be one and the same Gal 3:28. ἓν εἶναι be one J 10:30; 17:11, 21ff; 1 Cor 3:8.—οὐδʼ εἶναι τὴν πλάσιν τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων τοῦ θεοῦ (that) the creation of humankind is not God’s doing AcPlCor 1:13.—To establish identity the formula ἐγώ εἰμι is oft. used in the gospels (corresp. to Hebr. אֲנִי הוּא Dt 32:39; Is 43:10), in such a way that the predicate must be understood fr. the context: Mt 14:27; Mk 6:50; 13:6; 14:62; Lk 22:70; J 4:26; 6:20; 8:24, 28; 13:19; 18:5f and oft.; s. on ἐγώ.—In a question μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι; surely it is not I? Mt 26:22, 25.
    ⓑ to describe a special connection betw. the subject and a predicate noun ἡμεῖς ναὸς θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος we are a temple of the living God 2 Cor 6:16. ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are our letter (of recommendation) 3:2. σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are the seal of my apostleship 1 Cor 9:2 and oft.
    ⓒ in explanations:
    α. to show how someth. is to be understood is a representation of, is the equivalent of; εἰμί here, too, serves as copula; we usually translate mean, so in the formula τοῦτʼ ἔστιν this or that means, that is to say (Epict., Ench. 33, 10; Arrian, Tact. 29, 3; SIG 880, 50; PFlor 157, 4; PSI 298, 9; PMert 91, 9; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 16; ApcMos 19; Just., D. 56, 23; 78, 3 al.) Mk 7:2; Ac 19:4; Ro 7:18; 9:8; 10:6, 8; Phlm 12; Hb 7:5 al.; in the sense that is (when translated) (Polyaenus 8, 14, 1 Μάξιμος ἀνηγορεύθη• τοῦτο δʼ ἄν εἴη Μέγιστον) Mt 27:46; Ac 1:19. So also w. relative pron.: ὅ ἐστιν Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; Hb 7:2. After verbs of asking, recognizing, knowing and not knowing (Antiphanes Com. 231, 1f τὸ ζῆν τί ἐστι;) μάθετε τί ἐστιν learn what (this) means Mt 9:13. εἰ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν 12:7; cp. Mk 1:27; 9:10; Lk 20:17; J 16:17f; Eph 4:9. W. an indir. question (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Ἀγύλλα: τὶς ἠρώτα τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὄνομα) τί ἂν εἴη ταῦτα Lk 15:26; τί εἴη τοῦτο 18:36. τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι what this means Ac 17:20; cp. 2:12, where the question is not about the mng. of terms but the significance of what is happening.—Esp. in interpr. of the parables (Artem. 1, 51 p. 48, 26 ἄρουρα οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ γυνή=field means nothing else than woman) ὁ ἀγρός ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος the field means the world Mt 13:38; cp. vss. 19f, 22f; Mk 4:15f, 18, 20; Lk 8:11ff (cp. Gen 41:26f; Ezk 37:11; Ath. 22, 4 [Stoic interpr. of myths]). On τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου Mt 26:26; Mk 14:22; Lk 22:19 and its various interpretations, see lit. s.v. εὐχαριστία. Cp. Hipponax (VI B.C.) 45 Diehl αὕτη γάρ ἐστι συμφορή=this means misfortune.
    β. to be of relative significance, be of moment or importance, amount to someth. w. indef. pron. εἰδωλόθυτόν τί ἐστιν meat offered to idols means anything 1 Cor 10:19. Esp. εἰμί τι I mean someth. of pers. 1 Cor 3:7; Gal 2:6; 6:3; and of things vs. 15. εἰμί τις Ac 5:36.—Of no account ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν (telescoped fr. ἐλάχ. ἐστιν and εἰς ἐλάχ. γίνεται, of which there are many exx. in Schmid, I 398; II 161, 237; III 281; IV 455) it is of little or no importance to me 1 Cor 4:3.
    ③ be in reference to location, persons, condition, or time, be
    ⓐ of various relations or positions involving a place or thing: w. ἀπό: εἶναι ἀπό τινος be or come from a certain place (X., An. 2, 4, 13) J 1:44.—W. ἐν: ἐν τοῖς τ. πατρός μου in my father’s house Lk 2:49 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302 καταγωγὴ ἐν τοῖς Ἀντιπάτρου). ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mk 10:32. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ Mt 24:26. ἐν ἀγρῷ Lk 15:25. ἐν δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ at God’s right hand Ro 8:34; in heaven Eph 6:9.—W. εἰς: τὴν κοίτην Lk 11:7; τὸν κόλπον J1:18.—W. ἐπὶ w. gen. be on someth. of place, roof Lk 17:31; head J 20:7 (cp. 1 Macc 1:59); also fig., of one who is over someone (1 Macc 10:69; Jdth 14:13 ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων τῶν αὐτοῦ) Ro 9:5 (of the angel of death Mel., P. 20, 142 ἐπὶ τῶν πρωτοτόκων); also ἐπάνω τινός J 3:31.—W. dat. be at someth. the door Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29.—W. acc. be on someone: grace Lk 2:40; Ac 4:33; spirit (Is 61:1) Lk 2:25; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό be in the same place, together (Gen 29:2 v.l.) Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44; 1 Cor 7:5.—W. κατά w. acc. εἶναι κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν be in Judea Ac 11:1; εἶναι ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν were at Antioch in the congregation there 13:1.—W. ὑπό w. acc. τι or τινα of place be under someth. J 1:48; 1 Cor 10:1.—W. παρά w. acc. παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν by the sea- (i.e. lake-) shore Mk 5:21; Ac 10:6.—W. πρός τι be close to, facing someth. Mk 4:1.—W. adv. of place ἐγγύς τινι near someth. Ac 9:38; 27:8. μακρὰν (ἀπό) Mk 12:34; J 21:8; Eph 2:13; also πόρρω Lk 14:32. χωρίς τινος without someth. Hb 12:8. ἐνθάδε Ac 16:28. ἔσω J 20:26. ἀπέναντί τινος Ro 3:18 (Ps 35:2). ἐκτός τινος 1 Cor 6:18; ἀντίπερά τινος Lk 8:26; ὁμοῦ J 21:2; οὗ Mt 2:9; ὅπου Mk 2:4; 5:40. ὧδε Mt 17:4; Mk 9:5; Lk 9:33. Also w. fut. mng. (ESchwartz, GGN 1908, 161 n.; on the fut. use of the pres. cp. POxy 531, 22 [II A.D.] ἔστι δὲ τοῦ Τῦβι μηνὸς σοὶ ὸ̔ θέλεις) ὅπου εἰμί J 7:34, 36; 12:26; 14:3; 17:24. As pred., to denote a relatively long stay at a place, stay, reside ἴσθι ἐκεῖ stay there Mt 2:13, cp. vs. 15; ἐπʼ ἐρήμοις τόποις in lonely places Mk 1:45; ἦν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν he stayed by the lakeside 5:21.
    ⓑ involving humans or transcendent beings: w. adv. ἔμπροσθέν τινος Lk 14:2. ἔναντί τινος Ac 8:21; ἐνώπιόν τινος Lk 14:10; Ac 4:19; 1 Pt 3:4; Rv 7:15; ἐντός τινος Lk 17:21; ἐγγύς τινος J 11:18; 19:20; Ro 10:8 (Dt 30:14).—W. prep. ἐν τινί equiv. to ἔκ τινος εἶναι be among Mt 27:56; cp. Mk 15:40; Ro 1:6. Of God, who is among his people 1 Cor 14:25 (Is 45:14; Jer 14:9); of the Spirit J 14:17. Of persons under Christ’s direction: ἐν θεῷ 1J 2:5; 5:20 (s. Norden, Agn. Th. 23, 1). ἔν τινι rest upon, arise from someth. (Aristot., Pol. 7, 1, 3 [1323b, 1] ἐν ἀρετῇ; Sir 9:16) Ac 4:12; 1 Cor 2:5; Eph 5:18.—εἴς τινα be directed, inclined toward Ac 23:30; 2 Cor 7:15; 1 Pt 1:21.—κατά w. gen. be against someone (Sir 6:12) Mt 12:30; Mk 9:40 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. ὑπέρ); Gal 5:23.—σύν τινι be with someone (Jos., Ant. 7, 181) Lk 22:56; 24:44; Ac 13:7; accompany, associate w. someone Lk 8:38; Ac 4:13; 22:9; take sides with someone (X., Cyr. 5, 4, 37; 7, 5, 77; Jos., Ant. 11, 259 [of God]) Ac 14:4.—πρός τινα be with someone Mt 13:56; Mk 6:3; J 1:1f. I am to be compared w. IMg 12.—μετά and gen. be with someone (Judg 14:11) Mt 17:17; Mk 3:14; 5:18; J 3:26; 12:17; ἔστω μεθʼ ὑμῶν εἰρήνη AcPlCor 2:40; of God, who is with someone (Gen 21:20; Judg 6:13 al.; Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 4; Jos., Ant. 6, 181; 15, 138) Lk 1:66; J 3:2; 8:29; Ac 10:38 al.; also be with in the sense be favorable to, in league with (Ex 23:2) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23; of punishment attending a pers. τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ AcPlCor 2:37.—παρά and gen. come from someone (X., An. 2, 4, 15; Just., D. 8, 4 ἔλεος παρὰ θεοῦ) fr. God J 6:46; 7:29; w. dat. be with, among persons Mt 22:25; Ac 10:6. W. neg. be strange to someone, there is no … in someone Ro 2:11; 9:14; Eph 6:9.—ὑπέρ w. gen. be on one’s side Mk 9:4 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. κατά); w. acc. be superior to (Sir 25:10; 30:16) Lk 6:40.
    ⓒ of condition or circumstance: κατά w. acc. live in accordance with (Sir 28:10; 43:8; 2 Macc 9:20) κατὰ σάκρα, πνεῦμα Ro 8:5. οὐκ ἔστιν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον not human (in origin) Gal 1:11.—Fig. ὑπό w. acc. be under (the power of) someth. Ro 3:9; 6:14f; Gal 3:10, 25.—W. ἐν of existing ἐν τῷ θεῷ εἶναι of humankind: have its basis of existence in God Ac 17:28. Of states of being: ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:8; ἐν εἰρήνῃ Lk 11:21; ἐν ἔχθρᾳ at enmity 23:12; ἐν κρίματι under condemnation vs. 40. ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος suffer from hemorrhages Mk 5:25; Lk 8:43 (cp. Soph., Aj. 271 ἦν ἐν τῇ νόσῳ; cp. TestJob 35:1 ἐν πληγαῖς πολλαῖς). Periphrastically for an adj. ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ authoritative Lk 4:32. ἐν βάρει important 1 Th 2:7. ἐν τῇ πίστει true believers, believing 2 Cor 13:5. Be involved in someth. ἐν ἑορτῇ be at the festival=take part in it J 2:23. ἐν τούτοις ἴσθι devote yourself to these things 1 Ti 4:15 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 8, 7 ἐν τοιούτοις ὄντες=occupied w. such things; Jos., Ant. 2, 346 ἐν ὕμνοις ἦσαν=they occupied themselves w. the singing of hymns).—Fig., live in the light 1J 2:9; cp. vs. 11; 1 Th 5:4; in the flesh Ro 7:5; 8:8; AcPlCor 1:6. ἐν οἷς εἰμι in the situation in which I find myself Phil 4:11 (X., Hell. 4, 2, 1; Diod S 12, 63, 5; 12, 66, 4; Appian, Hann. 55 §228 ἐν τούτοις ἦν=he was in this situation; Jos., Ant. 7, 232 ἐν τούτοις ἦσαν=found themselves in this sit.; TestJob 35:6 ἐν τίνι ἐστίν; s. ZPE VIII 170). ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. Of characteristics, emotions, etc. ἔν τινί ἐστιν, e.g. ἀδικία J 7:18; ἄγνοια Eph 4:18; ἀλήθεια J 8:44; 2 Cor 11:10 (cp. 1 Macc 7:18); ἁμαρτία 1J 3:5.
    ⓓ of time ἐγγύς of καιρός be near Mt 26:18; Mk 13:28. πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστίν it is toward evening Lk 24:29 (Just., D. 137, 4 πρὸς δυσμὰς … ὁ ἥλιός ἐστι).
    ④ to be alive in a period of time, live, denoting temporal existence (Hom., Trag., Thu. et al.; Sir 42:21; En 102:5 Philo, De Jos. 17; Jos., Ant. 7, 254) εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers Mt 23:30. ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν because they were no more 2:18 (Jer 38:15). ἦσαν ἐπὶ χρόνον ἱκανόν (those who were healed and raised by Christ) remained alive for quite some time Qua.
    ⑤ to be the time at which someth. takes place w. indications of specific moments or occasions, be (X., Hell. 4, 5, 1, An. 4, 3, 8; Sus 13 Theod.; 1 Macc 6:49; 2 Macc 8:26; Jos., Ant. 6, 235 νουμηνία δʼ ἦν; 11, 251): ἦν ὥρα ἕκτη it was the sixth hour (=noon acc. to Jewish reckoning) Lk 23:44; J 4:6; 19:14.—Mk 15:25; J 1:39. ἦν ἑσπέρα ἤδη it was already evening Ac 4:3. πρωί̈ J 18:28. ἦν παρασκευή Mk 15:42. ἦν ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων J 5:1. σάββατόν ἐστιν vs. 10 et al. Short clauses (as Polyaenus 4, 9, 2 νὺξ ἦν; 7, 44, 2 πόλεμος ἦν; exc. 36, 8 ἦν ἀρίστου ὥρα; Jos., Ant. 19, 248 ἔτι δὲ νὺξ ἦν) χειμὼν ἦν J 10:22; ἦν δὲ νύξ (sim. Jos., Bell. 4, 64) 13:30; ψύχος it was cold 18:18; καύσων ἔσται it will be hot Lk 12:55.
    ⑥ to take place as a phenomenon or event, take place, occur, become, be, be in (Hom., Thu. et al.; LXX; En 104:5; 106:6.—Cp. Just., D. 82, 2 of Christ’s predictions ὅπερ καὶ ἔστι ‘which is in fact the case’.) ἔσται θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ a popular uprising Mk 14:2. γογγυσμὸς ἦν there was (much) muttering J 7:12. σχίσμα there was a division 9:16; 1 Cor 1:10; 12:25. ἔριδες … εἰσίν quarrels are going on 1:11. δεῖ αἱρέσεις εἶναι 11:19. θάνατος, πένθος, κραυγή, πόνος ἔσται Rv 21:4. ἔσονται λιμοὶ κ. σεισμοί Mt 24:7. Hence τὸ ἐσόμενον what was going to happen (Sir 48:25) Lk 22:49. πότε ταῦτα ἔσται; when will this happen? Mt 24:3. πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο; how can this be? Lk 1:34. Hebraistically (הָיָה; s. KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 63–65) καὶ ἔσται w. fut. of another verb foll. and it will come about that Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1); 3:23 (w. δέ); Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1).—W. dat. ἐστί τινι happen, be granted, come, to someone (X., An. 2, 1, 10; Jos., Ant. 11, 255; Just., D. 8, 4 σοὶ … ἔλεος ἔσται παρὰ θεοῦ) Mt 16:22; Mk 11:24; Lk 2:10; GJs 1:1; 4:3; 8:3; τί ἐστίν σοι τοῦτο, ὅτι what is the matter with you, that GJs 17:2.—Of becoming or turning into someth. become someth. εἰς χολὴν πικρίας εἶναι become bitter gall Ac 8:23. εἰς σάρκα μίαν Mt 19:5; Mk 10:8; 1 Cor 6:16; Eph 5:31 (all Gen 2:24. Cp. Syntipas p. 42, 24 οὐκ ἔτι ἔσομαι μετὰ σοῦ εἰς γυναῖκα); τὰ σκολιὰ εἰς εὐθείας Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4); εἰς πατέρα 2 Cor 6:18; Hb 1:5 (2 Km 7:14; 1 Ch 22:10; 28:6); εἰς τὸ ἕν 1J 5:8.— Serve as someth. (IPriene 50, 39 [c. II B.C.] εἶναι εἰς φυλακὴν τ. πόλεως; Aesop., Fab. 28 H.=18 P.; 26 Ch.; 18 H-H. εἰς ὠφέλειαν; Gen 9:13; s. also εἰς 4d) 1 Cor 14:22; Col 2:22; Js 5:3.—Of something being ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται it will be more tolerable τινί for someone Lk 10:12, 14.
    ⑦ to exist as possibility ἔστιν w. inf. foll. it is possible, one can (Περὶ ὕψους 6; Diog. L. 1, 110 ἔστιν εὑρεῖν=one can find; Just., A I, 59, 10 ἔστι ταῦτα ἀκοῦσαι καὶ μαθεῖν; D. 42, 3 ἰδεῖν al.; Mel., P. 19, 127); neg. οὐκ ἔστιν νῦν λέγειν it is not possible to speak at this time Hb 9:5. οὐκ ἔστιν φαγεῖν it is impossible to eat 1 Cor 11:20 (so Hom. et al.; UPZ 70, 23 [152/151 B.C.] οὐκ ἔστι ἀνακύψαι με πώποτε … ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης; 4 Macc 13:5; Wsd 5:10; Sir 14:16; 18:6; EpJer 49 al.; EpArist 163; Jos., Ant. 2, 335; Ath. 22, 3 ἔστιν εἰπεῖν).
    ⑧ to have a point of derivation or origin, be,/come from somewhere ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου from Herod’s jurisdiction Lk 23:7; ἐκ Ναζαρέτ (as an insignificant place) J 1:46; ἐκ τῆς γῆς 3:31; ἐκ γυναικός 1 Cor 11:8 al. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων be of heavenly (divine), human descent Mt 21:25; Mk 11:30; Lk 20:4. Be generated by (cp. Sb 8141, 21f [ins I B.C.] οὐδʼ ἐκ βροτοῦ ἤεν ἄνακτος, ἀλλὰ θεοῦ μεγάλου ἔκγονος; En 106:6) Mt 1:20. Esp. in Johannine usage ἐκ τοῦ διαβόλου εἶναι originate from the devil J 8:44; 1J 3:8. ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ 3:12; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου J 15:19; 17:14, 16; 1J 4:5. ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας εἶναι 2:21; J 18:37 etc. Cp. 9 end.
    ⑨ to belong to someone or someth. through association or genetic affiliation, be, belong w. simple gen. (X., Hell. 2, 4, 36; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 33, 230 τῶν Πυθαγορείων) οἱ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντες those who belong to the Way Ac 9:2. εἰμὶ Παύλου I belong to Paul 1 Cor 1:12; 3:4; cp. Ro 8:9; 2 Cor 10:7; 1 Ti 1:20; Ac 23:6. ἡμέρας εἶναι belong to the day 1 Th 5:8, cp. vs. 5. W. ἔκ τινος 1 Cor 12:15f; Mt 26:73; Mk 14:69f; Lk 22:58 al. (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 17; oft LXX). ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα belong to the twelve 22:3. ὅς ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν who is a fellow-countryman of yours Col 4:9.—To belong through origin 2 Cor 4:7. Of Mary: ἦν τῆς φυλῆς τοῦ Δαυίδ was of David’s line GJs 10:1. Cp. 8 above.
    ⑩ to have someth. to do with someth. or someone, be. To denote a close relationship ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἶναι rely on legal performance Gal 3:10. ὁ νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως the law has nothing to do with faith vs. 12.—To denote a possessor Mt 5:3, 10; l9:14; Mk 12:7; Lk 18:16; 1 Cor 6:19. Esp. of God who owns the Christian Ac 27:23; 1 Cor 3:23; 2 Ti 2:19 (Num 16:5). οὐδʼ εἶναι τὸν κόσμον θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀγγέλων AcPlCor 1:15 (cp. Just., A II, 13, 4 ὅσα … καλῶς εἴρηται, ἡμῶν τῶν χριστιανῶν ἐστι).—W. possess. pron. ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία Lk 6:20. οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι Mk 10:40 (cp. Just., A I, 4, 2 ὑμέτερον ἀγωνιᾶσαί ἐστι ‘it is a matter for your concern’).—To denote function (X., An. 2, 1, 4) οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν it is no concern of yours Ac 1:7—Of quality παιδεία οὐ δοκεῖ χαρᾶς εἶναι discipline does not seem to be (partake of) joy Hb 12:11.—10:39.
    ⑪ as an auxiliary: very commonly the simple tense forms are replaced by the periphrasis εἶναι and the ptc. (B-D-F §352–55; Mlt. 225–27, 249; Mlt-H. 451f; Rdm.2 102, 105, 205; Kühner-G. I 38ff; Rob. 374–76, 1119f; CTurner, Marcan Usage: JTS 28, 1927 349–51; GKilpatrick, BT 7, ’56, 7f; very oft. LXX).
    ⓐ (as in Hom et al.) w. the pf. ptc. to express the pf., plpf. and fut. pf. act. and pass. (s. Mayser 329; 377) ἦσαν ἐληλυθότες they had come Lk 5:17. ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη their hearts were hardened Mk 6:52. ἠλπικότες ἐσμέν we have set our hope 1 Cor 15:19. ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν the time has become short 7:29. ἦν ἑστώς (En 12:3) he was standing (more exactly he took his stand) Lk 5:1.
    ⓑ w. pres. ptc. (B-D-F §353).
    α. to express the pres. ἐστὶν προσαναπληροῦσα τὰ ὑστερήματα supplies the wants 2 Cor 9:12 (Just., A I, 26, 5 Μαρκίων … καὶ νῦν ἔτι ἐστὶ διδάσκων; Mel., P. 61, 441 ἐστὶν … κηρυσσόμενον).
    β. impf. or aor. ἦν καθεύδων he was sleeping Mk 4:38. ἦσαν ἀναβαίνοντες … ἦν προάγων 10:32; cp. Lk 1:22; 5:17; 11:14 al. (JosAs 1:3 ἦν συνάγων τὸν σίτον; Mel., P. 80, 580 ἦσθα εὐφραινόμενος). ἦν τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀλήθινόν … ἐρχόμενον εἰς τὸν κόσμον the true light entered the world J 1:9, w. ἦν introducing a statement in dramatic contrast to the initial phrase of vs. 8.—To denote age (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 2 al. Jac.; POxy 275, 9 [66 A.D.] οὐδέπω ὄντα τῶν ἐτῶν; Tob 14:11) Mk 5:42; Lk 3:23; Ac 4:22; GJs 12:3.—Mussies 304–6.
    γ. fut. ἔσῃ σιωπῶν you will be silent Lk 1:20; cp. 5:10; Mt 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17, 24 al.; 2 Cl 17:7 Bihlm. (the child) shall serve him (God).
    ⓒ w. aor. ptc. as plpf. (Aelian, NA 7, 11; Hippiatr. 34, 14, vol. I p. 185, 3 ἦν σκευάσας; ISyriaW 2070b ἦν κτίσας; AcThom 16; 27 [Aa II/2 p. 123, 2f; p. 142, 10]; B-D-F §355 m.—JVogeser, Z. Sprache d. griech. Heiligenlegenden, diss. Munich 1907, 14; JWittmann, Sprachl. Untersuchungen zu Cosmas Indicopleustes, diss. Munich 1913, 20; SPsaltes, Gramm. d. byzant. Chroniken 1913, 230; Björck [διδάσκω end] 75; B-D-F §355). ἦν βληθείς had been thrown Lk 23:19; J 18:30 v.l.—GPt 6:23; 12:51. (Cp. Just., A II, 10, 2 διʼ εὑρέσεως … ἐστὶ πονηθέντα αὐτοῖς ‘they achieved through investigation’).
    ⓓ Notice esp. the impersonals δέον ἐστίν it is necessary (Pla. et al.; POxy 727, 19; Sir praef. ln. 3; 1 Macc 12:11 δέον ἐστὶν καὶ πρέπον) Ac 19:36; εἰ δέον ἐστίν if it must be 1 Pt 1:6 (s. δεῖ 2a); 1 Cl 34:2; πρέπον ἐστίν it is appropriate (Pla. et al.; POxy 120, 24; 3 Macc 7:13) Mt 3:15; 1 Cor 11:13.
    ⓔ In many cases the usage w. the ptc. serves to emphasize the duration of an action or condition (BGU 183, 25 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον ζῶσα ᾖ Σαταβούς); JosAs 2:1 ἦν … ἐξουθενοῦσα καὶ καταπτύουσα πάντα ἄνδρα). ἦν διδάσκων he customarily taught Mk 1:22; Lk 4:31; 19:47. ἦν θέλων he cherished the wish 23:8. ἦσαν νηστεύοντες they were keeping the fast Mk 2:18. ἦσαν συλλαλοῦντες they were conversing for a while 9:4. ἦν προσδεχόμενος he was waiting for (the kgdm.) 15:43. ἦν συγκύπτουσα she was bent over Lk 13:11.
    ⓕ to emphasize the adjectival idea inherent in the ptc. rather than the concept of action expressed by the finite verb ζῶν εἰμι I am alive Rv 1:18. ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος he was obedient Lk 2:51. ἦν ἔχων κτήματα πολλά he was very rich Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων you shall have authority Lk 19:17 (Lucian, Tim. 35 ἴσθι εὐδαιμονῶν). ἦν καταλλάσσων (God) was reconciling 2 Cor 5:19 (cp. Mel., P. 83, 622 οὗτος ἦν ὁ ἐκλεξάμενός σε; Ath. 15, 2 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ … καρπούμενος).—LMcGaughy, Toward a Descriptive Analysis of ΕΙΝΑΙ as a Linking Verb in the Gk. NT, diss. Vanderbilt, ’70 (s. esp. critique of treatment of εἰμί in previous edd. of this lexicon pp. 12–15).—Mlt. 228. B. 635. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰμί

  • 7 δικαιοσύνη

    δικαιοσύνη, ης, ἡ (s. δίκαιος; Theognis, Hdt.+) gener. the quality of being upright. Theognis 1, 147 defines δ. as the sum of all ἀρετή; acc. to Demosth. (20, 165) it is the opp. of κακία. A strict classification of δ. in the NT is complicated by freq. interplay of abstract and concrete aspects drawn from OT and Gr-Rom. cultures, in which a sense of equitableness combines with awareness of responsibility within a social context.
    ① the quality, state, or practice of judicial responsibility w. focus on fairness, justice, equitableness, fairness
    ⓐ of human beings (a common theme in honorary ins, e.g. IPriene 71, 14f; 22f of a judge named Alexis; Danker, Benefactor 346–48; cp. Aristot., EN 5, 1, 8, 1129a τὸ μὲν δίκαιον ἄρα τὸ νόμιμον καὶ τὸ ἴσον ‘uprightness consists of that which is lawful and fair’; Ath. 34:2 ἔστι δὲ δ. ἴσα ἴσοις ἀμείβειν ‘uprightness means to answer like with like’; for association of δ. with judgment s. also Diog. L. 3, 79; in contexts of praise δ. suggests authority involving juridical responsibility FX 7, ’81, 255 n. 229) δ. κρίσεως ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος uprightness is the beginning and end of judgment B 1:6. Melchizedek as βασιλεὺς δικαιοσύνης Hb 7:2. ἐργάζεσθαι δικαιοσύνην administer justice Hb 11:33; κρίνειν ἐν δ. (Ps 71:2f; 95:13; Sir 45:26; PsSol 8:24) judge justly Ac 17:31, cp. Mk 16:14 v.l. (Freer ms. line 5 in N. app.); Ro 9:28 v.l. (Is 10:22). ποιεῖν κρίμα καὶ δ. practice justice and uprightness 1 Cl 13:1 (Jer 9:23). καθιστάναι τοὺς ἐπισκοπούς ἐν δ. appoint overseers in uprightness= who will serve justly 1 Cl 42:5 (Is 60:17). David rejoices in God’s δ. 1 Cl 18:15 (Ps 50:16; s. ἀγαλλιάω, end).
    ⓑ of transcendent figures (Pla. τὴν δ. θεοῦ νόμον ὑπελάμβανεν ‘considered divine justice [i.e. apportionment of reward or retribution in accordance with behavior] a principle’ or ‘system’ that served as a deterrent of crime Diog. L. 3, 79). Of an apocalyptic horseman ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ κρινεῖ Rv 19:11.
    ② quality or state of juridical correctness with focus on redemptive action, righteousness. Equitableness is esp. associated w. God (cp. Paradoxogr. Vat. 43 Keller αἰτεῖται παρὰ τ. θεῶν οὐδὲν ἄλλο πλὴν δικαιοσύνης), and in our lit. freq. in connection w. exercise of executive privilege in conferring a benefit. Hence God’s δ. can be the opposite of condemnation 2 Cor 3:9 (s. below); in it God is revealed as judge Rom 3:5—in contrast to human wrath, which beclouds judgment—displaying judicial integrity 3:25 (on this pass. s. also below). Cp. ἐκάλεσά σε ἐν δ. B 14:7 (Is 42:6). Also of equitable privilege allotted by God 2 Pt 1:1.—In Pauline thought the intimate association of God’s interest in retaining a reputation for justice that rewards goodness and requites evil, while at the same time working out a plan of salvation for all humanity, complicates classification of his use of δικαιοσύνη. On the one hand, God’s δ. is pardoning action, and on the other a way of sharing God’s character with believers, who then exhibit righteousness in the moral sense. God achieves this objective through exercise of executive privilege in dispensing justice equitably without reference to νόμος by making salvation available to all humanity (which shares a common problem of liability to wrath by being unanimously in revolt against God Ro 3:9–18, 23) through faith in God’s action in Jesus Christ. The genitival constr. δ. θεοῦ accents the uniqueness of this δ.: Ro 1:17; 3:21f, 25, 26 (s. these pass. also below; Reumann, 3c end); 10:3, and δ. alone 5:21; 9:30 (3 times); 2 Cor 3:9 (opp. κατάκρισις; cp. Dg 9:3; 5). 2 Cor 5:21 may belong here if δ. is viewed as abstract for concrete=δικαιωθέντες (but s. below). All these refer to righteousness bestowed by God cp. ἡ δωρεὰ τῆς δ. Ro 5:17, also 1 Cor 1:30 (sim. 1QS 11, 9–15; 1QH 4, 30–37). In this area it closely approximates salvation (cp. Is 46:13; 51:5 and s. NSnaith, Distinctive Ideas of the OT ’46, 207–22, esp. 218–22; EKäsemann, ZTK 58, ’61, 367–78 [against him RBultmann, JBL 83, ’64, 12–16]). According to some interpreters hunger and thirst for uprightness Mt 5:6 perh. offers (but s. 3a below) a related eschatological sense (‘Kingdom of God’, FNötscher, Biblica 31, ’50, 237–41=Vom A zum NT, ’62, 226–30).—Keeping the law cannot bring about uprightness Ro 3:21; Gal 2:21; 3:21, because δ. ἐκ τοῦ νόμου uprightness based on the law Ro 10:5 (cp. 9:30f), as ἰδία δ. one’s own (self-made) upr. 10:3, is impossible. God’s δ. without ref. to νόμος is to be apprehended by faith Ro 1:17; 3:22, 26; 4:3ff, 13; 9:30; 10:4, 6, 10 (cp. Hb 11:7 ἡ κατὰ πίστιν δ. righteousness based on faith; s. B-D-F §224, 1), for which reason faith is ‘calculated as righteousness’ (Gen 15:6; Ps 105:31; 1 Macc 2:52) Ro 4:3, 5f, 9, 11, 13, 22; Gal 3:6 (cp. Hb 11:7; Js 2:23; AMeyer, D. Rätsel des Jk 1930, 86ff; 1 Cl 10:6; B 13:7). Of Jesus as our righteousness 1 Cor 1:30.—As gift and power Ro 5:17, 21, and because it is intimately associated with the δύναμις of Christ’s resurrection Phil 3:9f (s. below), this righteousness enables the redeemed to respond and serve God faithfully Ro 6:13 (in wordplay opp. of ἀδικία), 16, 18ff; cp. 1 Cor 1:30 of Christ as instrument of God’s gift of δ.; 2 Cor 3:9. Thus God’s δ. functions as δύναμις 6:7 within Christians 5:21 (i.e. the way God acts in justifying or restoring people to a relationship with God’s self serves as a model for Christian interaction; for a difft. view, s. above) through the Spirit (Ro 8:9) and assures them they will have life that will be fully realized at the end of the age Ro 8:10f; for the time being it is a matter of hope ἐλπὶς δικαιοσύνης Gal 5:5 (cp. Is 51:5); cp. ἡ ἐκ θεοῦ δ. Phil 3:9. Pol 8:1 shares Paul’s view: Christ as ἀρραβὼν τῆς δ.—God’s uprightness as gift τοῦ κυρίου τοῦ ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς στάξαντος τὴν δ. who distills uprightness on you Hv 3, 9, 1.—Such perspectives offer a transition to specific ways in which the redeemed express uprightness.
    ③ the quality or characteristic of upright behavior, uprightness, righteousness
    ⓐ of uprightness in general: Mt 5:6 (cp. 6:33; some interpret 5:6 in an eschatological sense, s. 2 above; on desire for δ. cp. ἐπιθυμία τῆς δ. Hm 12, 2, 4); Mt 5:10, 20 (s. b, below); Hm 10, 1, 5; Dg 10:8; λόγος δικαιοσύνης Hb 5:13; Pol 9:1 (s. also Epict., Fgm. Stob. 26; when a man is excited by the λόγος in meetings, he should give expression to τὰ τῆς δικαιοσύνης λόγια). πάσχειν διὰ δ. 1 Pt 3:14. ἄγγελος τῆς δ. Hm 6, 2, 1; 3; 8; 10. ῥήματα δ. 8:9. 10, 1, 5; Dg 10:8; Pol 2:3; 3:1; ἐντολὴ δ. commandment of upr. Pol 3:3; 9:1.—Mt 6:33 of the kind of δ. God expects (on δ. as characteristic required by God acc. to Jewish perspective s. Bousset, Rel.3 387ff; 379ff; 423; cp. KFahlgren, Sẹdāḳā, nahestehende u. entgegengesetzte Begriffe im Alten Testament, diss. Uppsala ’32.—S. Diog. L. 3, 83 on Plato’s view of δικαιοσύνη περὶ θεούς or δ. πρὸς τοὺς θεούς=performance of prescribed duties toward gods; s. also ref. to 3, 79 at 1b above). Christ’s δ. Dg 9:3, 5. διαλέγεσθαι περὶ δ. Ac 24:25. Opp. ἀδικία (Hippol., Ref. 4, 43, 12; Did., Gen. 20, 27) 2 Cl 19:2; Dg 9:1. As ἀρετή Hm 1:2; Hs 6, 1, 4; 8, 10, 3. Opp. ἀνομία 2 Cor 6:14; cp. 2 Cor. 11:15 (ironical); Hb 1:9 (Ps 44:8); ἁμαρτία, which is the dominating power before δ. θεοῦ comes into play Ro 6:16, 18–20; cp. 1 Pt 2:24. ἐργάζεσθαι δ. (Ps 14:2) do what is right Ac 10:35; accomplish righteousness Js 1:20 (W-S. §30, 7g); Hv 2, 2, 7; 2, 3, 3; m 5, 1, 1; 12, 3, 1; 12, 6, 2; Hs 9, 13, 7. Also ἔργον δικαιοσύνης ἐργάζεσθαι 1 Cl 33:8. Opp. οὐδὲν ἐργάζεσθαι τῇ δ. Hs 5, 1, 4; ποιεῖν (τὴν) δ. (2 Km 8:15; Ps 105:3; Is 56:1; 58:2; 1 Macc 14:35 al.) do what is right 1J 2:29; 3:7, 10; Rv 22:11; 2 Cl 4:2; 11:7. Also πράσσειν τὴν δ. 2 Cl 19:3; διώκειν τὴν δ. (cp. Sir 27:8 διώκ. τὸ δίκαιον) seek to attain/achieve upr. Ro 9:30; 1 Ti 6:11; 2 Ti 2:22; 2 Cl 18:2; δ. ἀσκεῖν Hm 8:10. ὁδὸς (τῆς) δ. (ὁδός 3ab) Mt 21:32; 2 Pt 2:21; B 1:4; 5:4. προπορεύσεται ἔμπροσθεν σου ἡ δ. 3:4 (Is 58:8); cp. 4:12. κατορθοῦσθαι τὰς ὁδοὺς ἐν δ. walk uprightly Hv 2, 2, 6; τῇ δ. ζήσωμεν live uprightly 1 Pt 2:24. πύλη δ. gate of upr. 1 Cl 48:2 (Ps 117:19), cp. vs. 4. ἐν οἷς δ. κατοικεῖ (cp. Is 32:16) in which righteousness dwells 2 Pt 3:13. Of Christ’s body δικαιοσύνης ναο͂ς AcPlCor 2:17. παιδεία ἡ ἐν δ. training in uprightness 2 Ti 3:16. ἔργα τὰ ἐν δ. righteous deeds Tit 3:5. λαμπρότης ἐν δ. rejoicing in uprightness 1 Cl 35:2; ἐχθρὸς πάσης δ. enemy of every kind of upr. Ac 13:10. W. ὁσιότης (Wsd 9:3): holiness and upr. (as the relig. and moral side of conduct; cp. 1QS 1:5; 8:2; 11:9–15; 1QH 4:30f) Lk 1:75 (λατρεύειν ἐν δ. as Josh 24:14); Eph 4:24; 1 Cl 48:4. W. πίστις (OGI 438, 8; 1 Macc 14:35; Just., D. 110, 3) Pol 9:2; cp. 2 Pt 1:1. With εἰρήνη (Is 39:8; 48:18) and χαρά Ro 14:17; cp. 1 Cl 3:4; Hb 7:2 (but s. 1a, above). W. ἀλήθεια (Is 45:19; 48:1) Eph 5:9; 1 Cl 31:2; 62:2; Hs 9, 25, 2. W. ἀγάπη 2 Cl 12:1. W. ἀγαθωσύνη Eph 5:9. W. ἁγνεία Hs 9, 16, 7. W. γνῶσις κυρίου (cp. Pr 16:8) D 11:2. ὅπλα (τῆς) δ. tools or weapons of uprightness Ro 6:13; 2 Cor 6:7; Pol 4:1; θῶραξ τῆς δ. (Is 59:17; Wsd 5:18) breastplate of upr. Eph 6:14. τέκνα δικαιοσύνης (opp. ὀργῆς) AcPlCor 2:19. διάκονοι δικαιοσύνης servants of upr. 2 Cor 11:15; Pol 5:2; μισθός δ. D 5:2; B 20:2; μέρος δ. portion in (eternal salvation) which is meant for righteousness ApPt Rainer 6; καρπὸς δικαιοσύνης (Pr 3:9; 11:30; 13:2) produce of uprightness (ApcSed 12:5) Phil 1:11; Hb 12:11; Js 3:18; Hs 9, 19, 2; GJs 6:3. ὁ τῆς δ. στέφανος the crown of upr. (w. which the upright are adorned; cp. TestLevi 8:2; Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 258; a common theme in honorary ins recognizing distinguished public service, s. indexes SIG, OGI and other ins corpora; Danker, Benefactor 345–47; s. also the boast of Augustus, s.v. δίκαιος 1aα) 2 Ti 4:8; cp. ἡ τ. δικαιοσύνης δόξα the glory of upr. ending of Mk in the Freer ms. ln. 11f. Described as a characteristic to be taught and learned, because it depends on a knowledge of God’s will: κῆρυξ δ. preacher of upr. 2 Pt 2:5 (cp. Ar. 15:2 τῇ δ. τοῦ κηρύγματος). διδάσκειν δ. teach upr. (of Paul) 1 Cl 5:7. μέρος τι ἐκ τῆς δ. a portion of uprightness Hv 3, 1, 6; cp. 3, 6, 4; δ. μεγάλην ἐργάζεσθαι m 8:2.—ἐλέγχειν περὶ δικαιοσύνης convict w. regard to uprightness (of Jesus) J 16:8, 10 (s. WHatch, HTR 14, 1921, 103–5; HWindisch: Jülicher Festschr. 1927, 119f; HTribble, Rev. and Expos. 32, ’37, 269–80; BLindars, BRigaux Festschr., ’70, 275–85).
    ⓑ of specific action righteousness in the sense of fulfilling divine expectation not specifically expressed in ordinances (Orig., C. Cels. 7, 18, 39; Did., Gen. 188, 27: οἱ κατὰ δ. ζῶντες) Mt 3:15=ISm 1:1; of a superior type Mt 5:20 (s. JMoffatt, ET 13, 1902, 201–6, OOlevieri, Biblica 5, 1924, 201ff; Betz, SM 190f); not to win plaudits 6:1. To please outsiders as well as oneself 2 Cl 13:1. W. characteristic restriction of mng. mercy, charitableness (cp. Tob 12:9) of God, whose concern for the poor 2 Cor 9:9 (Ps 111:9) is exemplary for the recipients of the letter vs. 10; participation in such activity belongs, according to Mt 6:1f (cp. δίκαιος 1:19: Joseph combines justice and mercy), to the practice of piety (on the development of the word’s mng. in this direction s. Bousset, Rel.3 380). Pl. (B-D-F §142; W-S. §27, 4d; Rob. 408 δικαιοσύναι righteous deeds (Ezk 3:20; 33:13; Da 9:18) 2 Cl 6:9. δικαιοσύναι righteous deeds (Ezk 3:20; 33:13; Da 9:18; TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 12 [Stone p. 30]) 2 Cl 6:9. ἀρετὴ δικαιοσύνης Hm 1:2; Hs 6, 1, 4; cp. 8, 10, 3.
    ⓒ uprightness as determined by divine/legal standards δ. θεοῦ upr. that meets God’s standard Js 1:20 (W-S. 30, §7g).—Ro 10:5; Gal 2:21; 3:21; Phil 3:6; 3:9.—ASchmitt, Δικαιοσύνη θεοῦ: JGeffcken Festschr. ’31, 111–31; FHellegers, D. Gerechtigkeit Gottes im Rö., diss. Tüb. ’39; AOepke, TLZ 78, ’53, 257–64.—Dodd 42–59; ADescamps, Studia Hellenistica, ’48, 69–92.—S. also JRopes, Righteousness in the OT and in St. Paul: JBL 22, 1903, 211ff; JGerretsen, Rechtvaardigmaking bij Pls 1905; GottfrKittel, StKr 80, 1907, 217–33; ETobac, Le problème de la Justification dans S. Paul 1908; EDobschütz, Über d. paul. Rechtfertigungslehre: StKr 85, 1912, 38–87; GWetter, D. Vergeltungsged. b. Pls 1912, 161ff; BWestcott, St. Paul and Justification 1913; WMacholz, StKr 88, 1915, 29ff; EBurton ICC, Gal. 1921, 460–74; WMichaelis, Rechtf. aus Glauben b. Pls: Deissmann Festschr. 1927, 116–38; ELohmeyer, Grundlagen d. paul. Theologie 1929, 52ff; HBraun, Gerichtsged. u. Rechtfertigungslehre b. Pls. 1930; OZänker, Δικαιοσύνη θεοῦ b. Pls: ZST 9, ’32, 398–420; FFilson, St. P.’s Conception of Recompense ’31; WGrundmann, ZNW 32, ’33, 52–65; H-DWendland, D. Mitte der paul. Botschaft ’35; RGyllenberg, D. paul. Rechtfertigungslehre u. das AT: Studia Theologica (Riga) I ’35, 35–52; HJager, Rechtvaardiging en zekerheid des geloofs (Ro 1:16f; 3:21–5:11) ’39; HHofer, D. Rechtfertigungsverk. des Pls nach neuerer Forschg. ’40; VTaylor, Forgiveness and Reconciliation ’41; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 266–80, Eng. tr. KGrobel ’51, I 270–85; SSchulz, ZTK 56, ’59, 155–85 (Qumran and Paul); CMüller, FRL 86, ’64 (Ro 9–11); JBecker, Das Heil Gottes, ’64; PStuhlmacher, Gerechtigkeit Gottes b. Paulus, ’65; JReumann, Int 20, ’66, 432–52 (Ro 3:21–31); HBraun, Qumran II, ’66, 165–80; JZiesler, The Mng. of Righteousness in Paul, ’72; ESanders, Paul and Palestinian Judaism, ’77 (s. index 625; appendix by MBrauch 523–42 rev. of discussions in Germany); SWilliams, JBL 99, ’80, 241–90.—CPerella, De justificatione sec. Hb: Biblica 14, ’33, 1–21; 150–69. S. also the lit. on πίστις and ἁμαρτία.—On the whole word s. RAC X 233–360; AKöberle, Rechtfertigung u. Heiligung 1930; EDNT I 325–30.—DELG s.v. δίκη. M-M. EDNT.TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > δικαιοσύνη

  • 8 ὥστε

    A as Adv., bearing the same relation to ὡς as ὅστε to ὅς, and used by Hom. more freq. than ὡς in similes, when it is commonly written divisim, and is relat. to a demonstr. ὥς: sts. c. [tense] pres. Indic., Il.2.459 sq., 12.421, 13.703: sts. c. [tense] aor.,

    ὥς τε λέων ἐχάρη 3.23

    : sts. c. subj. [tense] pres. or [tense] aor., 2.474 sq., 11.67, 16.428, Od.22.302: all three usages combined in one simile, with varied construction, Il.5.136-9:—the verb is sts. omitted,

    λάμφ' ὥς τε στεροπή 10.154

    : this usage of ὥστε is chiefly [dialect] Ep. (Pi. uses ὧτε, q. v.), but it occurs in Alc.(?)27 (prob.), B.12.124 and sts. in Trag.,

    κατώρυχες δ' ἔναιον ὥστ' ἀήσυροι μύρμηκες A.Pr. 452

    , cf. Th.62, Pers. 424, Ch. 421 (lyr.), S.OC 343, Ant. 1033, Tr. 112 (lyr.).
    II to mark the power or virtue by which one does a thing, as being, inasmuch as, like ἅτε, τὸν δ' ἐξήρπαξ' Ἀφροδίτη ῥεῖα μάλ', ὥ. θεός Il.3.381, cf. 18.518; ὥ. περὶ ψυχῆς since it was for life, Od.9.423;

    ὥ. ταῦτα νομίζων Hdt.1.8

    , cf. 5.83, 101, 6.94.
    B as Conj. to express the actual or intended result of the action in the principal clause:
    I mostly c. inf., so as or for to do a thing, twice in Hom., εἰ δέ σοι θυμὸς ἐπέσσυται, ὥ. νέεσθαι if thy heart is eager to return, Il.9.42; οὐ τηλίκος.., ὥ. σημάντορι πάντα πιθέσθαι not of such age as to obey a master in all things, Od.17.21;

    ῥηϊδίως κεν ἐργάσσαιο, ὥ. σε κεἰς ἐνιαυτὸν ἔχειν Hes.Op.44

    ; ὥ. ἀποπλησθῆναι ( ἀποπλῆσαι codd.)

    τὸν χρησμόν Hdt.8.96

    : freq. in Pi., O.9.74, N.5.1, 35, al.; also in Trag. and [dialect] Att. after demonstratives,

    οὔπω τοσοῦτον ἠπατημένος κυρῶ ὥστ' ἄλλα χρῄζειν S.OT 595

    , etc.; this constr. is found in cases where (as in Il.9.42 supr. cit.) ὥστε seems superfluous; so after

    ἐθέλειν, Κύπρις.. ἤθελ' ὥ. γίγνεσθαι τόδε E.Hipp. 1327

    ; after ἔστι, for ἔξεστι, S.Ph. 656; after ψηφίζεσθαι, Th.5.17; after ἐπαίρειν, E.Supp. 581;

    ἐπαγγελλόμενοι ὥ. βοηθεῖν Th.8.86

    ; after words implying request,

    δεηθέντες.. ὥ. ψηφίσασθαι Id.1.119

    ;

    πεῖσαι ὥ. συγχωρῆσαι Id.8.45

    .
    2 after Comparatives with ἤ, when the possibility of the consequence is denied (cf.

    ὡς B. 111.2

    ), μέζω κακὰ ἢ ὥστε ἀνακλαίειν woes too great for tears, Hdt. 3.14;

    μεῖζον ἢ ὥστε φέρειν δύνασθαι κακόν X.Mem.3.5.17

    : but in Poetry ὥστε is sts. left out,

    νόσημα μεῖζον ἢ φέρειν S.OT 1293

    ;

    κρείσσον' ἢ φέρειν κακά E.Hec. 1107

     (rarely in Prose, Pl.Tht. 149c); similarly with the Posit., ψυχρὸν ὥ. λούσασθαι too cold to bathe in, X.Mem.3.13.3; ἡμεῖς ἔτι νέοι ὥ. διελέσθαι too young to.., Pl.Prt. 314b;

    γέρων ἐκεῖνος ὥ. δ' ὠφελεῖν παρών E.Andr.80

    : this ὥστε is sts. omitted after words implying comparison, ὀλίγους εἶναι στρατιῇ τῇ Μήδων συμβαλέειν too few.. Hdt.6.109;

    ταπεινὴ ἡ διάνοια ἐγκαρτερεῖν Th.2.61

    , etc.
    3 ὥστε.. ἄν is used with inf., of contingencies more or less improbable,

    οὕτως ἐκάετο ὥστε μήτε.. ἄλλο τι ἢ γυμνοὶ ἀνέχεσθαι, ἥδιστά τε ἂν ἐς ὕσωρ ψυχρὸν σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ῥίπτειν Th.2.49

    , cf. S.OT 374, El. 1316, D.8.35.
    4 sts. implying on condition that.., like ἐφ' ᾧτε, παραδοῦναι σφᾶς αὐτοὺς Ἀθηναίοις, ὥστε βουλεῦσαι ὅ τι ἂν ἐκείνοις δοκῇ Th.4.37, cf. X.An.5.6.26.
    II c. Indic., to express the actual or possible result with emphasis,

    οὐκ οὕτω φρενοβλαβὴς ὁ Πρίαμος οὐδὲ οἱ ἄλλοι.., ὥ. κινδυνεύειν ἐβούλοντο Hdt.2.120

     (fort. delendum ἐβούλοντο)

    ; ἀσθενέες οὕτω, ὥ... διατετρανέεις Id.3.12

    ; οὕτως ἀγνωμόνως ἔχετε, ὥ. ἐλπίζετε .. ; are you so foolish that you expect.. ? D.2.26,

    βέβηκεν, ὥ. πᾶν ἐν ἡσύχῳ ἔξεστι φωνεῖν S.OC82

    , cf. OT 533: freq. in X., Mem.2.2.3, al.; with ἄν and the [tense] impf. or [tense] aor. implying a supposed case,

    ὥστ', εἰ φρονῶν ἔπρασσον, οὐδ' ἂν ὧδ' ἐγιγνόμην κακός S.OC 271

    ; ὥστε οὐκ ἂν ἔλαθεν

    αὐτόθεν ὁρμώμενος Th.5.6

    :

    ὥστε τὴν πόλιν ἂν ἡγήσω πολέμου ἐργαστήριον εἶναι X.Ages.1.26

    .
    2 at the beginning of a sentence, to mark a strong conclusion, and so, therefore,

    ὥστ'.. ὄλωλα καί σε προσδιαφθερῶ S.Ph.75

    ;

    ὥστ' οὐχ ὕπνῳ γ' εὕδοντά μ' ἐξεγείρετε Id.OT 65

    ;

    ὥ. καὶ ταῦτα λεχθήσεται Arist.Metaph. 1004a22

    : c. imper.,

    θνητὸς δ' Ὀρέστης, ὥ. μὴ λίαν στένε S.El. 1172

    ;

    ὥ. θάρρει X.Cyr.1.3.18

    , cf. Pl.Prt. 311a;

    ὥ. ἂν βούλησθε χειροτονήσατε D.9.70

     cod.A (- ήσετε cett.); before a question,

    ὥ. τίς ἂν ἀπετόλμησε..; Lys.7.28

    .
    3 c. opt., with ἄν, Hdt.2.16;

    βρέφος γὰρ ἦν τότ'.., ὥστ' οὐκ ἂν αὐτὸν γνωρίσαιμ' E.Or. 379

    , cf. S.OT 857, Ar.Ach. 943 (lyr.). b. c. opt. in orat. obliq., X.HG3.5.23; after opt. in principal clause, Id.Oec.1.13.
    4 with subj., in order that, in Thessalian dialect,

    τὸς ταμίας φροντίσαι οὕστε.. γενειθεῖ τᾶ πόλι ἁ δόσις BCH59.38

     ([place name] Crannon); ἀντιλλαβέσθαι τᾶς πόλλιος (sic) οὕστε.. ἐς πάντουν ἐγλυθεῖ τοῦν δανείουν ib.p.37.
    III with part., instead of inf., after a part. in the principal clause,

    τοσοῦτον ἁπάντων διενεγκόντες, ὥσθ' ὑπὲρ Ἀργείων δυστυχησάντων Θηβαίοις.. ἐπιτάττοντες κτλ. Isoc.4.64

     (s. v.l.); οὕτω σφόδρα μισοῦντα τοῦτον, ὥστε πολὺ δὴ (ἂν Dobree)

    θᾶττον διαθέμενον κτλ. Is.9.16

    ;

    ὥστε.. δέον D.3.1

    .
    V in later Greek, folld. by Preps.,

    Παρμένοντι κλειδὸς ὥ. ἐπὶ τὸ Διοσκούριον Inscr.Délos316.83

     (iii B. C.);

    ξύλον ὥ. ἐπὶ τὴν ἅμαξαν IG11(2)

     287 A52 (iii B. C.); μόλυβδος ὥ. εἰς τὸ Κύνθιον ib.203A52 (iii B. C.); κριθῶν ὥ. εἰς τὰ κτήνη barley for the animals, PCair.Zen.251.5 (iii B. C.);

    ὥ. εἰς ξένια φοίνικας PHal.1.7.4

     (iii B. C.).
    b c. dat., for, χρεία αὐτοῦ ἐστὶν ὥ. Πισικλεῖ it is needed for P., PCair.Zen. 241 (iii B. C.);

    ὥ. τοῖς χησίν IG11(2).287

    A45 (iii B. C.).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὥστε

  • 9 ἔχω

    ἔχω (Hom.+) impf. εἶχον, 1 pl. εἴχαμεν and 3 pl. εἶχαν (both as vv.ll.; Mlt-H. 194; B-D-F §82) Mk 8:7; Rv 9:8 or εἴχοσαν (B-D-F §84, 2; Mlt-H. 194; Kühner-Bl. II p. 55) J 15:22, 24; 2 aor. ἔσχον; mixed aor. forms include ἔσχαν Hv 3, 5, 1, ἔσχοσαν 1 Esdr 6:5; 1 Macc 10:15 (ἔσχον, εἴχον vv.ll.); pf. ἔσχηκα; plpf. ἐσχήκειν.—In the following divisions: act. trans. 1–9; act. intr. 10; mid. 11.
    ① to possess or contain, have, own (Hom.+)
    ⓐ to possess someth. that is under one’s control
    α. own, possess (s. esp. TestJob 9f) κτήματα πολλά own much property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. πρόβατα Lk 15:4; J 10:16. θησαυρόν Mt 19:21; Mk 10:21b. βίον living Lk 21:4; 1J 3:17. δραχμὰς δέκα Lk 15:8. πλοῖα Rv 18:19. κληρονομίαν Eph 5:5. θυσιαστήριον Hb 13:10a; μέρος ἔ. ἔν τινι have a share in someth. Rv 20:6. Gener. μηδὲν ἔ. own nothing (SibOr 3, 244) 2 Cor 6:10. ὅσα ἔχεις Mk 10:21; cp. 12:44; Mt 13:44, 46; 18:25. τί ἔχεις ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔλαβες; what do you have that you have not been given? 1 Cor 4:7. The obj. acc. is often used w. an adj. or ptc.: ἔ. ἅπαντα κοινά have everything in common Ac 2:44 (cp. Jos., Ant. 15, 18). ἔ. πολλὰ ἀγαθὰ κείμενα have many good things stored up Lk 12:19.—Hb 12:1. Abs. ἔ. have (anything) (Soph.et al.; Sir 13:5; 14:11) Mt 13:12a; Mk 4:25a; Lk 8:18a. ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν in accordance w. what you have 2 Cor 8:11. ἔ. εἰς ἀπαρτισμόν have (enough) to complete Lk 14:28. W. neg. ἔ. have nothing Mt 13:12b; Mk 4:25b; Lk 8:18b.—ὁ ἔχων the one who has, who is well off (Soph., Aj. 157; Eur., Alc. 57; X., An. 7, 3, 28; Ar. 15:7). πᾶς ὁ ἔχων everyone who has (anything) Mt 25:29a; Lk 19:26a. ὁ μὴ ἔχων the one who has nothing (X., An. 7, 3, 28; 1 Esdr 9:51, 54; 2 Esdr 18:10) Mt 25:29b; Lk 19:26b; 1 Cor 11:22.
    β. have = hold in one’s charge or keeping ἔ. τὰς κλεῖς hold the keys Rv 1:18; cp. 3:7. τὸ γλωσσόκομον the money-box J 12:6; 13:29.
    ⓑ to contain someth. have, possess, of the whole in relation to its parts
    α. of living beings, of parts of the body in men and animals μέλη Ro 12:4a; cp. 1 Cor 12:12. σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα Lk 24:39 (Just., A I, 66, 2 καὶ σάρκα καὶ αἷμα) ἀκροβυστίαν Ac 11:3. οὖς Rv 2:7, 11. ὦτα Mt 11:15; Mk 7:16; Lk 8:8. χεῖρας, πόδας, ὀφθαλμούς Mt 18:8f; Mk 9:43, 45, 47. Of animals and animal-like beings ἔ. πρόσωπον Rv 4:7. πτέρυγας vs. 8. κέρατα 5:6. ψυχάς 8:9. τρίχας 9:8. κεφαλάς 12:3 (TestAbr B 14 p. 118, 19 [Stone p. 84]) al. ἔχοντες ὑγιῆ τὴν σάρκα AcPlCor 2:32 (Just., D. 48, 3 σάρκα ἔχων). Of plants (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 6 [Stone p. 62] εὗρον δένδρον … ἔχον κλάδους) ῥίζαν ἔ. Mt 13:6; Mk 4:6.
    β. of inanimate things: of cities τ. θεμελίους ἔ. Hb 11:10; cp. Rv 21:14. Of a head-covering χαρακτῆρα ἔχει βασιλικόν has a royal emblem GJs 2:2.
    ⓒ to have at hand, have at one’s disposal have ἄρτους Mt 14:17; cp. 15:34; J 21:5, where the sense is prob. ‘Did you catch any fish for breakfast?’. οὐκ ἔχω ὸ̔ παραθήσω αὐτῷ I have nothing to set before him Lk 11:6. μὴ ἐχόντων τί φάγωσι since they had nothing to eat Mk 8:1; cp. Mt 15:32 (Soph., Oed. Col. 316 οὐκ ἔχω τί φῶ). οὐκ ἔχω ποῦ συνάξω I have no place to store Lk 12:17. ἄντλημα a bucket J 4:11a. οἰκίας ἔ. have houses (at one’s disposal) 1 Cor 11:22. Of pers.: have (at one’s disposal) (PAmh 92, 18 οὐχ ἕξω κοινωνόν and oft. in pap) Moses and the prophets Lk 16:29. παράκλητον an advocate, a helper 1J 2:1. οὐδένα ἔ. ἰσόψυχον Phil 2:20. ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἔ. J 5:7.
    ⓓ to have within oneself have σύλλημα ἔχει ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου she has something conceived through the Holy Spirit GJs 18:1. Var. constr. w. ἐν: of women ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ. be pregnant (γαστήρ 2) Mt 1:18, 23 (Is 7:14); 24:19; Mk 13:17; Lk 21:23; 1 Th 5:3; Rv 12:2. ἔ. τινὰ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ have someone in one’s heart Phil 1:7 (Ovid, Metam. 2, 641 aliquem clausum pectore habere). ἔ. τι ἐν ἑαυτῷ (Jos., Ant. 8, 171; cp. TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 14 [Stone p. 8] ἔκρυψεν τὸ μυστήριον, μόνος ἔχων ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ): ζωήν J 5:26. τὴν μαρτυρίαν 1J 5:10; τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου have a sentence of death within oneself 2 Cor 1:9.
    ⓔ to have with oneself or in one’s company have μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 17) τινά someone Mt 15:30; 26:11; Mk 2:19; 14:7; J 12:8; AcPl Ha 8, 35; σὺν αὐτῷ 4:18.—The ptc. w. acc. = with (Diod S 12, 78, 1 ἔχων δύναμιν with a [military] force; 18, 61, 1 ὁ θρόνος ἔχων τὸ διάδημα the throne with the diadem; JosAs 27:8 ἔχοντες ἐσπασμένας τὰς ῥομφαίας ‘with their swords drawn’) ἀνέβησαν ἔχοντες αὐτόν they went up with him Lk 2:42 D.
    ② to stand in a close relationship to someone, have, have as
    ⓐ of relatives πατέρα ἔ. J 8:41. ἀδελφούς Lk 16:28. ἄνδρα (Aristot., Cat. 15b, 27f λεγόμεθα δὲ καὶ γυναῖκα ἔχειν καὶ ἡ γυνὴ ἄνδρα; Tob 3:8 BA) be married (of the woman) J 4:17f; 1 Cor 7:2b, 13; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). γυναῖκα of the man (cp. Lucian, Tox. 45; SIG 1160 γυναικὸς Αἴ., τῆς νῦν ἔχει; PGM 13, 320; 1 Esdr 9:12, 18; Just., D. 141, 4 πολλὰς ἔσχον γυναίκας. As early as Od. 11, 603 Heracles ἔχει Ἥβην) 1 Cor 7:2a, 12, 29 (for the wordplay cp. Heliod. 1, 18, 4 in connection w. the handing over of a virgin: σὺ ἔχων οὐκ ἕξεις; Crates, 7th Ep. [p. 58, 8 Malherbe] πάντʼ ἔχοντες οὐδὲν ἔχετε). τέκνα Mt 21:28; 22:24; 1 Ti 3:4; 5:4; Tit 1:6. υἱούς (Artem. 5, 42 τὶς τρεῖς ἔχων υἱούς; cp. θυγατέρα TestAbr B 10 p. 114, 17 [Stone p.76]) Lk 15:11; Gal 4:22. σπέρμα have children Mt 22:25. W. acc. as obj. and in predicate (Ar. 8, 4 τούτους συνηγόρους ἔχοντες τῆς κακίας; 11, 3 ἔσχε μοιχὸν τὸν Ἄρην; Ath. 7, 2 ἔχομεν προφήτας μάρτυρας) ἔ. τινὰ πατέρα have someone as father Mt 3:9. ἔ. τινὰ γυναῖκα (w. γυναῖκα to be understood fr. the context) 14:4; cp. Mk 6:18; ὥστε γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔ. that someone has taken his father’s wife (as his own wife: the simple ἔχειν in this sense as Plut., Cato Min. 21, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 10 §34; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 147. Perh. an illicit relationship is meant, as Longus 4, 17; Hesychius Miles. [VI A.D.], Viri Ill. 4 JFlach [1880] ἔχω Λαί̈δα) 1 Cor 5:1 (Diod S 20, 33, 5 of a man who had illicit relations with his stepmother: ἔχειν λάθρᾳ τοῦ πατρὸς τὴν Ἀλκίαν).
    ⓑ more gener. φίλον have a friend Lk 11:5. ἀσθενοῦντας have sick people Lk 4:40 and χήρας widows 1 Ti 5:16 to care for; παιδαγωγοὺς ἔ. 1 Cor 4:15. δοῦλον Lk 17:7. οἰκονόμον 16:1; κύριον ἔ. have a master, i.e. be under a master’s control Col 4:1; δεσπότην ἔ. 1 Ti 6:2; βασιλέα J 19:15. ἀρχιερέα Hb 4:14; 8:1. ποιμένα Mt 9:36. ἔχων ὑπʼ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας I have soldiers under me Lk 7:8. W. direct obj. and predicate acc. ἔ. τινὰ ὑπηρέτην have someone as an assistant Ac 13:5 (Just., A I, 14, 1) ἔ. τινὰ τύπον have someone as an example Phil 3:17.—Of the relation of Christians to God and to Jesus ἔ. θεόν, τὸν πατέρα, τὸν υἱόν have God, the Father, the Son, i.e. be in communion w. them 1J 2:23; 2J 9; AcPl Ha 4, 7.—HHanse, at end of this entry.
    ③ to take a hold on someth., have, hold (to), grip
    ⓐ of holding someth. in one’s hand ἔ. τι ἐν τῇ χειρί have someth. in one’s hand (since Il. 18, 505) Rv 1:16; 6:5; 10:2; 17:4. Of holding in the hand without ἐν τῇ χειρί (Josh 6:8; JosAs 5:7) ἔ. κιθάραν 5:8. λιβανωτὸν χρυσοῦν 8:3, cp. vs. 6; 14:17 and s. ἀλάβαστρον Mt 26:7 and Mk 14:3.
    ⓑ of keeping someth. safe, a mina (a laborer’s wages for about three months) in a handkerchief keep safe Lk 19:20.
    ⓒ of holding fast to matters of transcendent importance, fig. τὴν μαρτυρίαν Rv 6:9; 12:17; 19:10; the secret of Christian piety 1 Ti 3:9; an example of sound teaching 2 Ti 1:13; keep (Diod S 17, 93, 1 τὴν βασιλείαν ἔχειν=keep control) Mk 6:18.
    ⓓ of states of being hold, hold in its grip, seize (Hom. et al.; PGiss 65a, 4 παρακαλῶ σε κύριέ μου, εἰδότα τὴν ἔχουσάν με συμφορὰν ἀπολῦσαί μοι; Job 21:6; Is 13:8; Jos., Ant. 3, 95 δέος εἶχε τοὺς Ἑβρ.; 5, 63; Just., D. 19, 3) εἶχεν αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις trembling and amazement had seized them Mk 16:8.
    ④ to carry/bear as accessory or part of a whole, have on, wear, of clothing, weapons, etc. (Hom. et al.; LXX; TestAbr B p. 114, 22 [Stone p. 76]) τὸ ἔνδυμα Mt 3:4; 22:12 (cp. ἔνδυσιν TestJob 25:7). κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων w. τὶ to be supplied while he wears (a covering) on his head 1 Cor 11:4. ἔ. θώρακας Rv 9:9, 17. ἔ. μάχαιραν wear a sword (Jos., Ant. 6, 190) J 18:10. Sim. of trees ἔ. φύλλα have leaves Mk 11:13 (ApcSed. 8:8).
    ⑤ be in a position to do someth., can, be able, ἔ. w. inf. foll. (Hom. et al.; cp. Eur., Hec. 761; Hdt. 1, 49; Pla., Phd. p. 76d; Demosth., Ep. 2, 22; Theocr. 10, 37 τὸν τρόπον οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν=I cannot specify the manner; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 21, 2, Hermot. 55; Epict. 1, 9, 32; 2, 2, 24 al.; Ael. Aristid. 51, 50 K.=27 p. 546 D.: οὐκ ἔχω λέγειν; PPetr II, 12, 1, 16; PAmh 131, 15; Pr 3:27; ApcEsdr 2:24; 3:7; 6:5; TestAbr A 8, p. 86, 13 [Stone p. 20]; Jos., Ant. 1, 338; 2, 58; Just., A I, 19, 5, D. 4, 6 οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν) ἔ. ἀποδοῦναι be able to pay Mt 18:25a; Lk 7:42; 14:14. μὴ ἔ. περισσότερον τι ποιῆσαι be in a position to do nothing more 12:4. οὐδὲν ἔ. ἀντειπεῖν be able to make a reply Ac 4:14; cp. Tit 2:8. ἔ. κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ J 8:6 (cp. 9a below, end). ἀσφαλές τι γράψαι οὐκ ἔχω I have nothing definite to write Ac 25:26a; cp. 26b. ἔ. μεταδιδόναι Eph 4:28a. ἔ. τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι be able to recall these things to mind 2 Pt 1:15. κατʼ οὐδενὸς εἶχεν μείζονος ὀμόσαι he could swear by no one greater Hb 6:13. In the same sense without the actual addition of the inf., which is automatically supplied fr. context (X., An. 2, 1, 9) ὸ̔ ἔσχεν (i.e. ποιῆσαι) ἐποίησεν she has done what she could Mk 14:8.
    ⑥ to have an opinion about someth., consider, look upon, view w. acc. as obj. and predicate acc. (POxy 292, 6 [c. 25 A.D.] ἔχειν αὐτὸν συνεσταμένον=look upon him as recommended; 787 [16 A.D.]; PGiss 71, 4; Job 30:9; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 19; Ath. 32, 3 τοὺς μὲν υἱοὺς … νοοῦμεν, τοὺς δὲ ἀδελφούς ἔχομεν) ἔχε με παρῃτημένον consider me excused (= don’t expect me to come) Lk 14:18b, 19 (cp. Martial 2, 79 excusatum habeas me). τινὰ ἔντιμον ἔ. hold someone in honor Phil 2:29. ἔ. τινὰ ὡς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 14:5; 21:26, 46 v.l. (cp. GNicod 5 [=Acta Pilati B 5 p. 297 Tdf.] ἔχειν [Jannes and Jambres] ὡς θεούς; Just., D. 47, 5 τὸν μετανοοῦντα … ὡς δίκαιον καὶ ἀναμάρτητον ἔχει). ἔ. τινὰ εἰς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 21:46 (cp. Duris [III B.C.]: 76 Fgm. 21 Jac. ὸ̔ν εἰς θεοὺς ἔχουσιν). εἶχον τ. Ἰωάννην ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν they thought that John was really a prophet Mk 11:32.
    ⑦ to experience someth., have (freq. in auxiliary capacity CTurner, JTS 28, 1927, 357–60)
    ⓐ of all conditions of body and soul (Hom. et al.; LXX)
    α. of illness, et al. (ApcMos 6 νόσον καὶ πόνον ἔχω; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 305) ἀσθενείας have sicknesses/diseases Ac 28:9. μάστιγας physical troubles Mk 3:10. πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης Rv 13:14. θλῖψιν J 16:33b; 1 Cor 7:28; Rv 2:10. Esp. of possession by hostile spirits: δαιμόνιον ἔ. be possessed by an evil spirit Mt 11:18; Lk 7:33; 8:27; J 7:20; 8:48f, 52; 10:20. Βεελζεβούλ Mk 3:22. πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον vs. 30; 7:25; Ac 8:7. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου Lk 4:33. πνεῦμα πονηρόν Ac 19:13. πνεῦμα ἄλαλον Mk 9:17. πνεῦμα ἀσθενείας spirit of sickness Lk 13:11. τὸν λεγιῶνα (the evil spirit called) Legion Mk 5:15.
    β. gener. of conditions, characteristics, capabilities, emotions, inner possession: ἀγάπην ἔ. have love (cp. Diod S 3, 58, 3 φιλίαν ἔχειν; Just., D. 93, 4 φιλίαν ἢ ἀγάπην ἔχοντε) J 5:42; 13:35; 15:13; 1J 4:16; 1 Cor 13:1ff; 2 Cor 2:4; Phil 2:2; 1 Pt 4:8. ἀγνωσίαν θεοῦ fail to know God 1 Cor 15:34. ἁμαρτίαν J 9:41; 15:22a. ἀσθένειαν Hb 7:28. γνῶσιν 1 Cor 8:1, 10 (Just., A II, 13, 1; D. 28, 4). ἐλπίδα Ac 24:15; Ro 15:4; 2 Cor 3:12; 10:15; Eph 2:12; 1J 3:3 (Ath. 33, 1). ἐπιθυμίαν Phil 1:23. ἐπιποθίαν Ro 15:23b; ζῆλον ἔ. have zeal Ro 10:2. Have jealousy Js 3:14. θυμόν Rv 12:12. λύπην (ApcMos 3 p. 2, 16 Tdf.) J 16:21f; 2 Cor 2:3; Phil 2:27; μνείαν τινὸς ἔ. remember someone 1 Th 3:6. παρρησίαν Phlm 8; Hb 10:19; 1J 2:28; 3:21; 4:17; 5:14. πεποίθησιν 2 Cor 3:4; Phil 3:4. πίστιν Mt 17:20; 21:21; Mk 4:40; Ac 14:9; Ro 14:22; 1 Cor 13:2; 1 Ti 1:19 al. (Just., A I, 52, 1). προφητείαν have the gift of prophecy 1 Cor 13:2. σοφίαν (X., Mem. 2, 3, 10) Rv 17:9. συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν Hb 10:2. καλὴν συνείδησιν 13:18; ἀγαθὴν ς. 1 Ti 1:19; 1 Pt 3:16; ἀπρόσκοπον ς. Ac 24:16; ὑπομονήν Rv 2:3. φόβον 1 Ti 5:20. χαράν Phlm 7. χάριν ἔ. τινί be grateful to someone Lk 17:9; 1 Ti 1:12; 2 Ti 1:3; σιγὴν ἔ. be silent Hs 9, 11, 5. ἀνάγκην ἔσχον I felt it necessary Jd 3 (HKoskenniemi, Studien zur Idee und Phraseologie des Griechischen Briefes bis 400 n. Chr. ’56, 78–87).
    γ. of advantages, benefits, or comforts that one enjoys: ἔ. τὰ αἰτήματα to have been granted the requests 1J 5:15; ἀνάπαυσιν ἔ. have rest Rv 4:8; 14:11; ἀπόλαυσιν τινος ἔ. enjoy someth. Hb 11:25. βάθος γῆς Mt 13:5b; Mk 4:5b; γῆν πολλήν Mt 13:5a; Mk 4:5a. τὴν προσέλευσιν τὴν πρὸς τὸν κύριον AcPl Ha 8, 22f; εἰρήνην Ro 5:1. ἐλευθερίαν Gal 2:4. S. ἐξουσία, ἐπαγγελία, ἔπαινος, ζωή, ἰκμάς, καιρός, καρπός, καύχημα, καύχησις, λόγος, μισθός, νοῦς, πνεῦμα, προσαγωγή, πρόφασις, τιμή, χάρις (=favor), χάρισμα.
    δ. of a sense of obligation in regard to someth.—W. dir. object have = have someth. over one, be under someth.: ἀνάγκην ἔχειν be under necessity 1 Cor 7:37a; w. inf. foll. have a need (ἀνάγκη 1) Lk 14:18; 23:16 v.l.; Hb 7:27; χρείαν ἔ. be in need abs. Eph 4:28b; τινός need someth. (Aeschyl. et al.; SIG 333, 20; 421, 35 al.; PPetr III, 42 G 9, 7 [III B.C.] ἐάν τινος χρείαν ἔχῃς; Ath. 13, 2 ποίας ἔτι χρείαν ἑκατόμβης ἔχει;) Mt 6:8; 9:12a; Mk 11:3; Lk 19:31, 34; J 13:29; 1 Cor 12:21; Hb 10:36 al.; w. inf. foll. (TestSol 13:2) Mt 3:14; 14:16; J 13:10; 1 Th 1:8; 4:9; 5:1. νόμον J 19:7. ἐπιταγήν 1 Cor 7:25. ἐντολήν (SIG 559, 9 ἔ. τὰς ἰντολάς; 1 Esdr 4:52; 2 Macc 3:13; Jos., Bell. 1, 261) Hb 7:5; 1J 2:7; 4:21; 2J 5; cp. J 14:21. διακονίαν 2 Cor 4:1. ἀγῶνα Phil 1:30; Col 2:1. πρᾶξιν Ro 12:4b. ἔγκλημα Ac 23:29. κόλασιν ApcPt Bodl. (ApcEsdr 1:22 p. 25, 17 Tdf.).
    ε. of a sense of inevitability in respect to some action.—W. inf. foll. one must (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 1, 3 καθαιρεθῆναι ἔχεις=you must be deposed; Porphyr., Against the Christians 63 Harnack [ABA 1916] παθεῖν; Gen 18:31; Jos., Ant. 19, 348 τοῦ τεθνάναι; TestSol 5:12 σίδηρα ἔχεις φορέσαι; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 22 [Stone p. 48] τοῦ βίου τοῦτου ἀπαλλάξαι εἶχες; Just., D. 51, 2 ἔργῳ πεισθήναι ὑμῶν ἐχόντων) βάπτισμα ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι I must undergo a baptism Lk 12:50. ἔχω σοί τι εἰπεῖν I have someth. to say to you (Lucian, Philops. 1 ἔχεις μοι εἰπεῖν. Without dat. Aelian, VH 2, 23; Jos., Ant. 16, 312) 7:40. καινόν σοι θέαμα ἔχω ἐξηγήσασθαι I have a wonderful new thing to tell you=‘I must tell you about something wonderful that I’ve just seen’ GJs 19:3. ἀπαγγεῖλαι Ac 23:17, 19; cp. vs. 18. πολλὰ γράφειν 2J 12; 3J 13.
    ⓑ of temporal circumstances w. indications of time and age: πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις you are not yet fifty years old J 8:57 (cp. Jos., Ant. 1, 198). τριάκοντα κ. ὀκτὼ ἔτη ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ αὐτοῦ who had been sick for 38 years 5:5 (Cyranides p. 63, 25 πολὺν χρόνον ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀρρωστίᾳ. W. cardinal numeral TestJob 26:1 δέκα ἑπτὰ ἔτη ἔχω ἐν ταῖς πληγαῖς; POxy 1862, 17 τέσσαρες μῆνας ἔχει. Mirac. S. Georgii 44, 7 [JAufhauser 1913] ἔσχεν … ἔτη ἑπτά); cp. Mt 9:20 v.l. τέσσαρας ἡμέρας ἔ. ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ have lain in the grave for four days J 11:17 (Jos., Ant. 7, 1 αὐτοῦ δύο ἡμέρας ἔχοντος ἐν τῇ Σεκέλλᾳ). πολὺν χρόνον ἔ. be (somewhere or in a certain condition) for a long time 5:6. ἡλικίαν ἔχειν be of age (Pla., Euthyd. 32, 306d; Plut., Mor. 547a; BGU 168 τοῖς ἀτελέσι ἔχουσι τὴν ἡλικίαν) 9:21, 23. τέλος ἔχειν have an end, be at an end (Lucian, Charon 17; UPZ 81 III, 20 [II A.D.] τέλος ἔχει πάντα; Ar. 4:2 ἀρχὴν καὶ τέλος) Mk 3:26; Lk 22:37 (on the latter pass. s. τέλος 2); cp. Hb 7:3.
    ⑧ as connective marker, to have or include in itself, bring about, cause w. acc. (Hom. et al.; Wsd 8:16) of ὑπομονή: ἔργον τέλειον Js 1:4. Of πίστις: ἔργα 2:17. Of φόβος: κόλασιν 1J 4:18. Of παρρησία: μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν Hb 10:35. Of πολυτέλεια: λύπην, χαράν Hs 1, 10. ἐσχάτην εὐλογίαν, ἥτις διαδοχὴν οὐκ ἔχει ultimate blessing, which has no successor GJs 6:2.
    ⑨ special combinations
    ⓐ w. prep. ἐν: τὸν θεὸν ἔ. ἐν ἐπιγνώσει acknowledge God Ro 1:28 (cp. ἐν ὀργῇ ἔ. τινά=‘be angry at someone’, Thu. 2, 18, 5; 2, 21, 3; ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ ἔ. τ. 2, 89, 1; ἐν ἡδονῇ ἔ. τ.=‘be glad to see someone’ 3, 9, 1; ἐν εὐνοίᾳ ἔ. Demosth. 18, 167). ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (ἕτοιμος b). ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν he has no hold on me J 14:30 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 32 §125 ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι=have someth. [hope of safety] in someone). κατά τινος: on 1 Cor 11:4 s. above 4. ἔ. τι κατά τινος have someth. against someone Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:14. ἔ. κατά τινος w. sim. mng. Hm 2:2; Hs 9, 23, 2; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:4, 20. ἔ. τινὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον meet someone face to face Ac 25:16. μετά: ἔ. τι μετά τινος have someth. w. someone κρίματα lawsuits 1 Cor 6:7. περί: ἔ. περί τινος have (a word, a reference, an explanation) about someth. B 12:1; with adv. τελείως 10:10. πρός τινα have someth. against someone (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21 ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον) Ac 24:19. ζητήματα ἔ. πρός τινα have differences w. someone (on points in question) 25:19. λόγον ἔ. πρός τινα 19:38. πρᾶγμα (=Lat. causa, ‘lawsuit’: BGU 19 I, 5; 361 II, 4) ἔ. πρός τινα (POxy 743, 19 [2 B.C.] εἰ πρὸς ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα; BGU 22:8) 1 Cor 6:1. ἵνα ἔχωσιν κατηγορίαν αὐτοῦ J 8:4 D (cp. 5 above). πρός τινα ἔ. μομφήν have a complaint against someone Col 3:13.
    ⓑ τοῦτο ἔχεις ὅτι you have this (in your favor), that Rv 2:6. ἔ. ὁδόν be situated (a certain distance) away (cp. Peripl. Eryth. 37: Ὡραία ἔχουσα ὁδὸν ἡμερῶν ἑπτὰ ἀπὸ θαλάσσης) of the Mt. of Olives ὅ ἐστιν ἐγγὺς Ἰερουσαλὴμ σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν Ac 1:12.—ἴδε ἔχεις τὸ σόν here you have what is yours Mt 25:25. ἔχετε κουστωδίαν there you have a guard (=you can have a guard) 27:65 (cp. POxy 33 III, 4).
    ⑩ to be in some state or condition, act. intr. (spatially: Ath. 25, 1 οἱ ἄγγελοι … περὶ τόν ἀέρα ἔχοντες καὶ τὴν γῆν) w. adv. (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).
    ⓐ impers. it is, the situation is (Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 10 πῶς ὑμῖν ἔχειν ταῦτα δοκεῖ; =how does this situation seem to you? Just., D. 3, 5 τὸ … ὡσαύτως ἀεὶ ἔχων) ἄλλως 1 Ti 5:25. οὕτως (Antig. Car. 20; Cebes 4, 1; POxy 294, 11 [22 A.D.] εἰ ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; TestSol 20:8; Jos., Ant. 15, 261; Just., D. 3:5 οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει) Ac 7:1; 12:15; 17:11; 24:9. τὸ καλῶς ἔχον what is right 1 Cl 14:2 (Michel 543, 12 [c. 200 B.C.] καλῶς ἔχον ἐστὶ τιμᾶσθαι τοὺς εὔνους ἄνδρας). τὸ νῦν ἔχον for the present Ac 24:25 (cp. Plut., Mor. 749a; Lucian, Anachars. 40, Catapl. 13 τὸ δὲ νῦν ἔχον μὴ διάτριβε; Tob 7:11).
    ⓑ pers. be (in a certain way) πῶς ἔχουσιν how they are Ac 15:36 (cp. Gen 43:27; Jos., Ant. 4, 112). ἑτοίμως ἔ. be ready, hold oneself in readiness w. inf. foll. (BGU 80, 17 [II A.D.] ἡ Σωτηρία ἑτοίμως ἔχουσα καταγράψαι; Da 3:15 LXX; Jos., Ant. 13, 6; Just., D. 50, 1) 21:13; 2 Cor 12:14; 1 Pt 4:5. Also ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (s. ἕτοιμος b end). εὖ ἔ. be well-disposed πρός τινα toward someone Hs 9, 10, 7 (cp. Demosth. 9, 63 ἥδιον ἔχειν πρός τινα; SIG 1094, 4 φιλανθρώπως ἔχει πρὸς πάντας). κακῶς ἔ. be sick (Aristoph. et al.; POxy 935, 15; Ezk 34:4) Mt 4:24; 8:16; 9:12b; 17:15 v.l. (see πάσχω 2). καλῶς ἔ. be well, healthy (Epict. 1, 11, 4; PGen 54, 8; PFlor 230, 24) Mk 16:18; ἐσχάτως ἔ. (s. ἐσχάτως) 5:23; κομψότερον ἔ. feel better (κομψῶς ἔ.: Epict. 2, 18, 14; 3, 10, 13; PParis 18; PTebt 414, 10 ἐὰν κομψῶς σχῶ) J 4:52.
    ⑪ to be closely associated, in a variety of renderings, hold fast, be next to, be next, mid. (Hom. et al.) in NT only ptc.
    ⓐ of proper situation or placement, esp. of inner belonging hold fast, cling to. The ‘to’ of belonging and the ‘with’ of association are expressed by the gen. (Theognis 1, 32 ἀεὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο=ever hold fast to the good people; X., Oec. 6, 1; Pla., Leg. 7, 811d; Lucian, Hermot. 69 ἐλπίδος οὐ μικρᾶς ἐχόμενα λέγεις; Sallust. 14 p. 26, 24 τ. θεῶν; Philo, Agr. 101 τὰ ἀρετῆς ἐχόμενα; Jos., Ant. 10, 204 οὐδὲν ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας ἐχόμενον, C. Ap. 1, 83 παλαιᾶς ἱστορίας ἐχόμενον; Just., A I, 68, 1 λόγου καὶ ἀληθείας ἔχεσθαι; Tat. 33, 1 μανίας ἔχεται πολλῆς; Ath., R. 48, 3 λόγῳ … ἀληθείας ἐχομένῳ) τὰ ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας things that belong to salvation Hb 6:9.
    ⓑ of proximity
    α. spatial, to be next to someth: ἐχόμενος neighboring (Isocr. 4, 96 νῆσος; Hdt. 1, 134 al. οἱ ἐχόμενοι=‘the neighbors’; Diod S 5, 15, 1; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 71 §294; Arrian, Peripl. 7, 2; PParis 51, 5 and oft. in pap; 1 Esdr 4:42; Jos., Ant. 6, 6 πρὸς τὰς ἐχομένας πόλεις; 11, 340) κωμοπόλεις Mk 1:38.
    β. temporal, to be next, immediately following (Thu. 6, 3, 2 τ. ἐχομένου ἔτους al.; SIG 800, 15; PRev 34, 20; PAmh 49, 4; PTebt 124, 43; LXX) τῇ ἐχομένῃ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ, as Polyb. 3, 112, 1; 5, 13, 9; 2 Macc 12:39; Jos., Ant. 6, 235; 7, 18 al.; cp. εἰς τὴν ἐχομένην [i.e. ἡμέραν] PMich 173, 16 [III B.C.]) on the next day Lk 13:33 (v.l. ἐρχομένῃ); Ac 20:15; w. ἡμέρᾳ added (PAmh 50, 17) 21:26. τῷ ἐχομένῳ σαββάτῳ 13:44 v.l. (for ἐρχομένῳ; cp. 1 Macc 4:28, where the witnesses are similarly divided).—On the whole word HHanse, ‘Gott Haben’ in d. Antike u. im frühen Christentum ’39.—B. 641; 740. EDNT. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἔχω

  • 10 ἔρχομαι

    ἔρχομαι impv. ἔρχου, ἔρχεσθε; impf. ἠρχόμην; fut. ἐλεύσομαι; 2 aor. ἦλθον, and the mixed forms ἦλθα (W-S. §13, 13; B-D-F §81, 3; Mlt-H. 208f), ἤλθοσαν (LXX; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 12 [Stone p. 54]), ἤλθωσαν (GJs 21:1; ἤλθωσιν17:3; s. deStrycker p. 246f); pf. ἐλήλυθα; plpf. 3 sg. ἐληλύθει 3 Km 10:10, 12 (Hom.+). This multipurpose marker is not readily susceptible to precise classification, but the following outline of usage covers the principal lines:
    ① of movement from one point to another, with focus on approach from the narrator’s perspective, come
    ⓐ of movement itself
    α. abs. ἔρχου καὶ ἔρχεται Mt 8:9; Lk 7:8; cp. Mt 22:3; Lk 14:17; J 5:7; Ac 10:29; 1 Cor 11:34; Rv 8:3 al. κραυγὴ γέγονεν• ἰδοὺ ὁ νυμφίος ἔρχεται Mt 25:6 v.l. (Jos., Bell. 5, 272 βοῶντες• ὁ υἱὸς ἔρχεται). οἱ ἐρχόμενοι καὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες Mk 6:31. ἦλθε δρομέως came on the run AcPl Ha 4, 30 (TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 24 [Stone p. 12] ἦλθεν δρομαία ἐπʼ αὐτούς=Sarah came to them on the run). Also w. the specif. mng. come back, return (Hom. et al.; Bar 4:37; 1 Esdr 5:8; Tob 2:3 BA) J 4:27; 9:7; Ro 9:9; of Joseph GJs 16:2 (foll. by κατέβη of Mary; both Joseph and Mary ‘return’ from an uninhabited area). Come before the judgment-seat of God 2 Cl 9:4. Come in a hostile sense Lk 11:22 P75 et al. (cp. X., Hellenica 6, 5, 43).
    β. used w. prepositions: ἀπό w. gen. of place (Herodian 1, 17, 8 ἀ. τοῦ λουτροῦ; ἀ. βορρᾶς PsSol 11:3; ἀ. τῆς μεγάλης πόλεως TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 30 [Stone p. 4]) Mk 7:1; 15:21; Ac 18:2; 2 Cor 11:9; w. gen. of pers. Mk 5:35; J 3:2b; Gal 2:12.—ἐκ w. gen. of place Lk 5:17; J 3:31b.—εἰς w. acc. of place into Mt 2:11; 8:14; 9:1; Mk 1:29; 5:38; Lk 23:42 (cp. 1bα below, end); J 11:30; εἰς Κόρινθον AcPl Ha 6, 2 (εἰς τὸν παράδεισον TestAbr A 11 p. 90, 1 [Stone p. 28]). to, toward J 11:38; 20:3. εἰς τὸ πέραν Mt 8:28; 16:5. εἰς τ. ἑορτήν to the festival, i.e. to celebrate it J 4:45b; 11:56. ἐκ … εἰς J 4:54.—διά w. gen. of place and εἰς Mk 7:31; ὁ … ἐρχόμενος διᾶ τῆς θύρας one who enters by the gate 10:2 (P75).—μετά w. gen. of pers. ἵνα ἔλθῶ μετʼ αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ δόξη τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ so that I might return with him in the glory of his Father AcPl Ha 10, 8. ἐν w. dat. of the thing w. which one comes Ro 15:29. ἐν ῥάβδῳ 1 Cor 4:21, also to denote the state of being in which one comes ἐν πνεύματι Lk 2:27; cp. Ro 15:32; w. dat. of the pers. who accompanies someone Jd 14.—ἐπί w. acc. of place over Mt 14:28, to (JosAs 26:5; ParJer 8:4; Jos., Ant. 7, 16; Just., D. 88, 3) Lk 19:5; Ac 12:10, 12; w. acc. of thing to (PTor I, 1; II, 29 [116 B.C.] ἔρχεσθαι ἐπὶ τὸ κριτήριον; Jos., Ant. 12, 395) Mt 3:7; Mk 11:13b; w. acc. of pers. to (ἐπὶ γυναῖκα Just., A I, 33, 3) J 19:33; Ac 24:8 v.l.; against Lk 14:31 (1 Macc 5:39 ἔρχ. ἐπί τινα εἰς πόλεμον; Jos., Ant. 7, 233; Mel., P. 17, 114).—κατά w. acc. of place to Lk 10:33; Ac 16:7; AcPl Ha 2, 5.—παρά w. acc. of place to Mt 15:29; w. gen. of pers. from Lk 8:49.—πρός w. acc. of pers. to (X., Mem. 1, 2, 27; En 106:4; JosAs 3:6; Jos., Ant. 2, 106; 11, 243; Just., D. 77, 4) Mt 3:14; 7:15; Mk 9:14; Lk 1:43; J 1:29, 47; 2 Cor 13:1 and oft. ἀπό τινος (gen. of pers.) πρός τινα 1 Th 3:6.
    γ. w. an adverb of place ἄνωθεν ἔ. J 3:31. ἐκεῖ 18:3. ἐνθάδε 4:16. ὄπισθεν Mk 5:27. πόθεν (Jdth 10:12) J 3:8; 8:14; Rv 7:13. ποῦ Hb 11:8. ὧδε Mt 8:29; Ac 9:21 (ApcEsdr 5:10; ApcSed 9:4; cp. ParJer 7:16 ἐνταῦθα. The adv. w. a case funct. as prep. ἄχρι τινός Ac 11:5. ἐγγύς τινος Hv 4, 1, 9. ἕως τινός Lk 4:42 (ApcMos 34 ἐλθὲ ἕως ἐμοῦ).
    δ. w. a case, without a prep.: dat. of pers. come to someone (Aeschyl., Prom. 358; Thu. 1, 13, 3; X., An. 7, 7, 30; BGU 1041, 16 [II A.D.] ὅτι ἔρχομαί σοι) Mt 21:5 (Zech 9:9); Rv 2:5, 16.
    ε. The purpose of coming is expressed by an inf. (Eur., Med. 1270, also Palaeph. p. 62, 12; 1 Macc 16:22; Bel 40 Theod.; 1 Esdr 1:23; 5:63; TestSol 5 D ἦλθε θεάσασθαι; TestAbr B 5 p. 109, 21 [Stone p. 66] ἔρχομαι … κοιμηθῆναι; Just., D. 78, 7 ὸ̔ν ἐληλύθεισαν προσκυνῆσαι) Mt 2:2; 12:42; Mk 15:36; Lk 1:59; 3:12 al.; by a fut. ptc. (Hom. et al.) Mt 27:49; Ac 8:27; by a pres. ptc. Lk 13:6 (TestJob 9:8 αἰτοῦντες); by ἵνα J 10:10; 12:9b (TestJob 34:5; ApcMos 29); εἰς τοῦτο ἵνα Ac 9:21; διά τινα J 12:9a.
    ζ. Single forms of ἔ. are used w. other verbs to denote that a person, in order to do someth., must first come to a certain place: in parataxis ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθεν καί etc. (Ex 19:7; 2 Km 13:36; 2 Esdr 5:16; JosAs 10:6; TestJob 8:3; ApcMos 37) Mt 13:19, 25; Mk 2:18; 4:15; 5:33; 6:29; 12:9; 14:37; Lk 8:12, 47; J 6:15; 11:48; 12:22; 19:38; 20:19, 26; 21:13; 3J 3; Rv 5:7; 17:1; 21:9. ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε J 1:46; 11:34. ἔρχεσθε καὶ ὄψεσθε 1:39. A ptc. of ἔ. followed by a finite verb ἐλθών (Hdt. 2, 115; LXX; TestJob 7:1; Just., D. 8, 4 al.) Mt 2:8; 8:7; 9:10, 18 (cp. εἷς 3b; προσέρχομαι 1a); 12:44; 14:12; 18:31; 27:64; 28:13; Mk 7:25; 12:14, 42; 14:45; 16:1; Ac 16:37, 39. ἐρχόμενος Lk 13:14; 16:21; 18:5. The participial constr. is best transl. come and. In some pass. ἐλθών is to be rendered when (someone) has come J 16:8; 2 Cor 12:20; Phil 1:27 (opp. ἀπών).—Instead of the transcription ]λη λυθεισα POxy 1081, 3, read after the Coptic SJCh 88, 19–89, 1: ἐ]ληλύθεισαν.
    ⓑ of making an appearance come before the public, appear (cp. ἦλθον εἰς τόνδε τὸν κόσμον ‘I was born’ Ar. 1, 1).
    α. of Jesus as Messiah Lk 3:16; J 4:25; 7:27, 31, who for this reason (on the basis of pass. like Ps 117:26; Hab 2:3; Da 7:13 Theod.) is called ὁ ἐρχόμενος Mt 11:3; Lk 7:19f; Hb 10:37 (Hab 2:3), or ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου Mt 21:9; 23:39; Mk 11:9; Lk 13:35; 19:38; J 12:13 (in all cases Ps 117:26); also in John, in whose writings the idea of Jesus having come heaven-sent to the earth is of considerable importance J 16:28: (ὁ προφήτης) ὁ ἐρχόμενος εἰς τ. κόσμον J 6:14; 11:27 (cp. ἐρχόμενος εἰς τ. κόσμον ἐπὶ τὸ ὄρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν ParJer 9:20). Of the appearance of Jesus among humans (s. Harnack, ‘Ich bin gekommen’: ZTK 22, 1912, 1–30; AFrövig, D. Sendungsbewusstsein Jesu u. d. Geist 1924, 129ff) Mt 11:19; Lk 7:34; J 5:43; 7:28; 8:42. Foll. by the inf. of purpose Mt 5:17; 10:34f; Lk 19:10. W. ἵνα foll. J 10:10b (ἦλθον, as here, Herm. Wr. 1, 30). W. εἰς τ. κόσμον and ἵνα foll. 12:46; 18:37; εἰς κρίμα, ἵνα 9:39; w. inf. foll. 1 Ti 1:15. ἔ. ἐν σαρκί come in the flesh 1J 4:2; 2J 7; B 5:10f. εἰς σάρκα AcPlCor 1:14. ἔ διʼ ὕδατος καὶ αἵματος 1J 5:6 w. the continuation ἐν τ. ὕδατι καὶ ἐν τ. αἵματι (on the mng. of the prep. s. B-D-F §223, 3; 198, 4). ὀπίσω w. gen. come after of Christ in relation to his forerunner Mt 3:11; Mk 1:7; J 1:15, 27, 30. The idea of coming is even plainer in connection w. the coming of the Human One (Son of Man), the return of Jesus fr. his heavenly home Mt 10:23; Ac 1:11 (opp. πορεύεσθαι); 1 Cor 4:5; 11:26; 2 Th 1:10 (Just., D. 28, 2 al.). W. ἐν τῇ δόξῃ Mt 16:27; 25:31; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:26 (cp. ἔνδοξος … ἐλεύσεται Just., D. 49, 2). ἐπὶ τ. νεφελῶν μετὰ δυνάμεως καὶ δόξης Mt 24:30 (Just., D. 31, 1). ἐν νεφέλαις, νεφέλῃ etc. Mk 13:26; Lk 21:27. ἐν τ. βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ in his kingdom Mt 16:28; Lk 23:42 v.l.
    β. of forerunners of the Messiah and those who identify themselves as such: Elijah Mt 11:14; 17:10, 11, 12; Mk 9:11, 12, 13 (Just., D. 49, 1); John the Baptist Mt 11:18; Lk 7:33; J 1:31; w. εἰς μαρτυρίαν for testimony 1:7. Others, including false messiahs, false teachers, and an antichrist Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8 (ἐπὶ τ. ὀνόματί μου calling on my name); J 10:8; 2 Cor 11:4; 2 Pt 3:3; 1J 2:18.
    ② to proceed on a course, with destination in view, go (Hom. et al.; LXX) ὀπίσω τινός go with (lit. ‘after’) someone fig., of a disciple Mt 16:24; Mk 8:34 v.l.; Lk 9:23; 14:27. ἐπί τι go to someth. Mt 21:19; Mk 11:13a (w. indir. quest. foll.). πρός τινα Lk 15:20. σύν τινι J 21:3. ἔ. ὁδόν go on a journey (Hom. et al.) Lk 2:44. S. also 1bα above.
    ③ to change place or position, with implication of being brought, be brought (Hom. et al.; Thu. 6, 71, 2 χρήματα; Arrian, Anab. 2, 13, 5 ἀγγελία et al.) ὁ λύχνος the lamp is brought Mk 4:21. Sim. ἐλθούσης τ. ἐντολῆς when the commandment came Ro 7:9.
    ④ to take place, come
    ⓐ of time
    α. of temporal increments ἔρχονται ἡμέραι in future sense (1 Km 2:31; Am 8:11) Lk 23:29; Hb 8:8 (Jer 38:31); ἐλεύσονται ἡμ. Mt 9:15; Mk 2:20; Lk 5:35; 17:22; 21:6 (TestSol 13:7 C; Just., D. 40, 2). ἦλθεν ἡ ἡμέρα 22:7; Rv 6:17.—ἔρχεται ὥρα ὅτε the time is coming when J 4:21, 23; 5:25; 16:25; also ἔ. ὥρα ἐν ᾗ J 5:28; ἔ. ὥρα ἵνα 16:2, 32. ἦλθεν ἡ ὥρα the hour has come = the hour is here Mk 14:41b; J 16:4; Rv 14:7, 15; w. ἵνα foll. J 13:1 (ἥκω P66). ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥ. ἵνα 12:23; 16:32; without ἵνα 17:1; cp. 7:30; 8:20.—ἔρχεται νύξ 9:4 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 40 §159 νυκτὸς ἐρχομένης). ἡμέρα κυρίου 1 Th 5:2. καιροί Ac 3:20 (GrBar 8:1 ὁ καιρός). τὸ πλήρωμα τ. χρόνου Gal 4:4.
    β. of events and situations that are connected w. a certain time ὁ θερισμός J 4:35. ὁ γάμος τ. ἀρνίου Rv 19:7. ἡ κρίσις 18:10. So also the ptc. ἐρχόμενος coming, future, imminent: αἰὼν ἐ. (=הָעוֹלָם הַבָּא) the age to come Mk 10:30; Lk 18:30; ἑορτὴ ἐ. the coming festival Ac 18:21 v.l.; σάββατον ἐ. 13:44; ὀργὴ ἐ. the wrath which will be revealed (at the Judgment) 1 Th 1:10. τὰ ἐρχόμενα what is to come (Is 44:7 τὰ ἐπερχόμενα) J 16:13. Of God in Rv ὁ ὢν κ. ὁ ἦν κ. ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1:4, 8; 4:8.
    ⓑ of events and circumstances
    α. of natural or sensory phenomena (Hom. et al.; also TestAbr A 19 p. 102, 10 [Stone p. 52]; βροντῆς … καὶ ἀστραπῆς ἐλθούσης; ApcEsdr 5:7 νεφέλη) ποταμοί Mt 7:25, 27. κατακλυσμός Lk 17:27. λιμός Ac 7:11. Of rain ἔ. ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς come upon the earth Hb 6:7. Sim. of the coming down of birds fr. the air Mt 13:4, 32; Mk 4:4; of a voice resounding fr. heaven ἦλθεν φωνὴ ἐκ τ. οὐρανοῦ J 12:28 (Test Abr A 10 p. 88, 15 and 14 p. 94, 25 [Stone p. 24; p. 36]; Just., D. 88, 8; cp. Il. 10, 139; En 13:8; TestSol 1:3 VW; TestJob 3:1; ParJer 9:12; ApcEsdr 7:13).
    β. of transcendent and moral-spiritual phenomena: of spiritual coming of God come, appear J 14:23; of Christ ibid. and vss. 3, 18, 28; of the Paraclete 15:26; 16:7, 13.—ἡ ἀποστασία 2 Th 2:3. ἡ βασιλεία τ. θεοῦ Mt 6:10; Lk 11:2 (MBurrows, JBL 74, ’55, 1–8); 17:20; 22:18 al.; 1 Cl 42:3.—τ. σκάνδαλα Mt 18:7; Lk 17:1. τὰ ἀγαθά Ro 3:8 (cp. Jer. 17:6). τὸ τέλειον 1 Cor 13:10. ἡ πίστις Gal 3:23, 25.
    ⑤ ἐ. in var. prepositional combinations ἔ. ἐκ τ. θλίψεως have suffered persecution Rv 7:14. ἔ. εἰς τὸ χεῖρον Mk 5:26 (Witkowski no. 36, 12=White no. 35 τοῦ παιδίου εἰς τὰ ἔσχατα ἐληλυθότος of a child in desperate circumstances; TestAbr A 20 p. 102, 27 [Stone p. 52] εἰς θάνατον ἔρχονται). εἰς τοσαύτην ἀπόνοιαν, ὥστε 1 Cl 46:7 (Hyperid. 2, 5 εἰς τοῦτο ἀπονοίας ἔ., ὥστε). εἰς πειρασμόν Mk 14:38 (cp. Himerius, Or. 48 [Or. 14], 19 εἰς ἐπιθυμίαν ἐλθεῖν). εἰς ἀπελεγμόν Ac 19:27. εἰς τὴν ὥραν ταύτην J 12:27. ἔ. εἰς κρίσιν submit to judgment (letter of Philip in Demosth. 12, 11; 16; ApcEsdr 2:26 ἔλθωμεν ὁμοῦ εἰς κρίσιν) 5:24. εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν 1 Ti 2:4; 2 Ti 3:7 (Polyb. 6, 9, 12; Appian, Mithr. 31 §123 ἔρχεσθαι ἐς γνῶσίν τινος; Cebes 12, 3 εἰς τὴν ἀληθινὴν παιδείαν ἐλθεῖν; TestSol 20:5 εἰς ἔννοιαν ἐλθεῖν; Just., D. 90, 1 οὐδʼ εἰς ἔννοιαν τούτου ἐλθεῖν). ἵνα ἔλθω εἰς τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀνάστασιν so that I might realize the resurrection of the dead (cp. ApcMos 10 εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς ἀναστάσεως) AcPlCor 2:35. εἰς φανερόν come to light Mk 4:22; Lk 8:17. εἰς προκοπήν result in furthering Phil 1:12 (cp. Wsd 15:5). ἔ. εἴς τι of the writer of a letter come to, i.e. deal with someth. (a new subject) 2 Cor 12:1 (cp. w. ἐπὶ Ar. 2:1 al.; Just., D. 42 ἐπὶ τὸν λόγον). εἰς ἑαυτόν come to oneself (=to one’s senses) (Diod S 13, 95, 2; Epict. 3, 1, 15; TestJos 3:9; GrBar 17:3; Sb 5763, 35) Lk 15:17. ἐπί τινα of serious misfortunes come over someone (Dt 28:15; Jos., Ant. 4, 128) J 18:4 (cp. PIand 21, 2 ἡμῶν τὰ ἐρχόμενα οὐκ οἶδα); tortures IRo 5:3; blood upon the murderers Mt 23:35; the Holy Spirit comes down upon someone (cp. Ezk 2:2; Just., D. 49, 7; 88, 1 ἐλεύσεσθαι ἐπʼ αὐτὸν τὰς δυνάμεις) Mt 3:16; Lk 11:2 v.l.; Ac 19:6; peace Mt 10:13; the wrath of God Eph 5:6; cp. Col 3:6; ἡ βασιλεία Lk 11:2 D; ἔ. πρὸς τ. Ἰησοῦν come to Jesus = become disciples of Jesus J 5:40; 6:35, 37, 44f, 65; πρὸς τ. πατέρα 14:6. ἔ. ὑπὸ τὸν ζυγόν 1 Cl 16:17 (cp. PsSol 18, 7f. ὑπὸ ῥάβδον παιδείας Χριστοῦ).—Not infreq. the pres. ἔρχομαι has the mng. of the fut.: Mt 17:11; Lk 12:54 (corresp. to καύσων ἔσται vs. 55); 19:13; J 14:3. Esp. also ἕως ἔρχομαι until I shall come J 21:22f; 1 Ti 4:13; Hs 5, 2, 2; 9, 10, 5; 6; 9, 11, 1. S. B-D-F §323; 383, 1; Rob. 869. S. also 4aα above.—B. 696. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἔρχομαι

  • 11 μετά

    μετά [[pron. full] ᾰ, but [pron. full] ᾱ in S.Ph. 184 (s. v. l., lyr.)], poet. [full] μεταί, dub., only in μεταιβολία; [dialect] Aeol., [dialect] Dor., Arc. πεδά (q.v.): Prep. with gen., dat., and acc. (Cf. Goth.
    A mip, OHG. miti, mit 'with'.)
    A WITH GEN. (in which use μ. gradually superseded σύν, q.v.),
    I in the midst of, among, between, with pl. Nouns,

    μετ' ἄλλων λέξο ἑταίρων Od.10.320

    ;

    μ. δμώων πῖνε καὶ ἦσθε 16.140

    ;

    τῶν μέτα παλλόμενος Il.24.400

    ;

    πολλῶν μ. δούλων A.Ag. 1037

    ;

    μ. ζώντων εἶναι S.Ph. 1312

    ;

    ὅτων οἰκεῖς μέτα Id.OT 414

    ;

    μ. τῶν θεῶν διάγουσα Pl.Phd. 81a

     (but κεῖσθαι μ. τινός with one, S.Ant.73): sts. the pl. is implied, μετ' οὐδενὸς ἀνδρῶν ναίειν, i.e. among no men, Id.Ph. 1103 (lyr.), etc.
    II in common, along with, by aid of (implying a closer union than σύν)

    , μ. Βοιωτῶν ἐμάχοντο Il.13.700

    , cf. 21.458; συνδιεπολέμησαν

    τὸν πόλεμον μ. Ἀθηναίων IG12.108.7

    ;

    μ. ξυμμάχων ξυγκινδυνεύσειν Th.8.24

    , cf. 6.79, etc.; μ. τῆς βουλῆς in co-operation with the council, IG12.91.10: in this sense freq. (not in ll., Od., Pi., rare in early Gr.) with sg., μετ' Ἀθηναίης with, i.e. by aid of, Athena, h.Hom. 20.2;

    μ. εἷο Hes.Th. 392

    ; μ. τινὸς πάσχειν, δρᾶν τι, A.Pr. 1067 (anap.), S.Ant.70; μ. τινὸς εἶναι to be on one's side, Th.3.56;

    μ. τοῦ ἠδικημένου ἔσεσθαι X.Cyr.2.4.7

    ;

    μ. τοῦ νόμου καὶ τοῦ δικαίου Pl.Ap. 32b

    : generally, with, together with, with Subst. in sg. first in Hdt. (in whom it is rare exc. in the phrase οἱ μ. τινός, v. infr.), as

    κοιμᾶσθαι μ. τινός 3.68

    , Timocl.22.2;

    εὕδειν μ. τινός Hdt.3.84

    ; οἱ μ. τινός his companions, Id.1.86, al., Pl.Prt. 315b: freq. with Prons.,

    μετ' αὐτοῦ S. Ant.73

    ;

    μετ' ἐμοῦ Ar.Ach. 661

     (anap.), etc.: less freq. of things,

    στέγη πυρὸς μ. S.Ph. 298

    ;

    μ. κιθάρας E.IA 1037

     (lyr.);

    μ. τυροῦ Ar.Eq. 771

    , etc.;

    τὴν δίαιταν μεθ' ὅπλων ἐποιήσαντο Th.1.6

    , cf. E.Or. 573;

    ὄχλος μ. μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων Ev.Matt.26.47

    : indicating community of action and serving to join two subjects, Κλεομένης μετὰ Ἀθηναίων C. and the Athenians, Th.1.126: with pl. Verb,

    Δημοσθένης μ. τῶν ξυστρατήγων σπένδονται Id.3.109

    , etc.; of things, in conjunction with,

    ἰσχύν τε καὶ κάλλος μετὰ ὑγιείας Pl.R. 591b

    ; γῆρας μ. πενίας ib. 330a.
    III later, in one's dealings with,

    ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς μετ' αὐτῶν Act.Ap. 14.27

    ;

    ὁ ποιήσας τὸ ἔλεος μετ' αὐτοῦ Ev.Luc.10.36

    ;

    τί ἡμῖν συνέβη μ. τῶν ἀρχόντων PAmh.2.135.15

     (ii A.D.): even of hostile action,

    σὺ ποιεῖς μετ' ἐμοῦ πονηρίαν LXX Jd.11.27

    , cf. 15.3;

    πολεμῆσαι μ. τινός Apoc.12.7

    , cf. Apollod.Poliorc.190.4 codd. (but μ. may be a gloss), Wilcken Chr.23.10 (v A.D.), OGI201.3 (Nubia, vi A. D.): to denote the union of persons with qualities or circumstances, and so to denote manner,

    τὸ ἄπραγμον.. μὴ μ. τοῦ δραστηρίου τεταγμένον Th.2.63

    , etc.;

    ἱκετεῦσαι μ. δακρύων Pl.Ap. 34c

    ;

    οἴκτου μέτα S.OC 1636

    ;

    μετ' ἀσφαλείας μὲν δοξάζομεν, μετὰ δέους δὲ.. ἐλλείπομεν Th.1.120

    , cf. IG22.791.12;

    μ. ῥυθμοῦ βαίνοντες Th.5.70

    ; ὅσα μετ' ἐλπίδων λυμαίνεται ib. 103, etc.;

    ψυχὴν ὁσίως βεβιωκυῖαν καὶ μετ' ἀληθείας Pl.Grg. 526c

    , cf. Phdr. 249a, 253d; also, by means of,

    μετ' ἀρετῆς πρωτεύειν X.Mem. 3.5.8

    ;

    γράφε μ. μέλανος PMag.Lond.121.226

    .
    2 serving to join two predicates, γενόμενος μ. τοῦ δυνατοῦ καὶ ξυνετός, i.e. δυνατός τε καὶ ξυνετός, Th.2.15;

    ὅταν πλησιάζῃ μ. τοῦ ἅπτεσθαι Pl.Phdr. 255b

    .
    IV rarely of Time, μ. τοῦ γυμνάζεσθαι ἠλείψαντο, for ἅμα, Th.1.6; μετ' ἀνοκωχῆς during.., Id.5.25.
    B WITH DAT., only poet., mostly [dialect] Ep.:
    I between, among others, but without the close union which belongs to the genitive, and so nearly = ἐν, which is sts. exchanged with it,

    μ. πρώτοισι.. ἐν πυμάτοισι Il.11.64

    :
    1 of persons, among, in company with,

    μετ' ἀθανάτοισι Il.1.525

    ;

    μετ' ἀνθρώποις B.5.30

    ;

    μ. κόραισι Νηρῆος Pi.O.2.29

    ; μ. τριτάτοισιν ἄνασσεν in the third generation (not μ. τριτάτων belonging to it), Il.1.252; of haranguing an assembly,

    μετ' Ἀργείοις ἀγορεύεις 10.250

    , etc.; between, of two parties,

    φιλότητα μετ' ἀμφοτέροισι βάλωμεν 4.16

    .
    2 of things, μ. νηυσίν, ἀστράσι, κύμασιν, 13.668, 22.28, Od.3.91;

    δεινὸν δ' ἐστὶ θανεῖν μ. κύμασιν Hes. Op. 687

    ;

    χαῖται δ' ἐρρώοντο μ. πνοιῇς ἀνέμοιο Il.23.367

    ;

    αἰετὼ.. ἐπέτοντο μ. π. ἀ. Od.2.148

    .
    3 of separate parts of persons, between, μ. χερσὶν ἔχειν to hold between, i.e. in, the hands, Il.11.4, 184, S. Ph. 1110 (lyr.), etc.;

    τὸν μ. χ. ἐρύσατο Il.5.344

    ; ὅς κεν.. πέσῃ μ. ποσσὶ γυναικός, of a child being born, 'to fall between her feet', 19.110; so μ. γένυσσιν, γαμφηλῇσιν, 11.416, 13.200;

    μ. φρεσί 4.245

    , etc.
    II to complete a number, besides, over and above, αὐτὰρ ἐγὼ πέμπτος μ. τοῖσιν ἐλέγμην I reckoned myself to be with them a fifth, Od.9.335, cf. Il.3.188; Οὖτιν.. πύματον ἔδομαι μ. οἷς ἑτάροισι last to complete the number, i.e. after, Od.9.369, cf. A.Pers. 613, Theoc.1.39, 17.84.
    III c. dat. sg., only of collect. Nouns (or the equivalent of such,

    μεθ' αἵματι καὶ κονίῃσιν Il.15.118

    ),

    μ. στροφάλιγγι κονίης 21.503

    ;

    στρατῷ 22.49

    ;

    μ. πρώτῃ ἀγορῇ 19.50

    , etc.;

    μετ' ἀνδρῶν.. ἀριθμῷ Od.11.449

    ;

    μετ' ἄλλῳ λαῷ A.Ch. 365

     (lyr.).
    I of motion, into the middle of, coming into or among, esp. where a number of persons is implied,

    ἵκοντο μ. Τρῶας καὶ Ἀχαιούς Il.3.264

    ;

    μ. φῦλα θεῶν 15.54

    , cf. Od.3.366, al.;

    μ. μῶλον Ἄρηος Il.16.245

    ;

    μ. λαὸν Ἀχαιών 5.573

    , al.; μ. στρατόν, μεθ' ὅμιλον, μεθ' ὁμήγυριν, 5.589, 14.21, 20.142: so of birds, ὥς τ' αἰγυπιὸς μ. χῆνας (though this may be referred to signf. 2), 17.460; of things,

    εἴ τινα φεύγοντα σαώσειαν μ. νῆας 12.123

    ; με μ... ἔριδας καὶ νείκεα βάλλει plunges me into them, 2.376; of place,

    μ. τ' ἤθεα καὶ νομὸν ἵππων 6.511

    ; δράγματα μετ' ὄγμον πῖπτον into the midst of the furrow, 18.552.
    2 in pursuit or quest of, of persons, sts. in friendlysense, βῆ ῥ' ἰέναι μ. Νέστορα went to seek Nestor, Il.10.73, cf. 15.221: sts. in hostile sense, βῆναι μ. τινά to go after, pursue him, 5.152, 6.21, al.; also of things, πλεῖν μ. χαλκόν to sail in quest of it, Od.1.184; ἵκηαι μ. πατρὸς ἀκουήν in search of news of thy father, 2.308, cf. 13.415;

    οἴχονται μ. δεῖπνον Il.19.346

    ; πόλεμον μέτα θωρήσσοντο they armed for the battle, 20.329; ὡπλίζοντο μεθ' ὕλην prepared to seek after wood, 7.418, cf. 420;

    μ. δούρατος ᾤχετ' ἐρωήν 11.357

    ;

    μ. γὰρ δόρυ ᾔει οἰσόμενος 13.247

    .
    II of sequence or succession,
    1 of Place, after, behind, λαοὶ ἕπονθ', ὡς εἴ τε μ. κτίλον ἕσπετο μῆλα like sheep after the bell-wether, Il.13.492, cf. Od.6.260, 21.190, h.Ven.69;

    ἔσχατοι μ. Κύνητας οἰκέουσι Hdt.4.49

    ; μ. τὴν θάλασσαν beyond, on the far side of the sea, Theo Sm.p.122 H.
    2 of Time, after, next to,

    μ. δαῖτας Od.22.352

    ; μεθ' Ἕκτορα πότμος ἑτοῖμος after Hector thy death is at the door, Il.18.96;

    μ. Πάτροκλόν γε θανόντα 24.575

    , cf. Hdt. 1.34;

    μετ' εὐχάν A.Ag. 231

     (lyr.), etc.;

    μ. ταῦτα

     thereupon, there-after,

    h.Merc.126

    , etc.;

    τὸ μ. ταῦτα Pl.Phlb. 34c

    ;

    τὸ μ. τοῦτο Id.Criti. 120a

    ; μετ' ὀλίγον ὕστερον shortly after, Id.Lg. 646c;

    μ. μικρόν Luc. Demon.8

    ;

    μ. ἡμέρας τρεῖς μ. τὴν ἄφεδρον Dsc.2.19

    ;

    μ. ἔτη δύο J.BJ 1.13.1

    ;

    μ. τρίτον ἔτος Thphr.HP4.2.8

    ; μ. χρυσόθρονον ἠῶ after daybreak, h.Merc. 326: but μετ' ἡμέρην by day, opp. νυκτός, Hdt.2.150, cf. Pl.Phdr. 251e, etc.; μεθ' ἡμέραν, opp. νύκτωρ, E.Ba. 485;

    μ. νύκτας Pi.N.6.6

    ; μ. τὸν ἑξέτη καὶ τὴν ἑξέτιν after the boy or girl has attained the age of six years, Pl.Lg. 794c.
    3 in order of Worth, Rank, etc., next after, following [comp] Sup.,

    κάλλιστος ἀνὴρ.. τῶν ἄλλων Δαναῶν μετ' ἀμύμονα Πηλεΐωνα Il.2.674

    , cf. 7.228, 12.104, Od.2.350, Hdt.4.53, X.Cyr.7.2.11, etc.;

    κοῦροι οἳ.. ἀριστεύουσι μεθ' ἡμέας Od.4.652

    , cf. Isoc.9.18: where [comp] Sup. is implied,

    ὃς πᾶσι μετέπρεπε.. μ. Πηλεΐωνος ἑταῖρον Il.16.195

    , cf. 17.280, 351; μ. μάκαρας next to the gods, A.Th. 1080 (anap.); also μάχεσθαι μ. πολλοὺς τῶν Ἑλλήνων to be inferior in fighting to many.., Philostr.Her.6.
    III after, according to, μ. σὸν καὶ ἐμὸν κῆρ as you and I wish, Il.15.52;

    μετ' ἀνέρος ἴχνι' ἐρευνῶν 18.321

    ;

    μετ' ἴχνια βαῖνε Od.2.406

    .
    IV generally, among, between, as with dat. (B.I), μ. πάντας ὁμήλικας ἄριστος best among all, Il.9.54, cf. Od.16.419;

    μ. πληθύν Il.2.143

    ; μ. τοὺς τετελευτηκότας including those who have died, PLond.2.260.87 (i A.D.);

    μ. χεῖρας ἔχειν Hdt.7.16

    . β', Th.1.138, POxy.901.9 (iv A.D.), cf. X.Ages.2.14, etc.
    D μετά with all cases can be put after its Subst., and is then by anastrophe μέτα, Il.13.301, but not when the ult. is elided, 17.258, Od.15.147.
    E abs. as ADV., among them, with them, Il.2.446, 477, etc.; with him,

    οὐκ οἶον, μ. καὶ Γανυμήδεα A.R.3.115

    .
    II and then, next afterwards, opp. πρόσθε, Il.23.133.
    III thereafter, 15.67, Hdt.1.88, 128, 150, A.Ag. 759 (lyr.), etc.; μ. γάρ τε καὶ ἄλγεσι τέρπεται ἀνήρ one feels pleasure even in troubles, when past, Od.15.400; μ. δέ, for ἔπειτα δέ, Hdt.1.19, Luc.DMort.9.2, etc.
    F μέτα, -μέτεστι, Od.21.93, Parm.9.4, Hdt.1.88, 171, S.Ant. 48,etc.
    I of community or participation, as in μεταδίδωμι, μετέχω, usu. c. gen. rei.
    2 of action in common with another, as in μεταδαίνυμαι, μεταμέλπομαι, etc., c. dat. pers.
    II in the midst of, of space or time, as in

    μεταδήμιος, μεταδόρπιος 1

    ; between, as in μεταίχμιον, μεταπύργιον.
    III of succession of time, as in

    μεταδόρπιος 2

    , μετακλαίω, μεταυτίκα.
    IV of pursuit, as in μεταδιώκω, μετέρχομαι.
    V of letting go, as in μεθίημι, μεθήμων.
    VI after, behind, as in μετάφρενον, opp. πρόσθε.
    VII reversely, as in μετατρέπω, μεταστρέφω.
    VIII most freq. of change of place, condition, plan, etc., as in μεταβαίνω, μεταβάλλω, μεταβουλεύω, μεταγιγνώσκω, etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > μετά

  • 12 ἥκω

    ἥκω, Il.5.478: [tense] impf. ἧκον (v. infr.): [tense] fut. ἥξω (v. infr.); [dialect] Dor.
    A

    ἡξῶ Theoc.4.47

    , Call.Fr.1.65 P. (in [dialect] Dor. and Hom. more commonly ἵκω): all other tenses late; [tense] aor. 1 part.

    ἥξας Paus.2.11.5

    , Gal.6.56, 10.609: [tense] pf.

    ἧκα Philostr.VA3.24

    , Scymn.62, [ per.] 1pl.

    ἥκαμεν UPZ72.9

     (ii B.C.), CIG4762 (Egypt, i A.D.), [dialect] Dor. ἥκαμες f.l. in Plu.2.225b, [ per.] 2pl.

    ἥκατε PGrenf.2.36.18

     (i B.C.), [ per.] 3pl.

    ἥκασι LXX4 Ki.20.14

    , Ev.Marc.8.3; inf.

    ἡκέναι UPZ6.30

     (ii B.C.): [tense] plpf.

    ἥκεσαν J.AJ19.1.14

    : —[voice] Med., [tense] pres. subj.

    ἥκηται Aret.SD2.1

    : [tense] fut. ἥξομαι v.l. in M.Ant. 2.4:—to have come, be present, prop. in a [tense] pf. sense, with [tense] impf. ἧκον as [tense] plpf., I had come, and [tense] fut. ἥξω as [tense] fut. [tense] pf., I shall have come,

    μάλα τηλόθεν ἥκω Il.5.478

    , cf. Od.13.325, Pi.O.4.12 ( ἵκω codd. vett.): [tense] impf.

    ἧκον A.Pr. 661

    , Th.1.91, al., Pl.R. 327c, Hdt.8.50, etc.: [tense] fut.

    ἥξω A.Pr. 103

    , al., E.Andr. 738, Ar. Pax 265, Orac. ap. Th.2.54, etc.; ἧκε imper., S.Aj. 1116, Ar. Pax 275, X.Cyr.4.5.25;

    ἡκέτω E.Rh. 337

    :—Constr. mostly with εἰς, Hdt.8.50, A.Ch.3, etc.;

    παρά τινα Hdt.7.157

    , Th.1.137;

    πρός τινα A.Ch. 659

    ;

    πρὸς δαίμονα S.Fr. 770

    ; esp. in worship,

    ἥκω πρὸς τὴν κυρίαν Ἶσιν OGI186.6

     (Egypt, i B.C.), cf. Ev.Jo.6.37;

    πρὸς πόλιν S.OC 734

    ; ἐπί τινα to set upon, attack, Pl.R. 336b, Aeschin. 2.178; but ἥ. ἐπὶ τὸ στράτευμα to have come to fetch the army, X. An.7.6.2;

    οἱ ἐπὶ ταῦθ' ἥκοντες D.18.28

    ;

    ἐπ' ὀλέθρῳ E.IA 886

     (troch.);

    περὶ σπονδῶν X.An.2.3.4

    : c. acc.,

    ἥξεις ποταμόν A.Pr. 717

    , cf. 724, 730;

    ἥ. δῆμον τὸν Λυρκείου S.Fr.271.6

    , cf. E.Ba.1;

    ἥκουσιν αὐτῷ ἄγγελοι X.Cyr.5.3.26

    ; ἐς ταὐτὸν ἥ. to have come to the same point, to agree, E.Hec. 748, Hipp. 273: with Adv. of motion, ἥ. ἐνθάδε, δεῦρο, S.Ph. 377, D.19.58;

    βῆναι κεῖθεν ὅθενπερ ἥκει S.OC 1227

    : c. neut. Pron.,

    αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἥκω παρά σε Pl.Prt. 310e

    ; ἐρωτώμενοι ὅ τι ἥκοιεν for what they had come, X.HG4.5.9: c. acc. cogn.,

    ὁδὸν μακρὰν ἥκειν Id.Cyr.5.5.42

    : c.inf., μανθάνειν γὰρ ἥκομεν we are here to learn, S. OC12.
    b διὰ μάχης, δι' ὀργῆς ἥκειν, A.Supp. 475, S.OC 905; cf.

    διά A.

     IV.
    c with an Adv. folld. by gen.,

    οὕτω πόρρω σοφίας ἥκεις Pl.Euthd. 294e

    ; εὖ ἥκειν τινός to be well off for a thing, have plenty of it, τοῦ βίου, χρημάτων, Hdt.1.30, 5.62;

    ἑωυτῶν Id.1.102

    ;

    θεῶν χρηστῶν Id.8.111

    ; πιθανότητος Demetr.Magn. ap.D.H.Din.1; οὐκ ὁμοίως ἥ. τινός not to be equally well off in respect of.., Hdt.1.149; πῶς ἀγῶνος ἥκομεν; how have we sped in the contest? E.El. 751; ὧδε γένους ἥ. τινί to be this degree of kin to him, Id.Heracl. 213;

    ὡς δυνάμεως ἥκεις Paus.4.21.10

    ;

    ἐς μῆκος εὖ ἥκων Ael.NA4.34

    : abs., εὖ ἥκειν to be flourishing, Hdt.1.30: rarely c. gen. only, σὺ δὲ δυνάμιος ἥκεις μεγάλης thou art in great power, Id.7.157 (nisi leg. μεγάλως).
    3 to have come back, returned, D.20.73; from exile, And.2.13; αὐτίκα ἥξω I shall be back in a moment, X.An.2.1.9; ἧκέ νυν ταχύ come back soon, Ar. Pax 275;

    ἄψορρον ἥξεις A.Pr. 1021

    ;

    ἄψορρον ἥξομεν πάλιν S.El.53

    .
    4 c. part., ἥκω φέρων I have come bringing (i.e. with), Id.OC 579, cf. 357, Ar. Pax 265, Eup.22 D., Pl.Grg. 518d;

    ἧκεν ἄγων Id.Phd. 117a

    ;

    ἕτερόν τι ἥκεις ἕχων Id.Grg. 491c

    , etc.: c. [tense] fut. part., like ἔρχομαι, ἥκω φράσων, ἀγγελῶν, etc., I am going, I intend to say, E.Ph. 706, 1075, etc.
    5 to have come to be,

    θεοῖς ἔχθιστος ἥκω S.OT 1519

     (troch.), cf.Aj. 636(lyr.), El. 1201, etc.; take one's origin,

    ἀπὸ πολιτειῶν τοιούτων ἥκετε, ἐν αἷς.. Th.4.126

    .
    2 concern, relate to, ποῖ λόγος ἥκει; to what do the words relate? E.Tr. 154 (lyr.);

    εἰς ἔμ' ἥκει.. τὰ πράγματα Ar.Pl. 919

    ; εἰς ἐμὲ τὸ ἐλλεῖπον ἥξει will fall upon me, X.Cyr.1.5.13: freq. in part.,

    τὰ εἰς τοὺς κινδύνους ἥκοντα Antipho 5.81

    ; τὰ εἰς πλοῦτον ἥ. Pl.Erx. 392d; τὰ πρὸς ἔπαινον, εἰς φιλανθρωπίαν ἥ., Plb.12.15.9,28.17.2, etc.
    4 c. inf., ἧκέ μοι γένει.. πενθεῖν it has come to me by birth.., my birth lays it on me.., S.OC 738, cf. Ichn.356; καλῶς αὐτοῖς κατθανεῖν ἧκον βίου it being well for them at their age to die, E.Alc. 291.
    5 c. part., ὃ καὶ νῦν ἥκει γινόμενον which commonly happens even now, Plb.24.9.11 codd. (v.l. γενόμενον). (Prob. from same root as ἵκω.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἥκω

  • 13 ὕστερος

    A latter, last, [comp] Comp. and [comp] Sup. without any Posit. Adj. in use. (The Posit. must be looked for in Skt. úd 'up'; with ὕστερος, ὕστατος cf. Skt. [comp] Comp. and [comp] Sup. úttaras, uttamás 'higher, (later)', 'highest, (latest)'; cf. ὑστέρα.)
    A [full] ὕστερος, α, ον, latter:
    I of Place, coming after, behind,

    ὑστέρῳ ποδί E.Hipp. 1243

    , HF 1040; ὑστέρας ἔχων πώλους keeping them behind, S.El. 734;

    ὕ. λόχος X.Cyr.2.3.21

    ;

    ἐν τῷ ὑ. λόγῳ Antipho 6.14

    , cf. Pi.O.11(10).5, Pl.Grg. 503c, etc.; τὰ ὕ. the latter clauses, Plu.2.742d (s. v. l., δεύτερα Turnebus): c. gen., ὕστεροι ἡμῶν behind us, Pl.Ly. 206e, cf. Th.3.103; οὐδὲν ὑστέρα νεώς not a whit behind ( slower than) a ship, A.Eu. 251.
    II of Time, next,

    ὁ δ' ὕστερος ὄρνυτο χαλκῷ Il.5.17

    , 16.479; τῷ ὑ. ἔτει in the next year, X HG7.2.10;

    τῇ ὑ. Ὀλυμπιάδι Hdt.6.103

    ; ὑ. χρόνῳ in after time, Id.1.130, A.Ag. 702 (lyr.), etc.;

    ἐν ὑ. χρόνοις Pl.Lg. 865a

    ;

    ἐν ὑστέραισιν ἡμέραις A.Ag. 1666

     (troch.); δεκάτῃ ὑ. or ὑ. δεκάτῃ, on the [ per.] 21st day, Decr. ap. D.L.7.10, cf. Longin.Rh. p.192 H.: c. gen., later than, after,

    σεῦ ὕστερος εἶμ' ὑπὸ γαῖαν Il.18.333

    , cf. Ar.Ec. 859, Pl.Phd. 87c, al.:

    ὑ. χρόνῳ τούτων Hdt.4.166

    , 5.32, cf. Th.2.54.
    2 later, too late,

    ὕ. ἐλθών Il.18.320

    ;

    κἂν ὕ. ἔλθῃ Ar.V. 691

     (anap.);

    μῶν ὕστεραι πάρεσμεν; Id.Lys.69

    ;

    ὑ. ἀφικνεῖσθαι Th.4.90

    ; ὕ. (sc. ἐλθών) S.OT 222, Tr.92;

    Διονύσιος ὁ ὕ. D.

     the second, Arist.Pol. 1312a4.
    3 c. gen. rei, too late for,

    ὕστεροι ἀπικόμενοι τῆς συμβολῆς Hdt.6.120

    ;

    ὕ. ἐλθεῖν τοῦ σημείου Ar.V. 690

    (anap.);

    κακῶν ὕ. ἀφῖγμαι E.HF 1174

    ;

    ὕ. ἀφίκοντο τῆς μάχης μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ Pl.Lg. 698e

    .
    4 as Subst.,

    οἱ ὕ.

     posterity,

    E. Supp. 1225

    ; ἄνδρες ὕ., ὕ. βροτοί, Id.Tr.13, 1245.
    III of inferiority in Age, Worth, or Quality, γένει ὕ., i.e. younger, Il.3.215; c. gen., οὐδενὸς ὕ. second to none, S.Ph. 181(lyr.), cf. Th.1.91;

    γυναικὸς ὕ. S. Ant. 746

    ; μηδ' ἔμπροσθεν τῶν νόμων, ἀλλ' ὕ. πολιτεύου not putting yourself above the laws, but below them, Aeschin.3.23; σῶμα δεύτερον καὶ ὕ (sc. ψυχῆς) Pl.Lg. 896c; νομίσας πάντα ὕστερα εἶναι τἆλλα πρός τι that all things were secondary to.., Th.8.41.
    2 logically posterior,

    ὁ τόπος ὕ. τῆς ὕλης Plot.2.4.12

    .
    IV Adv. ὑστέρως is found only in Eccl. writers, the ascription to Plato by Ammon. Diff.p.115V., Thom.Mag.p.284 R. being now corrected from Ptol. Ascal.p.405 H., where codd. have δευτέρως: the neut. ὕστερον was used, rarely of Place, behind,

    ὀπαδεῖν ὕ. A.Fr. 475

    ;

    ὕ. τῶν ἱππέων γίγνεσθαι X.Cyr.5.3.42

    .
    2 of Time, later, afterwards, parm.8.10, Hdt.6.91, etc.; also τὸ ὕ., opp. τὸ παλαιόν, Lycurg.61;

    ὕστερα Od.16.319

    ; freq. with other words,

    ὕ. αὖτις Il.1.27

    ;

    οὔποτ' αὖθις ὕ. S.Aj. 858

    ; ἔπειτα δ' ὕ., after μέν, Antiph.270;

    εἶτα.. ὕ. Id.53.4

    ; χρόνῳ ὕ. πολλῷ a long time after, Hdt.1.171; ὕ. χρόνῳ or χρόνῳ ὕ. some time later, Th.1.8,64;

    χρόνοις ὕ. Lys.3.39

    ;

    βραχεῖ χρόνῳ ὕ. X.Cyr.5.3.52

    ;

    οὐ πολλαῖς ἡμέραις ὕ. Id.HG1.1.1

    ; ὀλίγῳ or

    ὀλίγον ὕ. Pl.R. 327c

    , Grg. 471c;

    πολλῷ ὕ. Th.2.49

    , Pl.Phd. 58a;

    οἱ ἄνθρωποι οἱ ὕ.

     posterity,

    Id.R. 415d

    ; τὰ ὕ. γράμματα the later inscriptions, Id.Chrm. 165a.
    b c. gen.,

    ὕ. τούτων Hdt.1.113

    , etc.;

    ὕ. ἔτι τούτων Id.9.83

    ; τῆς ἐμεωυτοῦ γνώμης ὕ. after my own opinion was formed, Id.2.18; τοῦ δέοντος ὕ. later than ought to be, Ar.Lys.57: c. dat. et gen.,

    ἔτεσι πολλοῖσι ὕ. τούτων Hdt.6.140

    , cf. 1.91;

    πολλῷ ὕ. τῶν Τρωϊκῶν Th.1.3

    , cf. Isoc. 19.22: folld. by

    ἤ, τεσσαρακοστῇ ἡμέρᾳ ὕ... ἢ ποτείδαια ἀπέστη Th. 1.60

    , cf. 6.4.
    3 in Adv. sense with Preps.,

    ἐς ὕστερον Od.12.126

    , Hes.Op. 351, Hdt.5.41,74, S.Ant. 1194, E.IA 720, Pl.Ti. 82b, etc.:

    ἐν ὑστέρῳ Th.3.13

    , 8.27:

    ἐξ ὑστέρου D.S.14.109

    , D.H.4.73; also

    ἐξ ὑστέρης Hdt.1.108

    , 5.106, 6.85.
    B [full] ὕστᾰτος, η, ον, last:
    I of Place,

    ἅμα θ' οἱ πρῶτοί τε καὶ ὕστατοι Il.2.281

    ; εὐθυντὴρ ὕστατος νεώς hindmost, of a rudder, A. Supp. 717;

    ἡμῖν τοῖς ὑ. κατακειμενοις Pl.Smp. 177e

    .
    II of Time,

    τίνα πρῶτον, τίνα δ' ὕ. ἐξενάριξεν; Il.11.299

    , cf. 5.703, E HF485, etc.;

    ὁ δ' ὕ. γε.. πρεσβεύεται A.Ag. 1300

    ; ἡλίου.. πρὸς ὕ. φῶς ib. 1324; τὸν ὕ. μέλψασα γόον ib. 1445;

    τοὔπος ὕ. θροεῖ S.Aj. 864

    ; ἡ ὑστάτη (sc. ἡμέρα) τῆς ὁρτῆς the last day of.., Hdt.2.151;

    ἐν τοῖσιν ὑ. φράσω Ar. Ra. 908

    ; οὐκ ἐν ὑστάτοις not among the last, E. Ion 1115;

    οἱ ὕστατοι εἰπόντες D.1.16

    , etc.; ὕστατος ἁλώσιος ἀντάσαις meeting with his downfall at last, Pi.O.10(11).41.
    III of Rank or Degree,

    οὐκ ἐν ὑστάτοις S.Tr. 315

    ; τὰ ὕ. πάσχειν, like τὰ ἔσχατα, Luc.Phal.1.5.
    IV for regul. Adv. ὑστάτως (which occurs only in Hippiatr. 20), the neut. sg. and pl. are used,

    πύματόν τε καὶ ὕστατον Od.20.116

    ;

    ὕστατα καὶ πύματα 4.685

    , 20.13;

    νῦν ὕστατα Il.1.232

    , Od.22.78;

    ὕστατα ὁρμηθέντες Hdt.8.43

    ;

    καὶ πρῶτον καὶ ὕ. Pl.Mx. 247a

    ; ὕ. δή σε προσεροῦσι, τὸ ὕ. προσειπεῖν, Id.Phd. 60a, Luc.VH1.30.
    2 in Adv. sense with Preps.,

    ἐν ὑστάτοις

     at last,

    Pl.R. 620c

    ; εἰς τὸ ὕ. extremely,

    γέρων ἐς τὸ ὕ. Luc.Herm.9

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὕστερος

  • 14 ὥρα

    ὥρα or [full] ὤρα (B), only in [dialect] Ion. form [full] ὥρη, or [full] ὤρη, some part of a sacrificial victim,
    A

    λάψεται γλῶσσαν, ὀσφῦν δασέαν, ὤρην SIG1037.2

     (Milet., iv/iii B.C.); τοὺς Ἴωνας λέγειν φασὶ τὴν κωλῆν ὥρην καὶ ὡραίαν Sch.HQ Od.12.89: but distd. fr. κωλῆ, λάψεται.. κωλῆν ἀντὶ τῆς ὤρης SIGl.c.5; cf. ἄωρος(B). (Perh. cogn. with Lat. sūra.)
    ------------------------------------
    ὥρα (C), [dialect] Ion. [full] ὥρη, ἡ: [dialect] Ep. gen. pl. ὡράων, [dialect] Ion. ὡρέων: loc. pl. ὥρασι, q. v.
    A any period, fixed by natural laws and revolutions, whether of the year, month, or day (the sense 'day' is implied in the compd. ἑπτάωρος, q. v.),

    νυκτός τε ὥραν καὶ μηνὸς καὶ ἐνιαυτοῦ X.Mem. 4.7.4

    , cf. E.Alc. 449(lyr.), Pl.R. 527d;

    τοῦ γνώμονος ἡ σκιὰ ἐπιοῦσα ἐπὶ τὰς γραμμὰς σημαίνει τὰς ὥρας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ καὶ τῆς ἡμέρας IG12(8).240

     ([place name] Samothrace): but specially,
    I in Hom., part of the year, season; mostly in pl., the seasons,

    ὅτε τέτρατον ἦλθεν ἔτος καὶ ἐπήλυθον ὧραι Od.2.107

    , 19.152;

    ἀλλ' ὅτε δὴ μῆνές τε καὶ ἡμέραι ἐξετελεῦντο, ἂψ περιτελλομένου ἔτεος, καὶ ἐπήλυθον ὧραι 11.295

    , 14.294;

    ἀλλ' ὅτε δή ῥ' ἐνιαυτὸς ἔην, περὶ δ' ἔτραπον ὧραι 10.469

    , cf. Hes. Th. 58;

    Διὸς ὧραι Od.24.344

    , cf. Pi.O.4.2;

    ὁ κύκλος τῶν ὡρέων ἐς τὠυτὸ περιιών Hdt.2.4

    , cf. 1.32;

    δυώδεκα μέρεα δασαμένους τῶν ὡρέων ἐς [τὸν ἐνιαυτόν] Id.2.4

    ; οὐ μεταλλάσσουσι αἱ ὧραι ib.77;

    περιτελλομέναις ὥραις S.OT 156

     (lyr.); πάσαις ὥραις at all seasons, Id.Fr.592.6 (lyr.), Ar.Av. 696 (anap.);

    ὧραι ἐτῶν καὶ ἐνιαυτῶν Pl.Lg. 906c

    , cf. Smp. 188a, etc.;

    τῆς.. ὥρας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ταύτης οὔσης, ἐν ᾗ ἀσθενοῦσιν ἄνθρωποι μάλιστα Th.7.47

    ; χαλεπὴ ὥ. a bad season, Pl.Prt. 344d;

    ἀ δ' ὤρα χαλέπα Alc.39

    ; ἡ ὥ. αὕτη this season, X.Cyn.7.1, cf. 5.6; κατὰ τὰς ὥρας according to the seasons, Arist.GA 786a31;

    οἱ περὶ τὴν ὥραν χρόνοι Id.Pol. 1335a37

    .—Hom. and Hes. distinguish three seasons, and express each by the sg. ὥρη, with a word added to specify each:
    a spring,

    ἔαρος.. ὥρη Il.6.148

    ;

    ὥρη εἰαρινή 2.471

    , 16.643, Od.18.367, etc.; so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., ἦρος ὥρα or ὧραι, Ar.Nu. 1008 (anap.), E.Cyc. 508 (lyr.);

    ὥρα νέα Ar.Eq. 419

    ;

    νεᾶνις E.Ph. 786

     (lyr.); v. infr. 2.
    b summer,

    θέρεος ὥρη Hes.Op. 584

    , 664;

    ὥρα θερινή X.Cyn.9.20

    , Pl.Epin. 987a, etc.
    c winter,

    χείματος ὥρη Hes.Op. 450

    ;

    ὥρῃ χειμερίῃ Od.5.485

    , Hes.Op. 494; χειμῶνος ὥρᾳ in winter, And.1.137;

    χιονοβόλος Plu.2.182e

    .—A. also names three seasons, Pr. 454sq.; an Egyptian division of the year, acc. to D.S.1.26.—A fourth first appears in Alcm.76, θέρος καὶ χεῖμα κὠπώραν τρίταν καὶ τέτρατον τὸ ϝῆρ; and in Hp.Vict.3.68,

    χειμών, ἦρ, θέρος, φθινόπωρον; ὥρας φαίνομεν ἡμεῖς ἦρος χειμῶνος ὀπώρας Ar.Av. 709

     (anap.); τετράμορφοι ὧραι E(?).Fr. 943 (hex.): later, seven seasons are named,

    ἔαρ, θέρος, ὀπώρα, φθινόπωρον, σπορητός, χειμών, φυταλιά Gal.17(1).17

    .
    b in historians, the campaigning season,

    τὸν τῆς ὥρας εἰς τὸν περίπλουν χρόνον X.HG6.2.13

    ; esp. in the phrase ὥρα ἔτους, Th.2.52, 6.70, Pl.Phdr. 229a, Lg. 952e, D.50.23, Thphr.CP3.23.2; εἰς ἔτους ὥραν next season, Plu.Per.10.
    3 the year generally,

    τῆς ὥρης μέσον θέρος Hdt.8.12

    ; ἐν τῇ πέρυσιν ὥρᾳ last year, D.56.3; εἰς ὥρας next year, Philem.116, Pl.Ep. 346c, LXX Ge.18.10, AP11.17 (Nicarch.), cf. Plu.Ages.22; also

    εἰς ἄλλας ὥρας

     hereafter,

    E.IA 122

     (lyr.);

    ἐς τὰς ὥρας τὰς ἑτέρας Ar.Nu. 562

     (lyr.);

    ἐκ τῶν ὡρῶν εἰς τὰς ὥρας Id.Th. 950

     (anap.); κἠς ὥρας κἤπειτα next year and for ever, Theoc.15.74; also

    ὥραις ἐξ ὡρᾶν Isyll.25

    ; cf. ὥρασιν.
    4 in pl., of the climate of a country, as determined by its seasons, Hdt.1.142, cf. 149, 4.199 (here perh. three harvest seasons);

    τὰς ὥ. κάλλιστα κεκρημένας Id.3.106

    ; cf. Pl.Criti. 111e, Phd. 111b; climatic conditions, Hdt.2.26.
    II time of day,

    νυκτὸς ἐν ὥρῃ h.Merc.67

    , 155, 400; αἱ ὧ. τῆς ἡμέρας the times of day, i.e. morning, noon, evening, and night, X.Mem.4.3.4; δι' ὥραν ἡμέρας by the time of day (fixed for meetings), D.Prooem.49, etc.;

    πᾶσαν ὥ. τῆς ἡμέρας Arist.Mete. 371b31

    ;

    μεσονυκτίοις ποθ' ὥραις Anacreont.31.1

    : without ἡμέρας or

    νυκτός, ἑκάστης ἡμέρας μέχρι τρίτου μέρους ὥρας Pl. Lg. 784a

    ;

    τῆς ὥρας μικρὸν πρὸ δύντος ἡλίου X.HG7.2.22

    ; ψευσθεὶς τῆς ὥ. having mistaken the hour, And.1.38; ἐποίησαν ἔξω μέσων νυκτῶν τὴν ὥραν, i.e. they prolonged the day beyond midnight, D.54.26;

    τῆς ὥρας ἐγίγνετ' ὀψέ Id.21.84

    ;

    ὀψίτερον τῆς ὥ. PTeb. 793 xi 12

     (ii B. C.);

    πολλῆς ὥρας

     it being late,

    Plb.5.8.3

    ;

    ἤδη ὥρα πολλή Ev.Marc.6.35

    ; ἄχρι πολλῆς ὥρας till late in the day, D.H.2.54.
    b duration, interval or lapse of time,

    μετὰ ἱκανὴν ὥραν τοῦ κατενεχθῆναι τὸν πέλεκυν ἐξακούεται ἡ τῆς πληγῆς φωνή S.E.M.5.69

    ; length of time, term, Ἄρτεμις ἐννέ' ἐτῶν δεκάδας βίον Ἀρτεμιδώρῳ ἔκχρησεν, τρεῖς δ' ὥραι(date.)

    ἔτι προσέθηκε Προνοίη IG12(3).1350.3

     (Thera, ii B. C.); ἐπὶ πολλὴν ὥ. for a long time, J.AJ8.4.4.
    b in ordinary life the day from sunrise to sunset was divided into twelve equal parts called ὧραι ( ὧραι καιρικαί when it was necessary to distinguish them from the ὧραι ἰσημεριναί, v. καιρικός 2 c),

    ἡμέρα ἡ.. δωδεκάωρος, τουτέστιν ἡ ἀπὸ ἀνατολῆς μέχρι δύσεως S.E.M.10.182

    ;

    οὐχὶ δώδεκά εἰσιν ὧραι τῆς ἡμέρας; Ev.Jo.11.9

    ;

    ὡράων ἀμφὶ δυωδεκάδι AP9.782

     (Paul.Sil.); the time of day was commonly given without the Art.,

    ὥρᾳ ᾱ PHamb.1.96.3

     (ii A. D.),

    τρίτης ὥρας Plu.Rom.12

    ; ὀγδόης, ἐνάτης, δεκάτης ὥ., Id.Alex.60, Aem.22, Ant.68, etc.; but we have περὶ τὴν τρίτην ὥραν, περὶ τὴν ἑνδεκάτην, Ev.Matt.20.3,6, beside περὶ ἕκτην καὶ ἐννάτην ὥ. ib.5;

    χθὲς ὥραν ἑβδόμην Ev.Jo.4.52

    , cf. IG5(1).1390.109 (Andania, i B. C.), etc.; ἐρωτᾷ σε Χαιρήμων δειπνῆσαι.. αὔριον, ἥτις ἐστὶν ιε, ἀπὸ ὥρας θ ¯ - to-morrow the 15th at 9 o'clock, POxy.110 (ii A. D.): prov., δωδεκάτης ὥ., as we say 'at the eleventh hour', Plu.Crass.17.
    c

    τὰ δυώδεκα μέρεα τῆς ἡμέρης παρὰ Βαβυλωνίων ἔμαθον οἱ Ἕλληνες Hdt. 2.109

    ; here ἡμέρη means the νυχθήμερον, and the μέρεα were each = 2 ὧραι ἰσημεριναί; these double hours (Assyr. kaš-bu) are called ὧραι by Eudox.,

    ἥμισυ ζῳδίου.., ὅ ἐστιν ὥρας ἥμισυ Ars14.11

    , cf. 16.2; cf.

    δωδεκάωρος 11

    .
    III Astrol., degree of the zodiac rising at the nativity (cf.

    ὡρονόμος 11

    ,

    ὡροσκόπος 11

    ), ὥ. μεροποσπόρος, τεκνοσπόρος, Man.4.577, 597; ἐξ ὥρης ἐσορῶν Ζεὺς Ἑρμείην Jupiter in the ascendant in aspect with Mercury, Id.3.186, cf. 32, al.
    B the fitting time or season for a thing (mostly without Art., even in [dialect] Att.), freq. in Hom. (v. infr.);

    ὥρα συνάπτει Pi.P.4.247

    ;

    ὧραι ἐπειγόμεναι Id.N.4.34

    ;

    ὅταν ὥ. ἥκῃ X.Mem.2.1.2

    ; but with Art.,

    τῆς ὥ. ἐνθυμεῖσθαι Id.Cyn.8.6

    : freq. in later writers,

    τῆς ὥρας ἐπιγενομένης Plb.2.34.3

    , etc.
    2 c. gen. rei, ὥρη κοίτοιο, μύθων, ὕπνου, the time for bed, tale-telling, or sleep, Od.3.334, 11.379, cf. Hdt.1.10;

    ὥρη δόρποιο Od.14.407

    ;

    περὶ ἀρίστου ὥραν Th.7.81

    , X.HG1.1.13;

    πολυηράτου ἐς γάμου ὥρην Od.15.126

    ;

    ἐς γάμου ὥρην ἀπικέσθαι Hdt. 6.61

    ;

    γάμων ἔχειν ὥραν D.H.5.32

    ; so εἰς ἀνδρὸς ὥραν ἥκουσα time for a husband, Pl.Criti. 113d; ὥρη ἀρότου, ἀμήτου, Hes.Op. 460, 575;

    μέχρι ἀρότου ὥρης IG7.235.3

     (Oropus, iv B. C.);

    καρπῶν ὧραι Ar.Ra. 1034

     (anap.);

    ἡ ὥρα τῆς ὀχείας Arist.HA 509b20

    ; τοῦ φωλεύειν ib. 579a26, etc.; also ὥραν εἶχον παιδεύεσθαι I was of age to.. Is.9.28.
    3 ὥρα [ἐστίν] c. inf., it is time to do a thing,

    ἀλλὰ καὶ ὥρη εὕδειν Od.11.330

    , cf. 373; so also in Trag. and [dialect] Att., E.Ph. 1584, Heracl. 288 (anap.), Ar.Ec.30, Pl.Prt. 361e, 362a; so

    δοκεῖ οὐχ ὥρα εἶναι καθεύδειν X.An.1.3.11

    , cf. HG7.2.13 (dub. l.): c. acc. et inf.,

    ὥρα δ' ἐμπόρους καθιέναι ἄγκυραν A.Ch. 661

    , cf. S.OT 466 (lyr.): c. dat. et inf., X.Cyr.4.5.1, Pl.Tht. 145b: in these phrases the inf. [tense] pres. is almost universal; the [tense] aor., however, occurs in Od.21.428, S.Aj. 245 (lyr.), Ar.Ach. 393 (where also ἐστί is added to ὥρα, as in Philyll.3, ἀφαιρεῖν ὥρα 'στὶν ἤδη τὰς τραπέζας); and the [tense] pf. in

    ὥρα πεπαῦσθαι Plu.2.728d

    : sts. the inf. must be supplied,

    οὐδέ τί σε χρή, πρὶν ὥρη, καταλέχθαι Od.15.394

    , cf. E.El. 112 (lyr.), Ar.Ec. 877; ὥρα κἠς οἶκον (i. e. ἰέναι εἰς οἶκον) Theoc.15.147.
    4 in various adverb. usages,

    τὴν ὥρην

     at the right time,

    Hdt.2.2

    , 8.19, X.Oec.20.16: but τὴν ὥ. at that hour, Hes.Sc. 401; ταύτην τὴν ὥραν at this season, X.Cyn.9.1;

    [ἡ ἶρις] πᾶσαν ὥραν γίγνεται τῆς ἡμέρας Arist.Mete. 371b31

    ;

    δείελον ὥρην παύομαι ἀμήτοιο A.R. 3.417

    ; ὥραν οὐδενὸς κοινὴν θεῶν at an hour.., A.Eu. 109, cf. E.Ba. 724, Aeschin.1.9; αὐτῆς ὥρας immediately, PMich. in Class.Phil.22.255(iii A. D.); ἐν ὥρῃ in due season, in good time, Od.17.176, Hdt. 1.31, cf. Pi.O.6.28, Ar.V. 242, etc.; also αἰεὶ εἰς ὥρας in successive seasons, Od.9.135; ἐς τὰς ὥρας for all time, Ar.Ra. 382 (lyr. cf. supr. A. 1.3) (hence in an acclamation [ε] ἰς ὥρας πᾶσι τοῖς τὴν πόλιν φιλοῦσιν hurrah for.., POxy.41.29 (iii/iv A. D.));

    οἱ ὧδε χέζοντες εἰς ὥ. μὴ ἔλθοιεν Milet.2(3)

     No.406, cf.

    ὥρασι; καθ' ὥραν Theoc.18.12

    , Plb.1.45.4, cf. 3.93.6, etc.; opp.

    παρ' ὥρην AP7.534

     (Alex.Aet. or Autom.), cf. Plu.2.784b, etc.:—

    πρὸ τῆς ὥρας X.Oec.20.16

    ;

    πρὸ ὥρας Luc.Luct.13

    ;

    πρὸ ὥρας τελευτῆσαι IG42(1).84.26

     (Epid., i A. D.);

    πρὶν ὥρας Pi.P.4.43

     (cf.

    πρίν A. 11.4

    ).
    II metaph., the spring-time of life, the bloom of youth, Mimn.3.1;

    ὥραν ἐχούσας A.Supp. 997

    , cf. Th.13, 535;

    παῖδας πρὸς τέρμασιν ὥρας Ar.Av. 705

     (anap.);

    πάντες οἱ ἐν ὥρᾳ Pl.R. 474d

    ; οὐκ ἐνὥ., = πρεσβύτερος, Id.Phdr. 240d;

    ἐὰν ἐπὶ ὥρᾳ ᾖ Id.R. 474e

    ;

    ἕως ἂν ἐν ὥρᾳ ὦσι Id.Men. 76b

    ; παυσαμένου τῆς ὥ. prob. in Id.Phdr. 234a;

    ἀνθεῖν ἐν ὥ. Id.R. 475a

    ;

    τὴν ὥ. διαφυλάξαι ἄβατον τοῖς πονηροῖς Isoc.10.58

    ; λήγειν ὥρας, opp. ἀνθεῖν, Pl.Alc.1.131e;

    ἑς ἐπιγινόμενόν τι τέλος, οἷον τοῖς ἀκμαίοις ἡ ὥρα Arist.EN 1174b33

    , cf. 1157a8.
    2 freq. involving an idea of beauty,

    φεῦ φεῦ τῆς ὥρας τοῦ κάλλους Ar.Av. 1724

    (lyr.);

    ὥρᾳ.. ἡλικίας λαμπρός Th.6.54

    ;

    κάλλει καὶ ὥρᾳ διενεγκόντες Aeschin.1.134

    , cf. ib.158;

    καλὸς ὥρᾳ τε κεκραμένος Pi.O.10(11).104

    , cf. X.Mem. 2.1.22, Pl.Lg. 837b;

    ἀφ' ὥρας ἐργάζεσθαι

     quaestum corpore facere,

    Plu.

    Tim..14, cf. X.Mem..1.6.13, Smp.8.21;

    τὴν ὥ. πεπωληκότες Phld.Rh.1.344

     S.:—then,
    b generally, beauty, grace, elegance of style, D.H.Pomp.2, Plu.2.874b, etc.;

    γλυκύτης καὶ ὥ. Hermog.Id.2.3

    , cf. Men.Rh.p.335 S., Him.Or.1.2; of beauty in general,

    χάρις καὶ ὥρα Plu.2.128d

    .
    3 Ὥρα personified, like Ἥβη, Pi.N.8.1.
    III = τὰ ὡραῖα, the produce of the season, fruits of the year,

    ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐτρέφοντο X.HG2.1.1

    .
    C personified, αἱὯραι, the Hours, keepers of heaven's cloudgate, Il.5.749, 8.393; and ministers of the gods, ib. 433;

    Ζεῦ, τεαὶ.. Ὧραι Pi.O.4.2

    ; esp. of Aphrodite, h.Hom.6.5,12; also Ὧ. Διονυσιάδες, Καρνειάδες, Simon.148, Call.Ap.87; three in number, Eunomia, Dike, Eirene, daughters of Zeus and Themis, Hes.Th. 901;

    Ωραι πολυάνθεμοι Pi.O.13.17

    , cf. Alex.261.6, Theoc.1.150, etc.: freq. joined with the Χάριτες, h.Ap. 194, Hes.Op.75; worshipped at Athens, Paus.9.35.1; at Argos, Id.2.20.5; at Attaleia, BMus.Inscr. 1044 (i B. C.).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὥρα

  • 15 ἅγιος

    ἅγιος, ία, ον orig. a cultic concept, of the quality possessed by things and persons that could approach a divinity (so among the Trag. poets only Thespis, Fgm. 4 p. 833 Nauck2 βωμῶν ἁγίων, but found since V B.C. as a cultic term in Ion. and Att., e.g. ἱρόν Hdt. 2, 41; 44; Pla., Critias 116c, τόπος Leg. 904e; τελεταί Aristoph., Nub. 304 and Demosth. 25, 11 [ἁγιώταται τ.]; above all in the mysteries [GWobbermin, Rel. gesch. Studien 1896, 59ff, cp. OGI 721, 1 τῶν ἁγιωτάτων, Ἐλευσῖνι μυστηρίων]; LXX [HGehman, VetusT 4, ’54, 337–48]; LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.)
    ① as adj. pert. to being dedicated or consecrated to the service of God
    ⓐ in the cultic sense dedicated to God, holy, sacred, i.e. reserved for God and God’s service:
    α. of things ἁ. πόλις of Jerusalem (Appian, Syr. 50, §250: Jerus. is called the ἁγιωτάτη πόλις of the Jews; also Mithrid. 106 §498; Is 48:2; 52:1; 66:20; 2 Esdr 21:1; Da 3:28; 1 Macc 2:7 al.; B-D-F §474, 1) Mt 4:5; 27:53; Rv 11:2; of the heavenly Jerusalem 21:2, 10; 22:19; τόπος ἅ. of the temple (2 Macc 2:18; 8:17; 3 Macc 2:14) Mt 24:15; Ac 6:13; 21:28, but of the next life 1 Cl 5:7, like ὁ ἅ. αἰών the holy age = αἰὼν μέλλων (cp. in the addition to the Lat. transl. of Sir 17:27 ‘aevum sanctum’) B 10:11; γῆ ἁ. (2 Macc 1:7; TestJob 33:5) Ac 7:33 (Ex 3:5); ὄρος ἅ. (Wsd 9:8; Ps 14:1; 42:3 al.—Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 1 §2 τὸ ὄρος τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦδε [i.e. something extremely significant occurred] κλῃζόμενον ἱερόν) of the mountain of Transfiguration 2 Pt 1:18; σκεύη (1 Esdr 8:57; 1 Macc 4:49) Ox 840, 14; 21; 29 (ASyn. 150, 112; 114; 116); σκηνή Hb 9:2 (JSwetnam, CBQ 32, ’70, 205–21, defends the Vulgate transl.). διαθήκη (Da 11:28ff Theod.; 1 Macc 1:15) Lk 1:72; γραφαί Ro 1:2 (cp. 1 Macc 12:9; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 159); εὐαγγέλιον AcPlCor 2:36. λόγος 1 Cl 13:3; 56:3; Dg 7:2 (cp. Herm. Wr. 1:18 ὁ θεὸς εἶπεν ἁγίῳ λόγῳ). Since Christians are called ‘holy ones’ (s. 2dβ), their κλῆσις is also ἁ. 2 Ti 1:9; so also of the ἐντολή given them 2 Pt 2:21. Their community forms an ἐκκλησία ἁ. ITr ins; Hv 1, 1, 6; 1, 3, 4; cp. 4, 1, 3, as well as a ἱεράτευμα ἅ. 1 Pt 2:5 and an ἔθνος ἅ. (Wsd 17:2) vs. 9. For φίλημα ἅ. s. φίλημα.—πίστις is ἁγιωτάτη most holy Jd 20 (for the superl. cp. Pla., Leg. 729e; Diod S 3, 44, 2 ἱερὸν ἁγιώτατον=an exceptionally holy temple; SIG 339, 14; 768, 16 [31 B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 16, 115; ἁγιώτατος θεός: OGI 755, 1; 756, 3; cp. PGM 4, 668. Of the synagogue CIJ 754; 781; 867).
    β. of humans and transcendent beings
    א. of human beings consecrated to God, holy, pure, reverent (CB I/2, 386 no. 232, 8 [early III A.D.] of a gentile: Γάϊος, ὡς ἅγιος, ὡς ἀγαθός) prophets (Wsd 11:1; cp. ἅ. Ἀβράμ Did., Gen. 228, 23) Lk 1:70; Ac 3:21; 2 Pt 3:2. John the Baptist (w. δίκαιος) Mk 6:20; apostles Eph 3:5; of Polycarp, in EpilMosq 1; 3; 5; αἱ ἅ. γυναῖκες 1 Pt 3:5. Israel a λαὸς ἅ. (Is 62:12; Sir 49:12 v.l.; Da 7:27;PsSol PsSol:17) 1 Cl 8:3; cp. B 14:6; πᾶν ἄρσεν τῷ κυρίῳ Lk 2:23.—The Christians (Orig., C. Cels 3, 60, 16) ἅ. ἔσεσθε 1 Pt 1:16a (Lev 19:2). Charismatics (?; so EKäsemann, Beiträge zur Hist. Theol. 9, ’33, 146, n. 5) Col 1:26. ἀδελφοὶ ἅ. Hb 3:1; their children 1 Cor 7:14 (GDelling, Studien zum NT, ’70, 270–80, 281–87=Festschrift Fascher, 84–93; JBlinzler in Festschrift Schmid, ’63, 23–41; KAland, Die Stellung d. Kinder in d. frühen christl. Gemeinden u. ihre Taufe, ’67, 13–17). Presbyters IMg 3:1. W. ἄμωμος Eph 1:4; 5:27; Col 1:22; ἅ. ἐν ἀναστροφῇ 1 Pt 1:15, cp. D 10:6.
    ב. of angels holy (Job 5:1; Tob 11:14; 12:15; cp. Bousset, Rel.3 321; Cat. Cod. Astr. VIII/2 p. 176, 19; cp. PGM 4, 668; AscIs 3, 16) Mk 8:38; Lk 9:26; Ac 10:22; Rv 14:10; 1 Cl 39:7; Hv 2, 2, 7; 3, 4, 1f; ἐν ἁ. μυριάσιν αὐτοῦ w. his holy myriads Jd 14 (w. ἄγγελος P72; cp. En 1:9).
    ג. of Christ holy τὸν ἅγιον παῖδά σου Ac 4:27, 30; τὸ γεννώμενον ἅ. κληθήσεται Lk 1:35; GJs 11:3 (ἅ. belongs to the pred.).
    ד. of God (Aristoph., Av. 522; Pla., Soph. 249a; OGI 262, 25; 378, 1 [19 A.D.] θεῷ ἁγίῳ ὑψίστῳ; 590, 1; 620, 2 [98 A.D.]; UPZ 79, 22 [159 B.C.] of Isis; likew. POxy 1380, 34; 36; 89; IDefixWünsch 4, 10 τὸν ἅ. Ἑρμῆν; Herm. Wr. 1, 31; PGM 1, 198; 3, 312; 4, 851; 2093. Further exx. in Wobbermin 70; Cumont3 266.—LXX; Philo, Sacr. Abel. 101; SibOr 3, 478) holy J 17:11; 1 Pt 1:16b (Lev 19:2); Rv 4:8 (Is 6:3; TestAbr A 3, p. 79, 19 [Stone p. 6]; ParJer 9:3.—The threefold ἅγιος serves to emphasize the idea, as the twofold καλὸν καλόν=indescribably beautiful Theocr. 8, 73); 6:10. Of God’s name (LXX; PGM 4, 1190; 13, 638) Lk 1:49; 1 Cl 64.
    ה. of spirit τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον or τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα or πν. ἅ., s. πνεῦμα 5c.
    ⓑ shading over into the sense holy = pure, perfect, worthy of God (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Παλική: ὅρκος ἅγιος) θυσία Ro 12:1. ἀναστροφαί 2 Pt 3:11. Of the divine law Ro 7:12; ἀπαρχή (cp. Ezk 48:9ff) 11:16a; ναός (Ps 10:4; 17:7 al.; Jos., Bell. 7, 379; cp. ἱερὸν ἅ.: Hdt. 2, 41; Diod S 5, 72, 3; 15, 14, 3; Paus., 10, 32, 13) 1 Cor 3:17; Eph 2:21.
    ② used as a pure subst. the holy (thing, pers.)
    ⓐ ἅγιον, ου, τό that which is holy
    α. concrete sacrificial meat (Lev 22:14.—Also concr. θύειν τὸ ἱερόν: 67th letter of Apollon. of Ty. [Philostrat. I 363, 30 K.]) μὴ δῶτε τὸ ἅ. τοῖς κυσίν Mt 7:6; cp. D 9:5. Cp. 1QS 9:17.
    β. sanctuary (OGI 56, 59 [239 B.C.]; UPZ 119, 12 [156 B.C.]; Num 3:38; Ezk 45:18; 1 Esdr 1:5 v.l.; 1 Macc 10:42; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 125; Jos., Ant. 3, 125) τὸ ἅ. κοσμικόν Hb 9:1.
    ⓑ ἅγια, ων, τά sanctuary (Jdth 4:12; 16:20; 1 Macc 3:43, 59 al.; Philo, Fuga 93 οἷς [sc. ἡ Λευιτικὴ φύλη] ἡ τῶν ἁγίων ἀνάκειται λειτουργία; Jos., Bell. 2, 341) Hb 8:2; 9:24f; 13:11. Also the front, or outer part of the temple, the holy place (3 Km 8:8; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 226) Hb 9:2. τὰ ἅ. of the heavenly sanctuary (SibOr 3, 308) vs. 12; 10:19.—(τὰ) ἅγια (τῶν) ἁγίων the holy of holies (3 Km 8:6; 2 Ch 4:22; 5:7; GrBar ins 2; Philo, Leg. All. 2, 56. Cp. Polyb. 16, 12, 7 τὸ τοῦ ΔιὸϚ ἄβατον.—Formed like κακὰ κακῶν Soph., Oed. C. 1238, ἄρρητʼ ἀρρήτων Oed. R. 465; ἔσχατα ἐσχάτων Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 260 D.; B-D-F §141, 8; 245, 2) Hb 9:3; IPhld 9:1; GJs 8:3; 13:2; 15:3. Of Christians 1 Cl 29:3 (cp. 2 Ch 31:14; Ezk 48:12).
    ⓒ ἅγιος, ου, ὁ the holy one
    α. of God (En 14:1; 97:6; 98:6; 104:9) 1J 2:20 (β is also prob. [s. OPiper, JBL 66, ’47, 437–51]).
    β. of Christ ὁ ἅ. Rv 3:7; 1 Cl 23:5; Dg 9:2; ὁ ἅ. καὶ δίκαιος Ac 3:14. ὁ ἅ. τοῦ θεοῦ Mk 1:24; Lk 4:34; J 6:69 (cp. Ps 105:16 ὁ ἅ. κυρίου of Aaron).
    γ. of the martyr Polycarp EpilMosq 2 (of psalmists Did., Gen. 60, 18).
    ⓓ ἅγιοι, ων, οἱ the holy ones
    α. of angels (Zech 14:5; Ps 88:6; En 1:9; PsSol 17:43; PGM 1, 198; 4, 1345; 1347). For 1 Th 3:13; 2 Th 1:10; D 16, 7; Col 1:12 (cp. 1QS 11:7f), β is also prob.
    β. believers, loyal followers, saints of Christians as consecrated to God (cp. Is 4:3; Tob 8:15; Ps 33:10; Da 7:18, 21) Ac 9:13, 32; Ro 8:27; 12:13; 15:25 (Ltzm., exc. ad loc. on the early community in Jerusalem); 1 Cor 6:1f; 2 Cor 1:1; Eph 2:19; 3:8; Phil 4:22; Col 1:4; 1 Ti 5:10; Hb 6:10; Rv 22:21 v.l. (s. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 56f); D 16:7 perh.; 1 Cl 46:2; Hv 1, 1, 9 al.; κλητοὶ ἅ. Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:2; οἱ ἅ. αὐτοῦ Col 1:26; cp. Ac 9:13; Hv 3, 8, 8; οἱ ἅ. καὶ πιστοὶ αὐτοῦ ISm 1:2.
    γ. of other people esp. close to God (Dionys. Soph., Ep. 70 σωφροσύνη … προσήγαγέ σε θεῷ … τοῖς ἁγίοις παρέστησεν) Mt 27:52; cp. Rv 18:20, 24; Eph 2:19.—FJDölger, ΙΧΘΥΣ 1910, 180–83; WLink, De vocis ‘sanctus’ usu pagano, diss. Königsb. 1910; AFridrichsen, Hagios-Qadoš 1916; EWilliger, Hagios 1922; JDillersberger, Das Heilige im NT 1926; HDelehaye, Sanctus 19272; ’33; RAsting, D. Heiligkeit im Urchristentum 1930; UBunzel, D. Begriff der Heiligkeit im AT, diss. Breslau 1914; JHänel, D. Religion d. Heiligkeit ’31; PChantraine/OMasson, Debrunner Festschr., ’54, 85–107; FNötscher, Vom Alten zum NT, ’62, 126–74 (Qumran). SWoodward, JETS 24, ’81, 107–16 (Qumran displays transition from association of the term for ‘saints’ with celestial beings to human beings, s. 1QS 5:6f; 8:5 and 8).—B. 1475. EDNT. DDD 1359–64. New Docs 4, 111. DELG s.v. ἅζομαι. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἅγιος

  • 16 τέκνον

    τέκνον, ου, τό (τίκτω ‘engender, bear’; Hom.+ ‘child’)
    ① an offspring of human parents, child
    ⓐ without ref. to sex Mt 10:21a (on the complete dissolution of family ties s. Lucian, Cal. 1; GrBar 4:17; ApcEsdr 3:14 p. 27, 23 Tdf.; Just., A I, 27, 3f; Orig., C. Cels. 6, 43, 25 [Job’s children]); Mk 13:12a; Lk 1:7; Ac 7:5; Rv 12:4. Pl. Mt 7:11; 10:21b; 18:25; 19:29; 22:24 (=σπέρμα, cp. Dt 25:5f, but σπ. and τ. are contrasted Ro 9:7); Mk 13:12b; Lk 1:17; 14:26; 1 Cor 7:14 (on the baptism of children s. HWood, EncRelEth II 392ff; JLeipoldt, D. urchr. Taufe 1928, 73–78; AOepke, LIhmels Festschr. 1928, 84–100, ZNW 29, 1930, 81–111 [against him HWindisch, ZNW 28, 1929, 118–42]; JJeremias, Hat d. Urkirche d. Kindertaufe geübt? ’38; 2d ed. ’49; Die Kindert. in d. ersten 4 Jhdtn. ’58; revisited D. Anfänge d. Kindert. ’62; s. also ZNW 40, ’42, 243–45. KAl-and, D. Saülingst. im NT u. in d. alten Kirche ’62, 2d ed. ’63; Die Stellung d. Kinder in d. frühe christl. Gemeinden, und ihre Taufe ’67. KBarth, Z. kirchl. Lehre v. d. Taufe2 ’43; D. Taufe als Begründung d. christlichen Lebens in Kirchliche Dogmatik IV, 4, ’67; for discussion of Barth’s views, s. EJüngel, K. Barths Lehre v. d. Taufe ’68; KViering (ed.), Zu K. Barth’s Lehre v. d. Taufe ’71; K. Aland, Taufe u. Kindertaufe ’71; HHubert, D. Streit um d. Kindertaufe, ’72. FFr̓vig, TTK 11, ’40, 124–31; EMolland, NorTT 43, ’42, 1–23; F-JLeenhardt, Le Baptème chrétien ’46; OCullmann, D. Tauflehre d. NT ’48; P-HMenoud, Verbum Caro 2, ’48, 15–26; HSchlier, TLZ 72, ’47, 321–26; GFleming, Baptism in the NT ’49; GBeasley-Murray, Baptism in the New Testament ’62; WKümmel, TRu 18, ’50, 32–47; GDelling, D. Taufe im NT ’63; EDinkler, Die Taufaussagen d. NT ’71 [in: KViering, s. above, 60–153]; JDidier, Le baptême des enfants ’59; HKraft, Texte z. Gesch. d. Taufe bes. d. Kindert. i. d. alten Kirche, Kl. T. no. 174, 2d ed. ’69); 2 Cor 12:14ab (simile); 1 Th 2:7 (simile), 11 (simile); 1 Ti 3:4, 12; 5:4 al. In the table of household duties (s. MDibelius Hdb. exc. after Col 4:1; KWeidinger, Die Haustafeln 1928) Eph 6:1 (τὰ τέκνα voc.), 4; Col 3:20 (τὰ τ. voc.), 21. In the case of φονεῖς τέκνων B 20:2; D 5:2, what follows shows that murders of their own children are meant.—The unborn fetus is also called τέκνον B 19:5; D 2:2 (like παιδίον: Hippocr., π. σαρκ. 6 vol. VIII 592 L. On Jesus’ attitude toward children, cp. JKalogerakos, Aristoteles’ Bild von der Frau: ΠΛΑΤΩΝ 46, ’94, 159–83, esp. p. 174 and notes [cp. Aristot., EN 1161b].).
    ⓑ The sex of the child can be made clear by the context, son (Herodian 7, 10, 7; PGen 74, 1ff; PAmh 136, 1f; POxy 930, 18; Jos., Ant. 14, 196; Just., D. 56, 5; 134, 4) Mt 21:28a; Phil 2:22 (simile); Rv 12:5; GJs 22;3. The voc. τέκνον as an affectionate address to a son Mt 21:28b; Lk 2:48; 15:31. In a more general sense the pl. is used for
    ② descendants from a common ancestor, descendants, posterity Ῥαχὴλ κλαίουσα τὰ τέκνα αὐτῆς Mt 2:18 (Jer 38:15).—27:25; Ac 2:39; 13:33. A rich man is addressed by his ancestor Abraham as τέκνον Lk 16:25. τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκός the physical descendants Ro 9:8a.
    ③ one who is dear to another but without genetic relationship and without distinction in age, child
    ⓐ in the voc. gener. as a form of familiar address my child, my son (Herodian 1, 6, 4; ParJer 5:30; Achilles Tat. 8, 4, 3. Directed to fully grown persons, Vi. Aesopi G 60 P., where a peasant addresses Aesop in this way) Mt 9:2; Mk 2:5.
    ⓑ of a spiritual child in relation to master, apostle, or teacher (PGM 4, 475.—Eunap. p. 70 the sophist applies this term to his students) 2 Ti 1:2; Phlm 10. τέκνον ἐν κυρίῳ 1 Cor 4:17. τέκ. ἐν πίστει 1 Ti 1:2. τέκ. κατὰ κοινὴν πίστιν Tit 1:4. Pl. 1 Cor 4:14; 2 Cor 6:13; 3J 4. In direct address (voc.): sing. (on dir. address in the sing. cp. Sir 2:1 and oft.; Herm. Wr. 13, 2ab; PGM 13, 226; 233; 742; 755.—S. also Norden, Agn. Th. 290f; Boll 138f): 1 Ti 1:18; 2 Ti 2:1; D 3:1, 3–6; 4:1. Pl.: Mk 10:24; B 15:4.—1 Cl 22:1 understands the τέκνα of Ps 33:12 as a word of Christ to Christians. Cp. B 9:3. The address in Gal 4:19 is intended metaphorically for children for whom Paul is once more undergoing the pains of childbirth.—The adherents of false teachers are also called their τέκνα Rv 2:23.
    ⓒ of the members of a congregation 2J 1; 4; 13. In Hermas the venerable lady, who embodies the Christian communities, addresses the believers as τέκνα Hv 3, 9, 1. In Gal 4:31 οὐκ ἐσμὲν παιδίσκης τέκνα ἀλλὰ τῆς ἐλευθέρας posts a dramatic image = ‘we belong not to a community dependent on the rules of Sinai, but to one that adheres to the promises made to Abraham’.
    ④ one who has the characteristics of another being, child
    ⓐ of those who exhibit virtues of ancient worthies: children of Abraham Mt 3:9; Lk 3:8; J 8:39; Ro 9:7. True Christian women are children of Sarah 1 Pt 3:6.
    ⓑ of those who exhibit characteristics of transcendent entities: the believers are (τὰ) τέκνα (τοῦ) θεοῦ (cp. Is 63:8; Wsd 16:21; SibOr 5, 202; Just., D. 123, 9; 124, 1. On the subj. matter s. HHoltzmann, Ntl. Theologie I2 1911, 54; Bousset, Rel.3 377f; ADieterich, Mithrasliturgie 1903, 141ff; Hdb. on J 1:12; WGrundmann, Die Gotteskindschaft in d. Gesch. Jesu u. ihre relgesch. Voraussetzungen ’38; WTwisselmann, D. Gotteskindsch. der Christen nach dem NT ’39; SLegasse, Jésus et L’enfant [synopt.], ’69), in Paul as those adopted by God Ro 8:16f, 21; 9:7, 8b (opp. σπέρμα); Phil 2:15, s. also Eph 5:1; in John as those begotten by God J 1:12; 11:52; 1J 3:1f, 10a; 5:2. Corresp. τὰ τέκνα τοῦ διαβόλου 1J 3:10b (on this subj. s. Hdb. on J 8:44).—Cp. Ac 17:28, where the idea of kinship w. deity is complex because of semantic components not shared by polytheists and those within Israelite tradition.—Cp. 6 below.
    ⑤ inhabitants of a city, children, an Hebraistic expression (Rdm.2 p. 28; Mlt-H. 441; s. Jo 2:23; Zech 9:13; Bar 4:19, 21, 25 al.; 1 Macc 1:38; PsSol 11:2) Mt 23:37; Lk 13:34; 19:44; Gal 4:25.
    ⑥ a class of persons with a specific characteristic, children of. τ. is used w. abstract terms (for this Hebraism s. prec.; ἀνάγκης, ἀγνοίας Just., A I, 61, 10) τέκνα ἀγάπης B 9:7; ἀγ. καὶ εἰρήνης 21:9 (ἀγάπη 1bα). εὐφροσύνης 7:1 (s. εὐφροσύνη). δικαιοσύνης AcPlCor 2:19. κατάρας 2 Pt 2:14 (s. κατάρα). ὀργῆς Eph 2:3; AcPlCor 2:19. ὑπακοῆς 1 Pt 1:14. φωτός Eph 5:8; cp. IPhld 2:1. On the ‘children of wisdom’, i.e. those who attach themselves to her and let themselves be led by her Mt 11:19 v.l.; Lk 7:35 s. δικαιόω 2bα. Cp. 4b above.—Billerbeck I 219f, 371–74; BHHW II 947–49; III 1935–37.—DELG s.v. τίκτω. Frisk. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > τέκνον

См. также в других словарях:

  • With You and Without You — was a book written by Ann M. Martin in 1986.Liza O Hara s family is abruptly confronted with the news that Mr. O Hara is dying from heart disease. After the initial shock the family unites to make his last months as enjoyable as possible… …   Wikipedia

  • Age of Empires II: The Age of Kings — This article is about the original video game. For the Nintendo DS version, see Age of Empires: The Age of Kings. Age of Empires II: The Age of Kings Developer(s) Ensemble Studios …   Wikipedia

  • age — age1 [ eıdʒ ] noun *** ▸ 1 number of years lived ▸ 2 time of life for doing something ▸ 3 period of history ▸ 4 being/becoming old ▸ 5 long time ▸ + PHRASES 1. ) count or uncount the number of years that someone has lived: It was difficult to… …   Usage of the words and phrases in modern English

  • Age of Empires (video game) — Age of Empires Developer(s) …   Wikipedia

  • age — I UK [eɪdʒ] / US noun Word forms age : singular age plural ages *** Talking or writing about someone s age: asking about age how old used for asking someone their age or talking about their age: How old are you now, Peter? ♦ I m not sure how old… …   English dictionary

  • Age of Enlightenment — Age of Reason redirects here. For other uses, see Age of Reason (disambiguation) …   Wikipedia

  • Age of Mythology: The Titans — Developer(s) Ensemble Studios Publisher(s) Microsoft Game Studios …   Wikipedia

  • With the Lights Out — Box set by Nirvana Released November 23, 2004 …   Wikipedia

  • Age of Conan: Hyborian Adventures — North American cover Developer(s) Funcom Publisher(s) Funcom Eidos Interactive …   Wikipedia

  • Age of Apocalypse — Infobox comics story arc imagesize= caption=Cover to X Men Alpha . Art by Joe Madureira. publisher = Marvel Comics date = 1995 1996 titles= Age of Apocalypse: The Chosen Amazing X Men #1 4 Astonishing X Men #1 4 Factor X #1 4 Gambit the X Ternals …   Wikipedia

  • age — [[t]e͟ɪʤ[/t]] ♦ ages, ageing, aging, aged (The spelling aging is also used, mainly in American English.) 1) N VAR Your age is the number of years that you have lived. She has a nephew who is just ten years of age... At the age of sixteen he… …   English dictionary

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»